A theoretical and practical Italian grammar - National Library of ...

"^ 

— EDUCATIONAL WORKS 

PUBLISHED r.V 

6 ijCM %^C 

OLIVER and BOYD, EdinlDurgh; 

Siixipkin, Marshall, and Co., Ijondon. 

ENGLISH READING, GRAMIWAR, ETC. s. d. 

Aemstkong's English Composition, Part I. Is. Gel.—Part II 2 

Both Parts in one, 3s.—Key to ditto 2 

English Etymology, 2s.— Do. for Junior Classes 4 

Child's atory Book. Illustrated 1 

Colville's Primer IJ 

First Headiug-Book, 95 jmges 4 

Second Reading-Book, 4d.—Third Keading-Book 8 

Fourth Keading-Book, 216 pages 1 3 

Fifth Keading-Book, 300 pages 1 6 

Sixth Keading-Book, 394 pages 2 6 

Dalgleish's Outlines of Grammar and Analysis IKey, Is.] 6 

Progressive English Grammar [Ket/, 2s. 6d.] 2 

Grammatical Analysis, with Exercises \_Key, 2s.] 9 

Outlines of Englisli Composition [iTey, 4d.] 6 

Introductory Text-Book of English Composition 1 

Advanced Text-Bookof English Composition 2 

*,* Both Text-Books bound together, 2s. 6d. The Key... 2 6 

Douglas's First Book, 2d.—Second Book, 4d.—Third Book 1 

Fourth Book, Is. 6d.—Fifth Book, 2s.—Sixth Book 2 6 

Spelling and Dictation Exercises 1 

Selections for Recitation 1 6 

Initiatory English Grammar, including Analysis 6 

Principles of English Grammar, including Analysis.... 1 6 

English Etymology, with Exercises 2 

Etymological Guide to the English Language 1 6 

Lamb's Tales from Shakespeare. Illustrated 1 

Lennie's English Grammar, including Analysis [The Key, 3s. 6d.] 1 6 

M'Culloch's First Book, lid.; or, 2 Parts, in Large Type each 2 

Second Keading-Book, 3d.—Third Reading-Book 10 

Fourth Keading-Book and Synopsis of Spelling 1 6 

Series of Lessons in Prose and Verse 2 

Course of Reading in Science and Literature 3 

Manual 01 English Grammar, including Analysis.... 1 6 

Peyde'b Studies in Composition. For Advanced Classes 2 

Reid'b Rudiments of English Grammar, including Analysis 6 

Rudiments of English Composition [The Key, 2s. 6d.] 2 

Pronouncing Dictionary of the Eng. Language. ..redaeed to 2 6 

Robinson Ceusoe. Illustrated. Oliver and Boyd's School Edition 1 

Sessional School Old and New Testament Biography each 6 

Spalding's (Professor) History of English Literature 3 6 

White's System of English Grammar, including Analysis 1 6

Oliver and Boyci's Educational Works. 

GEOGRAPHY. s. d. 

Clyde's Elementary Geography, with 5 coloured Maps 1 6 

School Geography, with 9 coloured Maps 4 

DouGLAs'stntroductoryGeography.Bd.—Progressive Geography. 1 

Text-BookofGeography,2s.6d.; withlOcoloiiredMaps ) coloured Maps 3 

Lawsok's Geographical Primer 

2"\ 

Geography of England 

Geography of Scotland and Ireland... 

2 f 

,^-'-'', 

Geography of Europe, 3d.— Colonies. 

Geography of Asia, Africa, & America 4 J 

Class-Book of Geography, being the above Six Books 

bound in One Volume, with 7 coloured Maps 1 6 

Geographical First Book, with Diagrams and Map 2 

England and Wales, a Geographical Reading-Book for 

Standard III. Illustrations and Maps 1 

Primary Physical Geography, for Standards V. and 

VI., with diagrams and Maps 2 

Geography of the British Empire 3 

Outlines of Physiography ; in two Parts, 2s. 6d.; Parts 

sold separately ...each 1 6 

Elements of Physical Geographv, for Standard VIZ.... 6 

Text-Book of Physical Geography 3 6 

Olivee and Boyd's Pronouncing Gazetteer, 5s. ; or with Atlas.. 6 6 

School Atlas, 32 full-coloured Maps 1 

Handy Atlas 2 6 

Reid's Rudiments of Modern Geography, with 5 coloured Maps... 1 

First Book of Geography (Reid's Rudiments abridged) 6 

Reid's (Hugo) Astronomy. Brought down ly liev. Dr Mackay 3 

Phys. Geography, with Astronomy (Phys. Chart).. 1 

Stewart's Geog.,withPhys.Geog.andAstron.(llcolouredMaps). 3 6 

White's Abstract of General Geography, with 5 coloured Maps.. 1 

System of Modem Geography, 2s. 6d.; with 6 Maps 2 9 

HISTORY. 

Simpson's Goldsmith's England—Rome each 3 6 

T ytlee's Elements of General Histoiy . 2 Maps, Frontispiece, etc.. 3 6 

White's History of England, Is. 6d.—Scotland, Is.—Rome 1 6 

History of Great Britain and Ireland, with Map 3 

History of France, with Map, 3s. 6d.— Sacred History... 1 6 

Outlines of Universal History 2 

Elements of Universal History (or in 3 Parts, each 2s. 6d.] 7 

SCHOOL SONGS, WITH MUSIC. 

Hunteb's Elements of Vocal Music on the Sol-Fa System 6 

School Songs for Junior Classes: 60 Songs, mostly for 

2 voices. First Series, 4d.—Second Series: 63 Songs... 4 

School Songs Ibr Advanced Classes : 44 Songs, mostly 

for 3 voices, First Series, 6d.—Second Series : 46 Songs 6 

',* Toxic Sol-Fa Edition of both Sevies, Siducedin price :— 

Junior Classes, 2d.—Advanced Classes 2 

Hcntkb's National School Song Book, compo.sed of 89 Songs, 

Duets, Trios, Choruses, and Rounds : Tonic Sol-Fa. 4 

Wade's (Clipt) Songs for Schools, with Accompaniment. Oriîna^ 6 

Second Series 6 

[Continued at end of Book.

ITALIAN GRAMMAR.

A THEORETICAL AND TRACTICAL 

ITALIAN GRAMMAR 

WITU NUMEROUS EXERCISES AND EXAMPLES, ILLUSTRATIVE 

OF EVERY RULE, AND A SELECTION OF 

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES. 

#0r ibc cist of Stljools anb pribufc Stubnits. 

BY E. LEMMI, LL.D, 

OF THE UNITEBSITT OF PISA ; ADVOCATE OF FLORENCE ; 

ITALIAN TUTOR TO H.B.H. THE PRINCE OF WALES, ETC. 

Fourteenth Edition. 

EDINBURGH: 

OLIVER AND BOYD, TWEEDDALE COURT. 

LONDON: 

SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, AND CO.; P. ROLANDI, Bernebs Street. 

7

'HlNTliD BY OLIVER AND BOYD, EDINBUUGH 

Hi y

PREFACE. 

The principal motive which has induced us to prepare this Grammar, 

was the desire of placing in the hands of our Pupils a guide to the 

Italian language, in accordance with our own method of teachiag. 

We are far from imagining that we have succeeded in compiling an 

lUilian Grammar superior to the vast number of similar works that 

have already been published ; yet we trust that, owing to the simple 

and practical method we have adopted, this wUl prove of greater 

utility to the student than a more finished and complicated work. 

To circumscribe any language within the limits of precepts is a work 

of much difficulty, but especially so in the case of the ItaUan language, 

which never scruples " to snatch a gi-ace beyond the reach of art," by 

violating even those rules that grammarians attempt most emphatically 

to enforce. We have therefore been sparing of precept ; and, mindful 

that, we were writing for English, and not for Italian students, we have 

introduced only those theoretical remarks wliich long experience in 

teaching has shown us to be most useful for a practical and rapid 

acquirement of the Italian language. 

Each rule is clearly illustrated by examples and exercises ; and as 

we consider the best method of learning a foreign language to be that 

foUowod in the acquirement of one's own, in the beginning we have 

made use of short and simple phrases, which gradually become more 

difficult as the work proceeds ; and towards the end, when the student 

is supposed to be well grounded in the elementary part of the language, 

the exercises are stUl more difficult, and the examples are nearly all 

chosen. from the works of classical authors. In the fii'st lessons we have 

introduced the two auxiliaries, to have and to be, accompanied by some 

general rules for the use of verbs, in order that the pupil may have 

some notion of how they should be employed, even before he ima 

reached the Chapter which treats of them. 

The method we have adopted of numbering every word that refers 

to any preceding rule, cannot fail to be most useful in impressing on 

the mind of learners the subject of each lesson, as it obUges them con-

y\ PREFACE. 

stantly to refer to and to reconsider all the rules they have already 

studied throughout the Gramumr. 

As our design in preparing this book was to offer to the^ English 

student a clear and practical method of acquiring the Italian language, 

and not a treatise on the elements and principles of Grammar as a 

study, we have omitted those grammatical definitions and explanations 

which every educated English person must already know ; as it is to 

be supposed that, before attempting to acquire a foreign language, one 

must have studied one's own. 

We ofifer our work to our Pupils ; 

and should we have succeeded in 

rendering the study of the most classical and beautiful of languages 

pleasing to them, because clear and simple, we shall esteem ourselves 

rewarded for the labour we have bestowed on our Italian Grammar.

Ceaptee 

On the Pkoncxciation, 

CONTENTS. 

I. On the Prepositions called Segnacasi, 

II. On the Definite Article, 

On the Indefinite Article, . 

On the Partitive Article, . 

III. FoEUATioN of the Plural of Nouns, 

IV. Gen-dee, .... 

V. On the Adjectite, . 

Cardinal Numbers, . 

Ordinal Numbers, . 

VI. On AuGMENTATivES and DmrauTiTES, 

VII. On C0MPAP.ATIVE3 and Superlatives, 

YJH. On Personal Pronouns, 

On Possessive Pronouns, 

On Demonstative Pronouns, 

On Relative Pronouns, 

On Indefinite Adectives and Pronouns 

On the Particle Si, . 

IX. On Verbs, .... 

Table of Eegdlar Verbs, . 

Irregular Verbs, 

Transith-e and Intransitive Verbs, 

Reflected and Reciprocal Verbs, 

Impersonal Verbs, . 

Observations on Essere and Avere, 

On Moods and Tenses, 

On Will, Shall, Can, May, 

Idioms and Rejlaeks on Verbs,

vili CONTENTS.

ITALIAN ORAMMAR. 

ON THE PRONUNCIATION. 

The Italian Alphabet consists of twenty-two letters, pro- 

nounced as follows : 

— 

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, L, M, 

fl/e, lee^ tehee, dee, eh, effay, djee, acca, e, ee, elle, emme, 

N, 0, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, Z. 

eii7ie, 0, pea, con, erre, esse, tea, oo, voo, dzeta. 

The letter h is used in Italian before some persons of the 

present of the indicative of the verb to have, in which ease it is 

mute, and employed only to distinguish those persons of the verb 

from other words of a different signification ; Io ho, I have; tu 

hai, thou hast; egli ha, he has; eglino hanno, they have. 

It is also used in Interjections, when it gives a protracted 

sound to the vowel which precedes it,—as. Deh! pray! Ah! 

alas ! 

The letter h is used between the letters c-e, c-i, g-e, g-i, to 

give those letters a hard sound, in order to retain the primitive 

sound of their roots. 

Ca is pronounced as ca in the English -nord cat. 

Ce ... as cê in ... cherry. 

Che ... as ca m ... caper, 

a ... as chi in ... chicken. 

Chi ... as ... key. 

Go ... as CO in ... costly. 

Cu ... as cu in ... cuckoo. 

Ga ... AH gain ... garb. 

Ge ... asje in ... jelly. 

Ghe ... as ... gay.

2 ON THE PRONUNCIATION. 

— 

Gi is pronounced w&ji in the English word jig. 

Qhi ... as ^? in ... gig. 

Go ... as go in ... gospel. 

Gu ... as ^00 in ... good. 

See ... as sha in ... shape. 

Sci ... as ... she. 

Gli has no precise corresponding sound in English; that which 

most approaches it is found in the word billiard ; but in the 

words Anglia, Angli^ and in the verb negligere^ with its deriva- 

tives, gli must be pronounced as in English in the word negligent. 

J, called in Italian i lungo or long i, is pronounced like e at 

the beginning and in the middle of words, and like double ee 

when it is at the end, 

jeri, yesterday ; ajuto, help ; heneficj., 

benefits. 

The vowels e and o have two different sounds, one close, the 

other open ; as 

— 

Pesca, a peach, e open as in pest. 

Meiin, less, e close as in pain. 

Togliere, to take away, o open as in stop. 

Potere, power, o close as in note. 

The conjunction e is pronounced close ; the verb è accented, 

is pronounced open. 

The conjunction or is rendered by o close ; the verb / have 

is rendered by ho, and is pronounced open. 

There is no sign whatever for these two vowels e and o, in 

order to mark when the sound should be close or open; and the 

rules which might be given are so uncertain and so prolix, that 

we think they would serve more to confuse than assist the scholar. 

A teacher pronouncing the various sounds, and a close attention 

on the part of the pupil to the words so pronounced, will prove 

more useful than a treatise on pronunciation. 

The letter r, when followed by a consonant, must be well 

sounded, which is seldom sufficiently done by the English learner. 

The final vowels must be distinctly and audibly pronounced, 

80 that the final e may be clearly distinguished from i. 

When double consonants are found together they must be

distinctly pronounced ; 

ON THE ACCENT. 3 

the first consonant being sounded with the 

preceding syllable, and the second with that which follows, as in 

the English word unnecessary. 

ON THE ACCENT. 

In Italian orthography there is but one accent commonly em- 

ployed, which is the grave accent, marked thus ('). It is found 

on the final vowel of some words on which falls the stress of the 

voice, as in bontà, goodness ; virtù., virtue ; sarò, I shall be. 

These words are called tronche. 

When the stress of the voice falls on the last syllable but 

one, these words are called piane ; as pane, bread ; vino, wine. 

The words in which the stress of the voice falls on the last 

but two or more syllables, are called sdrucciole; as àbile, 

clever ; difficile, difficult ; caritatevole, charitable. 

Monosyllables receive no accent, therefore it is incorrect to 

write with an accent :/;>, he was ; su, upon. 

But monosyllables consisting of two vowels forming a diph- 

thong take an accent; a?, più, more ; pub, he can ; già, already; 

qua, qui, here. 

The following words must be marked with an accent, to dis- 

tinguish them from other words spelt alike, but having different 

significations : 

— 

è, is, a verb, e, and, a conjunction. 

dà, gives, a verb, da, from, a preposition. 

dì, day, a noun, di, of, a preposition. 

si, yes, an affirmative, si, pronoun conjunctive. 

ne, neither, conjunction, ne, some, a rei. pronoun. 

tè, tea, te, thee.

INFINITIVE. 

Essere, To be 

Io sono, 

tu sei, se', 

egli è, 

noi siamo, 

voi siete, 

eglino sono, 

CHAPTEE I. 

PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE. 

Io ho, 

INFINITIVE. 

Avere, To have, 

] 

tu hai, jLi 

egli ha, t3- 

7ioi abbiamo, % 

voi avete, •, 

eglino hanno, J 

ON THE PREPOSITIONS CALLED SEGNACASI, OR SIGNS 

OF THE CASES. 

As the Italian language does not admit of declensions, pre- 

positions called segnacasi are employed to express the various 

relations or cases, which in Latin and Greek are indicated by 

varying the terminations of nouns. 

These Prepositions are di, of; a, to; da, from. 

Di, of. 

1. The preposition di marks the relation of property, and is 

used in Italian to form the possessive case. Ex. 

La casa di mio padre, I My father's liouse. 

II poema di Dante, 

Le ale di un'aquila, \ 

Dante's poem. 

eagle's wings. 

2. It also denotes affinity or connexion of one object with 

another. Ex. 

Un amico di caâ, 

La voce del popolo, 

Il Duomo di Firenze, 

La pena di morte, 

An 

A fiiend of the family. 

Tlie voice of the people. 

The Cathedral of Florence. 

The pain of death. 

3. When one noun is used adjectively to qualify another, of 

which it indicates the character, country, material, Sfc, in Italian

PREPOSITIONJ 

tlic English order of tlie words must be reversed, and tlic two 

substantives be connected by di. Ex, 

Una casa di campagna, 

Un cucchiaio di argento, 

Il Castello di Edimburgo, 

Mercanti di vino, 

A coxmtry house. 

A silver spoon. 

Edinburgh Castle. 

Wine merchants. 

4. English compound nouns, one of which qualifies the other, 

are translated in the same manner. Ex. 

Lume di luna, I 

Moonlight. 

Stella della mattina, 

Morning-star. 

Raggio di sole, \ Sunbeam. 

5. Di is generally used before infinitives. Ex. 

To lio risoluto di studiare la lingua I have resolved to study the Ita- 

Italiana, 

Ho promesso di visitare sua sorella, 

Ho dimenticato di mandare la letlian 

language. 

I have promised to visit his sister. 

I have forgotten to send the letter 

tera alia posta, to the post. 

6. Di before a vowel may be curtailed of the i and receive 

an apostrophe ; before another i this elision always takes place. 

Ex. 

La repuhhlica di or à'America, Il bel clima d'Italia, 

; 

' 

The republic of America. 

The fine climate of Italy. 

' The fleet of England. 

La flotta à: Inghilterra, 

— 

EXERCISE I. 

I have read my father's letter.—He has taken his sister's 

letto (1) 2^'''^^'^ 

book.—We have bought a straw-bonnet. — I wish to 

il libro. 

speak to your 

comprato un paglia {2>) cappello, desidero [5) 

music-master. — They are wine-merchants. 

parlare al vostro musica (3) maestro. (3) 

—The agriculture of Scotland. He is a drawing-master.—You 

L' agricoltura Scozia. * disegno (3) 

have a gold chain, and I have a silver watch.—The olive 

una oro (3) catena, e un oriolo. L! oliva 

oil of Italy is the best.—The house-door is open.—The dove 

olio (6) il migliore. L' uscio aperto. La colomba 

and the olive branch.—We have a country house.—They have 

il olivo ramo.

6 PREPOSITIONS. 

found a silk purse.—Woollen stockings. — A mother's 

trovato una seta [S) borsa. lana calze. 

love.—The town of Edinburgh.— A vase of 

una madre {1) 

rose-leaves. 

Vamore. La città (6) un vaso rose (4) foglie. 

I write always with a steel-pen.— Where have you put 

scrivo semj)re con una acciaio (3) penna Dove messo 

my brother's Grammar ?— (We wish) to read your aunt's 

fratello [I) Grammatica ? Desideriamo [b) zia 

letter. 

IMPERFECT. 

Io era^ "1 Io aveva, 

tu eri, I tu avevi, i 

ella era, ^ ella aveva, or avea, i-t 

noi eravamo, ^ noi avevamo, ^ 

voi eravate, 'l voi avevate, P 

elletìo erario, J elleno avevano, or I 

aveano, J 

7. The pronoun it is not generally translated before the verb 

essere, and the verb must agree with the noun or pronoun to 

which it relates. Ex. 

Sono io, It is I. 

I 

A, to, at. 

Slete voi, It is you. 

8. The prepositions to, at, are translated in Italian by a. Ex. 

Verso la fine della primavera andremo 

a Londra, 

Domani non sard a casa. 

Nostra cugina è a scuola, 

1 

— 

Towards the end of spring we wil' 

go to London. 

I shall not bo at home to-morrow. 

Our cousin is at school. 

9. .4 is used instead of di before infinitives, which are go- 

verned by verbs of motion. Ex. 

Venite a desinare con me. 

Corsero a difendere i loro amici, 

A ndiamo a vedere il medico, 

Come and dine with me. 

They ran to defend their friends. 

Let us go see the doctor. 

10. Before words beginning with a vowel, the preposition a 

may receive a d, especially before a. Ex. 

Enli ha studiato ad or a Oxford, I He has studied at Oxford. 

Non ho parlato ad altri, \ I have not spoken to others.

PREPOSITIONS. 

EXERCISE II. 

I have promised a book to my son.—They are gone to 

promesso un mio figlio. andati [^) 

dine in town.—Come to see my brother at Florence.— I 

desinaiê in Venite {9) fratello [8) Firenze. 

(will send) my son to Eton. — I (shall return) soon to 

manderò (10) ritornerò fra poco (10) 

Athens.—Tell (to) Andrew to give (to) Edward a pen 

Atene. Dite (10) Andrea (5) dare Eduardo una penna 

and a sheet of paper.—To whom (do you speak ?)—To a friend. 

foglio carta. chi parlate ? un amico, 

—They came to (see me) at Paris.— (Let us go) and buy 

vennero (9) vedermi Parigi. Andiamo (9) comprare 

a pound of tea.—I have written to a lady who lives 

una libbra tè. scritto una signora che dimora 

at Eome. — Go and post this newspaper.—I ran to 

Roma. Andate (9) impostare questo giornale. Corsi (9) 

meet the doctor.—It is my son.—It is two years since I 

incontrare il (7) (7) due anni dachè 

was at Venice.—She was at school to-day.— When we were at 

Venezia. (8) scuola oggi. Quando 

breakfast we have read your mother's letter.—I hope to go 

colazione letto spero (5) atidare 

to-morrow to see our uncle's garden.—Go and open the 

domani (9) vedere nostro zio giardino (10) aprire la 

window. 

finestra.


12. The negation precedes the verb in Italian. 

Io non so la mia lezione, 

\ 

I do not know my lesson. 

13. In interrogative phrases, the pronouns follow the verb ; 

they may however be omitted when the emphasis or stress of 

the voice should mark the interrogation. Ex. 

Avete voi capito? 

Non siamo stati forse ingan- 

I Have you understood ? 

Have wo not perhaps been 

nati ? 

I deceived ? 

Da, //-o???, by. 

14. From is rendered in Italian by da; this preposition is 

never curtailed, even before words beginning with the vowel a. 

Ex. 

Andando a Costantinopoli passai 

da Atene, 

Da Aprile fino a Luglio, 

In going to Constantinople I went 

by Athens. 

From April till July. 

15. Da is employed to connect two words, the latter of which 

expresses the use or destination of the former, and in this case 

the English order is reversed. Ex. 

Carta da scrivere, 

Una bottiglia da vino, , 

So comprato un cavallo da sella, e 

due cavalli da carrozza, \ 

Writing-paper. 

| 

A wine-bottle. 

I have bought a saddle- horse and 

{ 

two carriage-Iìorses. 

16. Bì/ is translated by da when preceded by a past parti- 

ciple. Ex. 

Le persone virtuose sono stimate da Virtuous persons are esteemed by 

tutti, every one. 

Siamo stati invitati da un amico, We have been invited by a friend. 

II ritratto di Dante, dipinto da The portrait of Dante, painted by 

Giotto, Giotto. 

17. Prepositions are generally repeated in Italian before each 

noun, pronoun, or verb which they govern, whether they are 

repeated or not in English. Ex. 

Sono stato a Roma ed a Firenze, 

Ho udito questa novella da lui e da 

altri, 

Farliamo spesso di voi e i 

sorella. 

I have been at Rome and Florence. 

I have heard this news from him and 

from others. 

We often speak of you and of your 

bister.

— 

PREPOSITIONS. 

EXERCISE III. 

We do not receive a newspaper from Paris.—Have you 

(11) (12) riceviamo (14) 

seen at Dresden the Madonna, painted by Raphael ?— Where 

veduto Dresda la dipinta (16) Raffaello f Dove 

is the letter-paper ? —We have seen the portrait of Napoleon, 

la lettere (15) carta. il ritratto Napoleone 

painted by David,— (They will go) from London to Paris.—The 

dipinto Andranno Londra La 

History of France, written by Michelet, is very interesting. 

storia Francia scritta (16) molto interessante. 

The dining - room is 

La mangiare {\b) sala 

small. 

piccola, 

Gunpowder was 

cannone [\ò) la polvere 

invented by a German monk. In Germany there are beerinventata 

un '^tedesco '^monaco. Germania vi birra 

glasses of every shape.—Those coffee-cups are a pre- 

(15) bicchieri ogni forma Quelle caffè (15) tazze un resent.—Do 

not leave flowers in a bed - room. — Bring 

gaio. lasciate fiori una letto {\b) camera. Portate 

a dozen of wine-bottles.—I have spoken this morning to 

una dozzina (15) bottiglie. parlato questa mattina 

your mother and your sister.—This picture was painted by 

vostra (17) Questo quadro dipinto (16) 

Rubens and Snyders.— A hair-brush.— I do not 

(17) capelli {!&) spazzola. (11) (12) 

hope to see my country again. 

rivedere la mia patria 

* 

—

10 

H 

o 

ON TUE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

ON TUE DEFINITE ARTICLE, 11 

18. Il is used before masculine nouns beginning with a con- 

sonant. Ex. 

II calzolaio ha portato le scarpe e gli 

stivali, 

I guanti che avete comprati sono 

tropipo piccoli, 

I giorni che abbiamo passati alla 

campagna, 

The shoemaker has brought the 

shoes and boots. 

The gloves you have bought are 

too smaH. 

The days we have spent in tlie 

country. 

19, Lo is used before masculine nouns beginning with the 

letter s, followed by another consonant. Ex. 

Lo scolare diligente è lodato dal suo 

maestro, 

Lo stampatore sfamjja i libri, 

Fintantoché gli Spartani seguirono 

le leggi di Licurgo vissero liberi. 

The diligent scholar is praised by 

bis master. 

The printer prints books. 

As long as the Spartans followed the 

laws of Lycurgus, they were free. 

20. Lo is also used before masculine nouns beginning with a 

vowel, but in this case the o is suppressed and replaced by an apostrophe 

; its plural gli is curtailed only before the letter i. Ex. 

'L'amico dei poveri e degli sven- 

turati, 

Uodio ai tiranni e agli oppressori, 

In gran parte le Indie Orientali 

sono possedute dagl' Inglesi, 

Il or lo zio mi ha regalato un oriolo 

d'oro, 

Lo or il zucchero e dolce, 

The friend of the poor and of the 

unfortunate. 

The hatred of tyrants and of oppressors. 

A great part of the East Indies is 

in the possession of the English. 

21. Before words beginning with the letter 2, il or lo may be 

used indiscriminately. Ex. 

Uncle has made me a present of a 

gold watch. 

Sugar is sweet. 

22. Gli is used in declining the plural of Dio, God. Ex. 

Gli Dei degli antichi Romani, The gods of the ancient Romans. 

| 

Al tempo degli Dei falsi e bugiardi, \ In the time of false and lying gods. 

23. La is used with feminine nouns, and takes an apostrophe 

before a vowel ; 

the letter e. Ex. 

La morte non fa parzialità tra il 

ricco e il povero, 

Il fulmine percuote più spesso 

Velevate torri che le umili capanne, 

Ve sempre della neve sulle Alpi, 

in the plural, the elision takes place only before 

Death makes no distinction between 

rich and poor. 

The thunderbolt strikes oftener high 

towers than low cottages. 

There is always snow on the Alps.

12 ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

EXERCISE IV. 

The ship of the desert is the Oriental metaphor 

{IS) vascello m. deserto m. {2S) 'Ôrientale hnetafora f. 

for the cameh—The pen is in the ink-bottle.—The pencil 

cammello m. penna f. calamaio m. lapis m. 

is on the table.—The eyes are the mirror of the soul.—The 

tavola f. (20) ocelli m. anima f. (20) 

horror of vice and the love of virtue are the delight 

orrore m. oxLvizioxn. amorem. art. virtù f. deliziai. 

of the wise.—The industrious are praised, but the idle are 

savio m. [20) industriosi m. lodati ma pigri m. -p. 

blamed.—The ant and the bee are the emblems of 

biasimati. formica f. ape f. emdlema m. s. art. 

industry.—The ancients (thought they could propitiate) the 

industria. antichi va. credevano rendersi propizi (22) 

gods (by offering them) sacrifices.—The sun, the moon, and the 

offrendo loro sacrifizi. sole m. luna f. 

stars.—Where is the sugar ?—It is in the sugar-basin.—The 

stelle f (21) zucchero m. zuccheriera f. 

passions are the maladies of the soul.—The letters of the 

passioni f. malattie f. lettere f. 

alphabet were invented by the Phoenicians.—The culture of 

alfabeto m. ind. 3. inventate Fenici m. coltura f. 

the mind elevates man.—The mind influences (on) the 

(19) spirito m. eleva art. uomo m. influisce 

body, and the body acts on the mind. 

corpo m. agisce 

Sarei, 

saresti, 

sarebbe, 

saremmo, 

sareste, 

sarebbero. 

CONDITIONAL.

ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 13 

USE OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

24. The definite article is used, in both languages, before nouns 

taken in a deteinnined sense. Ex. 

Ho ricevutole lettere c/i'i'o aspettava 

di Francia, 

Mia sorella ha ritrovato l'anello che 

aveva perduto, 

Avete veduto i cavalli che ho com- 

prati ? 

I have received the letters I was expecting 

from France. 

My sister has found the ring she had 

Have you seen the horses I have 

bought ? 

25. Before a noun taken in a general sense, expressing the 

whole of a species, the article is used in Italian. Ex. 

La libertà è lo stato naturale del- 

Vuomo, 

La ragione è spesso vinta dalla /orsa, 

L'educazione è la coltura della mente, 

Il cielo, la terra, il mare, tutto ci 

narra la gloria di Dio, 

I pesci sguizzano, gli uccelli volano, 

Liberty is the natural state of'man. 

Reason is often vanquished by force. 

Education is the culture of the mind. 

Heaven, earth, and ocean all proclaim 

to us the glory of God. 

Fish swim, birds fly. 

26. No article is prefixed to nouns taken in an indefinite, that 

is, neither in a determined nor general sense. Ex. 

Appettiamo lettere di Francia, We expect letters from France. 

Vi erano uomini, donne, e fanciulli, There were men, women, and chil- 

Un arhoscello con foglie e fiori, 

dren. 

' 

A shrub with leaves and 

27. The definite article is used in Italian before names of 

continents, countries, islands, rivers, &c. Ex. 

UInghilterra domina i mari, 

h'Italia è il giardino dell' Furopa, 

Innumerevoli sciami di locuste coprirono 

la superfice dell' Egitto, 

La Corsica, e la Sardegna sono due 

isole del Mediterraneo, 

England rules the seas. 

Italy is the garden of Europe. 

Innumerable swarms of locusts 

covered the surface of Egypt. 

Corsica and Sardinia are two islands 

in the Mediterranean. 

28. When no idea of extent is connected with the country 

alluded to, or when it is used adjectively, and preceded by the 

prepositions in and di, no article is required. Ex. 

La Regina òi"Inghilterra, 

Ho passato l'inverno in Italia, la 

The Queen of England. 

I have spent winter in Italy, spring 

primavera in Francia, ed ora in France, and now I come from 

vengo di Spagna, 

Spain. 

Vino di Borgondia, 

Cane di Terra Nuova, 

Burgundy wine. 

A Newfoundland dog

14 ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

29. Before the following islands the article is not required : 

— 

Candia, Cipro, Corfu, Creta, Ischia, Capri, Lipari, Malta, 

Maiorca, Procida, Rodi, Scio, Madera. 

It- is also omitted before countries having the same name 

as their capitals, as towns receive no article. Ex. 

Passammo per Candia e Cii^ro ritornando 

da Creta, 

Ischia e Capri sono due belle isolette, 

non lungi da Napoli, 

Venezia è stata chiamata la regina 

del mare, 

Napoli è il regno il peggio governato 

della terra, 

EXERCISE V. 

We passed Candia and Cyprus returning 

from Crete. 

Ischia and Capri are two beautiful 

little islands not far from Naples. 

Venice has been called the queen of 

the sea. 

Naples is the worst governed kingdom 

in the world. 

Men are poets before (they are) philosophers.—Poetry 

(25) uomini poeti prima di essere filosofi. poesia i. 

is the music of the soul, particularly of great and sensitive 

musica f. particolarmente '^grandi ^sensibili 

souls.— Hunger and poverty make men industrious. 

ânime. (25) fame L povertà t rendono {25) industriosi. 

Death has no terrors for the true Christian. 

— 

Drawing 

morte f. (12) terrori vero Cristiano va. (25) disegno m. 

owes its origin to chance, sculpture to religion, and painting 

deve art. sua origine f. caso m. scultura f. religione f. pittura f. 

to the progress of the other arts.— France, England, 

progresso m. altre artH.'^J^l) Francia f. Inghilterra f. 

Sardinia, and Turkey, were allied against Eussia.—Athens is 

Sardegna f. Turchia'i. alleate contro Russia f. Atene 

still the most polished city of Greece.—The love of music 

ancora più colta 

and of poetry is universal 

{21) Cfreciai. amore m. 

in Italy.—The knights of Malta. 

universale (28) 

cavalieri (29) 

Prosperity and dignities make men proud, but adver- 

(25) prosperità f. dignità i.-^. rendono orgogliosi avversity 

(humbles them and teaches them) wisdom. 

Ignor- 

sttà f. li umilia ed insegna loro saggezza f (25) igno- 

ance is always presumptuous, true genius is unassuming. 

ranzai. sempre presuntuosa vero genio va. fi. modesto. 

—

ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 15 

IMPERATIVE. 

Sii or sia, be thou. I Abbi, have thou. 

Sia, let him be. Abbia, let him have. 

Siamo, let us be. Abbiamo, let us have. 

| 

Siate, be ye. Abbiate, have ye. 

Siano, let them be. Abbiano, let them have. 

30. In Italian, the imperative is formed without the aid of any 

auxiliary ; and requires the pronouns, if expressed, to be placed 

after the verb ; as sii tu, be thou ; sia egli, let him be. 

The second person singular of the imperative, when used 

negatively, is formed of the infinitive mood ; 

thou speak. 

non parlare, do not 

31. In Italian, the definite article is prefixed to surnames, 

but is omitted before masculine Christian names, except when 

they are preceded by an adjective. Ex. 

II Petrarca passò molta parte della 

sua vita in Avignone, 

Francesco Petrarca finge di essersi 

innamorato di Laura la mattina 

del venerdÀ, santo, 

\j illustre Francesco Petrarca, 

Petrarch spent a great part of his 

life in Avignon. 

Francis Petrarch feigns to have 

fallen in love with Laura on Good 

Friday morning. 

The illustrious Francis Petrarch. 

32. Before feminine Christian names, the article is sometimes 

used. Ex. 

and Sappho. 

La Corinna e la Saffo, I Corinna 

Avete veduto la Maria ? \ Have you seen Maria ? 

33. Nouns of title, rank, and profession, when not preceded 

by a name, receive the article. Ex. 

La Begina Maria Stuarda, I Queen Mary Stuart. 

Maria, Begina di Scozia, Mary Queen of Scotland. 

II duca Alessandro, \ Duke Alexander. 

34. Lifinitives of verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, used substan- 

tively, receive the masculine article. Ex. 

Non teme il valente uomo il morire, 

ma il morire da vile, 

I ric

16 ON TUE DEFINITE ARTICLE, 

II senno c la virtu, del ler/isla- 

tore, 

La sapienza ed il coraggio del generale, 

îgnoranza e la superstizione degVIììdiani, 

EXERCISE VI. 

The wisdom and virtue of tlie legis- 

lator. 

The ability and courage of the general. 

The he ignorance Ignorance and superstition of 

the Indians. 

Cardinal Mazarin was the minister who married Anne of 

Cardinale m. ministro m. che sposò Anna (28) 

Austria, the proud and beautiful queen of France. Dante 

altiera Iella (33) (31) 

Alighieri, Petrarca, Tasso, and Ariosto, are the four great 

quattro grandi 

poets of Italy.—When (we speak) of pronouns, (we shall see) 

poeti Quando parleremo pronomi m. p. vedremo 

tliat in Italian the definite article is put before 

che Italiano '^definito ârticolo m. si mette innanzi 

possessive pronouns, except when followed by nouns of 

possessivi 1 eccettuato (sono seguiti) nomi 

relation in the singular.—I have lent my music-book to 

parentela singolare m. prestato mio (3) (33) 

Miss Mary.—He is always wavering between yes and no. 

signorina indeciso fra (34) sì no 

Queen Elizabeth of England (allowed) Mary Queen of Scot- 

(33) Elisabetta (28) fece s (33) 

land (to be beheaded.)—To know (how to listen) is as useful 

^decapitare (34) sapere ascoltare * utile 

as to know (how to speak.)—The enthusiasm and pcrquanto 

parlare entusiasmom. {db) per- 

severance of the soldiers. 

severanza f. soldati m. 

Che io sia, 

che tu sii, or sia, 

ch'egli sia, 

che noi siamo, 

che voi siate, 

ch'eglino siano, 

PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Che io abbia, 

che tu abbi, or abbia, 

ch'egli abbia, 

che noi abbiamo, 

che voi abbiate, 

ch'eglino abbiano, 

— 

—

ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 17 

36. The personal pronouns may be omitted before Italian verbs, 

when their terminations suffice to distinguish the person ; they 

must, however, be used in the singular of the present and im- 

perfect of the subjunctive, the terminations being alike in those 

tenses ; also when there are two or more pronouns in a phrase 

placed in contrast ; 

as 

Cliio ahhia, 

Ch'egli abbia, 

Io avrò un premio, e voi sarete 

punito, 

ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 

That I may have. 

That he may have. 

I shall have a prize, and you will be 

punished. 

37. The indefinite article is translated in Italian by 

Un before any masculine noun beginning either with a conso- 

nant or a vowel ; 

Uno before masculine nouns beginning with an s impure, or 

tlie letter z ; 

Una before a feminine noun beginning with a consonant ; 

Un' before a feminine noun beginning with a vowel ; 

Un amico sincero, 

Un figlio ubbidiente, 

Uno scolare diligente, 

Uno zio amoroso, 

Una donna modesta, 

Vnânima immortale. 

A sincere friend. 

An obedient son. 

A diligent scholar. 

An affectionate uncle. 

A modest woman. 

An immortal soul. 

38. The indefinite article is not translated in Italian before 

nouns expressing the country^ rank^ title, profession, or any other 

attribute of the preceding noun. 

Sono Scozzese, 

Il mio maestro di musica è Italiano, 

/Smo cugino è Professore alV Università 

di Vienna, 

Mio nonno era Generale, 

Ex. 

as 

I am a Scotchman. 

My music-master is an Italian. 

His cousin is a professor in the University 

of Vienna. 

My grandfather was a general. 

39. But when these nouns are accompanied by an adjective, 

or determined by some circumstance, the indefinite article is then 

translated. Ex, 

Maria Stuarda era una principessa 

di sventurata razza, 

E un medico celebre. 

Nostro zio era un arcJiitetio Scozzese, 

Mary Stuart was a princess of an 

unfortunate race. 

He is a celebrated physician. _ 

Our uncle was a Scottish architect.

18 ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 

40, Before nouns of measure, weight, number, and time, the 

Italians use the definite article instead of the indefinite, as in 

English. Ex. 

Questa seta è bellissima, elianto 

Vavete pagata il braccio? 

L'anno passato il pane costava tre 

soldi la libbra, 

Oli aranci in Sicilia costano poco 

più di un soldo la dozzina, 

Abbiamo lezione di canto tre volte 

la settimana, 

This silk is very fine, how much 

have you paid for it a yard ? 

Last year, bread cost threepence a 

pound. 

In Sicily, oranges cost little more 

than a penny a dozen. 

We take singing lessons three times 

a week. 

41. No indefinite article is used in Italian before hundred, 

cento, and thousand, mille. Ex. 

Gli alberi del parco furono piantati 

più di cento anni fa, 

Mille anni avanti Vera Cristiana, 

Ho venduto il mio cavallo cento lire, 

EXERCISE VII. 

The trees in the park were planted 

more than a hundred years ago. 

A thousand years before the Christian 

era. 

I have sold my horse for a hundi-ed 

pounds. 

Gulnare, a name rendered famous by Byron, means 

Gulnara (38) iêso famoso (16) significa 

the flower of the pomegranate.—A true friend is an inestimable 

fiore m. melagrana i. (Zl) vero amico m.. Hnestimabile 

treasure.— She has an uncle a banker, and a brother an 

Hesoro m. (37) do (38) banchiere m. 

officer.— We go to visit our friends three times a 

ufficiale m. aneliamo (9) visitare nostri amici tre volte (40) 

year.— 

(It has been remarked), that when a European people 

anno m. Fu osservato Êuropeo Spopolo m 

intend to found a colony in a foreign land, if they are 

prende a fondare colonia {. '^straniero '^paesem.. se 

Spaniards (they build) a convent, if Italians (they erect) a 

Spagnuoli fabbricano convento m. Italiani edificarlo 

church, if Dutch (they construct) an Exchange, if English 

chiesa f. Olandesi costruiscono Borsa f. Inglesi 

(they raise) a fortress, and if they are French (they open) a 

piantano fortezzai. 

* Francesi innalzano

ON THE I'AIiTITlVE ARTICLE. 19 

theatre and a ball-room.— A hundred years make a century. 

teatro m. ballo {15) salai. {4^1) annifanno secolom. 

I have paid (a shilling a dozen) (for these eggs.) 

pagato (37) ^scellino m. (40) * ^queste ova 

Koscoe was an English merchant, and a liberal patron of 

(39) 

' ' 

art and literature. 

arti f. p. (17) (35) letteratura f. 

IMPEUFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

— 

^liberale ^mecenate (25)

20 ON THE PARTITIVE AETICLE. 

Devo andare a comprare qualche 

libro Sjìagnuolo, 

Avrò alcuni amici a pranzo con me 

oggi, 

riandatemi qualclio libro, ma non 

molti, 

— 

I must go and buy some Spanish 

books. 

I shall have a few friends to dine 

with me to-day. 

Send me some books, but not many. 

44. The partitive article is omitted in Italian when no idea 

of quantity is connected with the substance named. When we 

say, ho fame, datemi del pane, it is evident we mean a certain 

limited portion of the substance bread ; but in the phrase, noi 

beviamo sempre acqua, we simply mention the species without 

reference to quantity. Ex. 

I Bramini non mangiano mai carne, 

II cappellaio vende cappelli, il calzolaio 

scarpe e stivali. 

Ho veduto in Inghilterra cavalli 

bellissimi. 

EXERCISE VIII. 

The Brahmans never eat any meat. 

The hatter sells hats, the shoemaker 

shoes and boots. 

I have seen iu England very fine 

horses. 

Have you any friends in Ireland ? I have some friends in 

(44) amici Irlanda? (42) 

Dublin. — We have received this morning some letters 

Dublino ricevuto questa mattina lettere f. 

from Germany.—I have seen some soldiers who were 

Germania veduto soldati va. che ind. 3. 

wounded at the battle of the Alma.—The painter Caracci 

feriti battaglia f. f, pittore 

having been plundered by some robbers, drew their likeness so 

essendo stato svaligiato (43) ladri m. fece loro ritiâtti così 

well that they were discovered.—Never give any advice 

somiglianti ind. 3. scoperti [Non date mai) consigli]). 

that might be dangerous if followed.— (Bring me) some pepper, 

pericolosi se seguiti Portatemi pepe m. 

some mustard, and some salt. — Put some wine in this 

mostarda f. sale m. Mettete questo 

flask. Some friends (were faithful) (to him) in adversity. 

fiasco 2iii(]^ 3. fedeli ^gli avversità f. 

We have no friends in this country.—When you go to town 

questo paese andrete in 

—

ON THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 21 

buy some needles and some pins.— (Send ns) some 

comprate (42) aghi m. spille f. Mandated 

strawberries and some raspberries.—Give me some cream and 

fravole f. lamponi m. crema f 

some sugar.—If we had some ribbons. 

Se sub. 2. nastri m. 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

The compound tenses of essere are formed by using the same 

verb as auxiliary, so7w stato,—literally, I ajn been. 

PAST PARTICIPLES. 

Siato, m., been ; stata, f. Avuto, m., had ; avuta, f. 

Plur. Stati, m. ; state, f. Plur. Avuti, m. ; avute, f. 

GERUNDS. 

Essendo, being. Avendo, having. 

45. The past participle, after essere, must agree with the 

subject of the verb. Ex. 

Egli è stato, ella è stata, 

| 

He has been, glie Las been. 

The past participle, after avere, agrees with the accusative of 

the verb when it is preceded by it. Ex. 

/ libri che abhiamo avuti, j The books that we have had. 

Le lettere che avete avute, ' The letters that you have haJ. 

CHAPTEE III. 

FORMATION OF THE PLUEAL OF NOUNS. 

46. The general rule for forming the plural of Italian nouny 

is to change the final vowel into /. Ex. 

II cappello, the hat, 

II cane, the dog, 

II poeta, the poet, 

La religione, the reh'gion, 

II maestro, the master, 

I cappelli, 

leant. 

Ipoeti. 

Le religioni. 

I maestri.

— 

22 FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

47. 1st, Feminine nouns wLich end in a form the plural by 

changing a into e. Ex, 

La casa, the house, i Le 

La sposa, the wife, I Le 

case. 

spose. 

48. 2d, Nouns ending in i or ie, monosyllables, and those 

ending in an accented vowel, are invariable. Ex. 

La metropoli, the metropolis, 

La specie, the species, 

II re, the king, 

La virtu, virtue, 

IjC metropoli. 

Le specie. 

Ire. 

Le virtu. 

49. Adjectives form the plural in the same manner as nouns. 

EXERCISE IX.* 

In the Levant, it is the custom to strew flowers on the 

Levante m. ^costume m. spargere {4:Q) fiore m. 

bodies of the dead, and to place a bunch of flowers in the 

corpo m. moi'to m. p. 2^^^^^^^ mazzetto m. 

hands of (young persons.) — The chairs, tables, and 

mano f. giovane m. (47) sedia f.(35) tavola f. 

sofas of the drawing-room.—The nights of Italy are 

(48) canape m. sala f. notte f. (49) 

charming.—The days of our youth.— Kings and pea- 

incantevole giorno m. nostra gioventil f. (48) re m. consants 

are equal before God.— (Let us imitate) their virtues and 

ladino eguale avanti Imitiamo loro virtù f. ed 

avoid their defects.—We have visited the principal cities 

evitiamo difetto m. visitato (49) principale città f. 

ofitaly.—Theancientmodeofwritingwas on bricks, tiles, 

antico modo scrivere [17) mattone m. tegolo m. 

and tables of stone, on ivory, and on the leaves and bark of 

trees. 

pietrai, avorio m. [35) foglia f. 

We owe to our ancestors our 

corteccia^. 

civil and 

albero va. Andiamo debitori antenato va. [delle nostre) civile 

* Nouns are now given in the singular, also past participles and adjec- 

tives, which in Italian agree with the noun to which they refer.

FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS. 23 

religious liberties.—The calamities of civil wars.— (Here are) 

religiosa libertà f. calamità f. (25) guerra f. Ecco 

tliree kinds of tea, of different qualities and different prices. 

tre specie tè, diversa qualità f. differente prezzo m. 

50. Nouns ending in ca and ga in the singular take an h in 

the plural, in order to preserve the hard sound. Ex. 

II duca, the duke, I I ducili. 

streghe. 

La Strega, the witch, | Le 

51. Nouns of two syllables, ending in co and go, take an h 

in the plural, except Greco, Greek, pi. Greci; porco, pig, pi. 

porci ; mago becomes maghi when it means magicians, and magi 

when it means magi. Ex. 

II lago, the lake,

24 FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS 

Obbligo, obligation. Pudico, chaste. 

Opaco, opaque. Rammarico, regret. 

Parroco, curate. Bipiego, expedient. 

Pedagogo, pedagogue. Sacrilego, sacrilegious. 

Pelago, abyss, ocean. Sambuco, elder-tree. 

Pizzico, pinch. Statico, hostage. 

Presago, diviner. Stomaco, stomach. 

Prodigo, prodigal. Strascico, train. 

Prologo, prologue. Ubbriaco, drunkard. 

The following words may be written in the plural with or 

without an h : 

— 

— 

Astrologo, astrologer. Pratico, practical. 

Equivoco, equivocal. Reciproco, reciprocal. 

Filologo, philologist. Rustico, rustic. 

Mendico, beggar. Salvatico, wild. 

Monaco, monk. Traffico, traffic. 

EXERCISE X. 

The Turks, instead of ringing bells to call 

(51) Turcom. invece [suonare il campanello) per chiamare 

their servants, clap their hands.—Have you seen the lakes 

servo m. battono * art. mano f. veduto (51) 

of Scotland ?—They are rich, and contribute to many 

Scozia 

public charities. 

ricco va. contribuiscono molta (50) 

The sunny hills of Tuscany.—The 

pubblica {4^S) carità L (54) colle m. [27) Toscana t. 

Germans are phlegmatic and persevering.— (Save me) 

(52) Tedesco m. {53) flemmatico perseverante. Salvami 

from my friends, said a philosopher, (as I can defend myself) 

(53) disse filosofo m. siccome posso difendermi 

against my enemies.—The subjects of despotic monarchs 

contro nemico m. suddito m. ^dispotico {50)'^7nonarcam. 

suffer much and complain little, those of free governments 

soffrono molto si lamentano poco, quelli -libero Sgoverno va. 

suffer little and complain always. In Italy pigs feed on 

sempre. (51) si pascono di 

peaches and acorns.—Italian classics, German musicians, 

(50) pesca t ghianda f^ [5'ò) '^classico m.. ^ hnusicova. 

French cooks, and English mechanics,—The intrigues of the 

^Francese ^cuoco ^ Inglese^meccanico va. (20) (54) m. 

demagogues. 

(54) m. 

—

FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS. 25 

55. Nouns ending in eia, scia, and già, lose the i in the 

plural. Ex. 

La caccia, le cacce, The cliase. 

La spiaggia, le spiagge, The shore. 

Zrt guancia, le guance. The cheek. 

Except when the accent falls on the i, or when that vowel 

is distinctly pronounced. Ex. 

Lm bugìa, le bugìe, The lie. 

Im provincia, le provincie, The province. 

5G. Nouns ending in io follow the general rule in the forma- 

tion of the plural, and change the final vowel into i when the 

two vowels of the singular termination are distinctly pronounced, 

as in monosyllahles, in the termination rio, &c. Ex. 

II natio, i natii, Tlie native. 

II desìo, i desii. The wish, the desire. 

lìpendìo, ipendii, The declivity. 

Lo zìo, gli zìi, The uncle. 

L'arbitrio, gli arbitrii. The free will. 

Il martirio, i martirii, The maityrdoin. 

L'atrio, gli atrii, The vestibule. 

57. When io is not pronounced as two distinct sounds, as in 

the terminations cio, scio, cJiio, glio, gio, in forming the plural, 

the o is dropped,* Ex. 

L'occiiio, gli occhi. The eye. 

II foglio, i fogli. The sheet of paper. 

It faggio, i faggi. The beech-tree. 

L'orologio, gli orologi, The watch. 

Il fornaio, i fornai, The baker. 

Il viaggio, i viaggi. The voyage. 

Il bacio, i baci. The kiss. 

® Observe.—The termination io was formerly, and is still, by some, changed 

into ^' for the formation of the plural; but the best modern authors substi- 

tute a simple i in the place of thej', and two iV& in some instances, in order 

to avoid ambiguity, as in the following words 

— 

beneficio, benefit principio, 

; 

principle, beginning ; regio, royal ; giudicio, judgment ; which make in 

the plural, beneficii, principii, regii, giudicii, in order to distinguish them 

from benefici, principi, regi, giudici, plurals of benefico, beneficent ; prin- 

cipe, prince rege, king ; and giudice, judge. 

C

FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS. 

EXliUClSE XI. 

A poet has called the sun aud the moon the eyes of 

poetava, appellato (57) 

heaven.—The beech -trees and the oak -trees of the ancient 

(25) (57) {bb) quercia I (54) 

woods.—Bakers grow rich in time * of war and famine, 

(51) [2b) [01) divengono ricco guerra L carestia L 

and doctors in time of pestilence.—In Eome there are many 

(53) peste f. vi mollo 

ancient edifices.—The shores of the Mediterranean.—The 

edifizio m. (55) Mediterraneo m. 

caprices of (silly people.)—Poets compare cheeks 

(57) capriccio m. (19) sciocco m. p. {^Q) paragonano (bb) 

to roses, eyes to stars, hands to lilies, and teeth to 

(25) rosa f. stella f. mano f. (57) giglio m. deiite m. 

pearls.—There are no harmless lies.—Princes who, in governperla 

231 f. innocuo (bb) Principe m. che [nel gover- 

ing their subjects, are not guided by principles of justice, exnare) 

suddito m. guidato {bl) ec- 

cite disaffection.— We forget benefitsf more readily than 

citano scontento m. Si dimenticano (bl*) _?n"ù presto che 

offences. 

offesa f. 

58. The following nouns are irregular in the plural : 

La mofjlie, tlic wife. Lc mogli, tlic wives. 

Slillc, thousiind, 

II hue, tlie ox, 

Mila, thousands. 

I buoi, the oxen. 

L'uomo, the man, Gli uomini, the men. 

mio, my, viiei, my. 

tuo, thy, 

tuoi, thy. 

* When time denotes a repetition of the action, or & point in a space of time, 

it is translated by volta; as, the first time, la prima volta. It is expressed 

by tempo when a space of time is meant ; as, in the time of war, in tempo 

di guerra. Tempo means also wêather ; as, bad weather, caltioo tempo. 

t Benefizio, giudizio, uffi-io, are more frequently used than beneficio., 

giudicio, vfficio. 

—

siio, his, 

Dio, God, 

FORMATION OF THE PLURALOF NOUNS. 27 

suoi, his. 

Dei, Gods. 

59. Some masculine nouns become feminir 

and end in a. Ex. 

II centinaio, the hundred, 

II migliaio, the thousand, 

II miglio, the mile, 

II paio, the pair, 

Lo staio, the bushel, 

L'iwvo, the egg. 

in the plural, 

Le centinaia, the hundreds. 

Le migliaia, the thousands. 

Le miqlia, the miles. 

Le paia, the pairs. 

Le staia, the bushels. 

Xe uova, the eggs. 

60. The following masculine nouns may end either in i or a 

in the plural. When in a they are feminine : 

Lamella, the ring, 

II braccio, the arm, 

II budello, the bowel, 

II calcagno, the heel, 

1 II carro, the cart, 

II castello, the castle, 

II ciglio, the eyebrow, 

2 II corno, the horn, 

/Z dito, the finger, 

II filo, the thread, 

II fondamento, the basis, . 

3 II frutto, the fruit, 

II fuso, the spindle, 

4 /2 gesto, the gesture, 

7Z ginocchio, the knee, 

/Z grido, the cry, 

/Z gomito, the elbow, 

/Z labbro, the lip, 

5 /? Zegrjio, the wood, 

JZ lenzuolo, the sheet, 

6 /Z membro, the member. 

— 

G/i «?ieZZi, Ze anella. 

I bracci, le braccia. 

I budelli, le budella. 

I calcagjii, le calcagna. 

I carri, le corra. 

I castelli, le castella. 

I cigli, le ciglia. 

I corni, le corna. 

I diti, le dita. 

Ifili, le fila. _ 

Ifondamenti, le fondamenta. 

Ifrutti, lefridta. 

Ifusi, le fusa. 

I gesti, le gesta. 

I ginocchi, le ginocchia. 

I gridi, le grida. 

I gomiti, le gomita. 

I labbri, le labbra. 

I legni, le legna. 

I lenzuoli, le lenzuola. 

I membri, le membra. 

1 Carro means chariot as well as cart ; carri not carra must be used for 

the plural of chariot. 

2 Corni are wind instruments ; coma 

are the horns of an animal. 

3 Frutti means fruit of the same plant ; frutta means various kinds of 

fruit, dessert. Frutti must be used when employed to express the interest 

of money, or the consequences of an action. 

4 Gesti means the gestures of an orator, of an actor ; gesta means exploits, 

great deeds. 

5 Legni means carriages, ships ; 

legna, firewood. 

6 Membri are the members of a society ; membra, the limbs of the body.

28 FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS. 

7 II muro, the wall, I muri, le mura. 

L'osso, the bone, Oli ossi, le ossa. 

Il pomo, the apple, I pomi, le poma. 

Il pugno, the fist, I pugni, le pugna. 

Il quadrello, the airow, / quadrelli, le quadrello. 

8 II riso, the laugh, the rice, I risi, le risa. 

Il sacco, the sack, / sacelli, le sacca. 

Lo strido, the cry. Gli stridi, le strida. 

Il vestigio, the vestigo, / vestigi, le vestigia. 

Il vestimento, the garment, / vestimenti, le vestimenta, 

EXERCISE XIL 

The games and exercises practised by the Greeks were 

(J)l) giuoco m. esercizio m. praticato (51) ind. 2 

good for the health of the body and the strength of the limbs. 

buono 

Wives 

salute L 

must rule 

corpo m. robustezza f. (60^) 

by sweetness and gentleness.—His 

(58) debbono governare con dolcezza t gentilezzaL (58) 

gestures became animated in speaking of the virtues and 

(GO'*) divennero ani/nato * parlando (48) 

great deeds of the ancient heroes.—A friend has sent me a 

(60*) eroem. ^ hnandatohni 

basket of eggs.—The walls of Thebes were raised by the 

paniere m. (59) (60^) Tebe ind. 3 inalzato 

simple sound of the lyre ; the walls of the city of Jericho 

semplice suono va. lira f. Gerico 

(fell, on the contrary,) to the sound of trumpets.—Presents 

caddero in vece tromba f. dono m. 

appease not only men, but also gods.— (Bring me) six pair of 

placano solo (58) anche (58) Portatemi sei (59) 

white gloves from Paris.—A man walked for a wager 

%ianco ^guanto xn. camminò * iscommessa 

two thousand miles in a thousand hours.—The exploits of -

Virgil's beautiful poem, the ^neid.—The stars, animals, 

(1) bellissimo poema m. Eneide. {20) astro (35) 

and even plants were amongst the Egyptian gods.—The horns 

anche pianta t'md. 2 fra Êgiziano '^{58) (60^) 

of a deer killed by Prince Albert.— Children must obey 

cervo ucciso (33) Alberto. {25) fanciullo obbedire 

(to) their parents, and pupils (to) their master. 

genitore, scolare 

CHAPTER IV. 

GENDER. 

In Italian, all nouns are either masculine or feminine, there 

being no neuter gender. 

The gender of nouns may be distinguished by their ter- 

minations. 

61. Mascoline terminations are 

0, except feminine names, as la Saffo, Sappho ; la mano, 

the hand ; la eco, the echo. 

Me, except l'arme, the weapon ; 

hope. 

— 

la fame, hunger; la speme,* 

Re, except la febbre, fever ; la coltre, the counterpane ; la 

madre, the mother ; la polvere, dust ; la scure, the axe ; la torre, 

the tower. 

The following nouns ending in ?-e are of both genders ; il or 

la carcere, the prison ; il or la folgore, the thunderbolt ; il or 

la lepre, the hare ; il or la tigre, the tiger ; il or la cenere,-];- 

ashes. 

Nte, except la gente, people ; la lente, the lens or lentil ; la 

mente, the mind; la corrente, the current; la sorgente, the source. 

* Speme is used in poetry for speranza. 

t II cenere is used poetically, il cenere degli avi, tlie dust of the ancestors. 

Wlien used in the plural, it is femiuine.

The following words are of both genders 

— 

U or la fante, the 

man-servant or the maid ; // or la fonte, the fountain ; il or la 

fronte, the forehead. 

One, except la canzone, the song ; la teiizone, the combat ; 

la Bidone, Dido ; 

la Gimione, Juno. 

I, except la metropoli, the metropolis ; la analisi, the analysis ; 

la sintassi, syntax ; la enfasi, emphasis ; la tesi, the thesis ; and 

a few more words derived from the Greek. 

EXERCISE XIII. 

The tiger is ferocious and the hare is timid.—The prisons 

(61) feroce (61) timido. (61) 

of despotism (will not check) the progress of liberty. 

— 

(25) dispotismo non arresteranno progresso libertà 

Hunger is a powerful incentive to crime.—Tears are the 

(61) potente incentivo delitto, lacrimai. 

mute language of grief.— Seneca wrote the panegyric of 

muto linguaggio dolore. scrisse panegirico 

poverty by the light of a gold chandelier.—The rose is the 

povertà f. a lume (3) candelabro. rosa f. 

queen of flowers and the emblem of beauty.—A (fanatical and 

regina fiore emblema m. bellezza f. 

i fanatico 

ignorant) people become a terrible weapon in the hands of a 

ignorante popolo diviene "^terribile ^(61) (61) 

despot.—The current of the river.—Her forehead was bound 

tiranno. (61) flume. (61) ind. 2 cinto 

with a wreath of myrtle, which is the emblem of love. 

di ghirlandai mirto che amore. 

The sailor's song.^ Ignorance is the source of supermarinaro 

{I) {Ql) 

stition.—The ashes 

{25) ignoranza I 

of Napoleon were 

(61) siiper- 

removed from 

stizione. (Gif) Napoleone ind. 3 trasportato 

Saint Helena to Paris.—The colour, smell, and taste of a 

Sant' Elena colore (35) odore sapore 

pine-apple. 

ananasso.

62, Feminine terminations are 

— 

GENDER. 31 

A, except, 1st, masculine names, as Andrea, Andrew. 

2d, Names of dignities ov lirofessions of men, as il Papa, the 

Pope ; ilmonaixa, the monarch ; // legista, the lawyer; il poeta, 

the poet ; V artista, the artist. Also, il regicida, the regicide ; 

il fratricida, the fratricide, &c. 

M, Words derived from the Greek, as 

Anatema, anathema. Idioma, idiom. 

Assioma, axiom. Pianeta, planet. 

Clima, climate. Poema, poem. 

Diadema, diadem. Problema, problem. 

Diploma, diploma. Programma, programme. 

Dogma, dogma. Scisma, schism. 

Dramma, drama. Sistema, system. 

Emblema, emblem. Sofisma, sophism. 

Enigma, enigma. Stemma, coat of arms. 

Epigramma, epigram. Stratagemma, stratagem. 

Fantasma, phantom. Teina, theme. 

Ione,* except 

— 

L'arcione, the saddle-bow. Un milione, a million. 

L'arpione, the liinge. II padiglione, the pavilion. 

11 battaglione, the battalion. II piccione, th(5 pigeon. 

II bastione, the bastion. Lo scorpione, the scorpion. 

11 campione, the champion. II settentrione, the north. 

11 dormiglione, the sluggard. Lo storione, the sturgeon. 

U, except, il Perù, Peru ; il ragù, the ragout. 

EXERCISE XIV. 

A monarch is always powerful when he is beloved hj hit; 

(G2) sempre potente allora che amato 

people.— Climate has great influence on the character of men. 

popolo. (G2) grand' influenza carattere (58) 

— Planets are opaque bodies which derive light and heat 

(G2) (54) ôpaco ^corpo che derivano luce calore 

from the sun.—The most precious gem of a monarch's diadem 

più preziosa gemma (62) 

is clemency.—The exercises we have written are easy. 

clemenza. che scritto facile. 

* No positive rule can be assigned for other terminations in e, which 

are, for the most part, feminine. 

—

32 GKNUER, 

Have you read the poems of Scott ?—When we take pleasure 

letto (62) prendiamo piacere 

in the prosperity of others, we enjoy a part of their good 

prosperità art. altro godiamo parte buono 

fortune.—A restoration is the worst part of a revolution.—The 

fortuita. restaurazione p eggior parte rivoluzione. 

violet is the emblem of modesty.—A lawyer is rarely a 

viola (62) modestia. (62) raramente (38) 

poet.—A battalion, after a severe conflict, carried (of) the 

(62) serio conflitto s'impadronì 

bastion.—Cain was the first fratricide.—The poem of Dante is a 

Caino (62) 

vision.—It is a difficult problem. 

visione. ^difficile i(62) 

63. Nouns which admit of both genders form ì\ìq feminine by 

changing the final vowel into a. Ex. 

Cugino, male cousin, Cugina, female cousin. 

Cognato, brother-in-law, Cognata, sister-in-law. 

Cameriere, valet, Cameriera, lady's-maiJ. 

Ebreo, Jew, Ebrea, Jewess. 

Vedovo, widower. Vedova, widow. 

64. Words which end in ante and ente., as well as those derived 

from a town or country^ ending in ese, are the same for both 

genders. Ex. 

11 cantante, tlic singer, La cantante, the singer. 

11 credente, the believer, La credente, the believer. 

Un Inglese, an Englishman, Una Liglese, an Englishwoman. 

Un Fraìicese, a Frenchman, Una Francese, a Frenchwoman. 

65. Nouns which have the masculine termination tore, form 

the feminine in trice. Ex. 

Esecutore, executor, Esecutrice, executrix. 

Imperatore, emperor. Imperatrice, empress. 

Traditore, traitor, Traditrice, traitress. 

66. The following nouns form the feminine in essa:—

GENDER. 33 

Abate, abbot, Abadessa, abbess. 

Harone, baron, Baronessa, baroness. 

Conte, count, Contessa, countess. 

Dottore, doctor, Dottoressa, female doctor. 

Duca, duke, Duchessa, ducbess. 

Gigante, giant, Gigantessa, giantess. 

Leone, lion, I,eonessa, lioness. 

Oste, host. Ostessa, hostess. 

Poeta, poet, Poetessa, poetess. 

Paone, peacock, Paonessa, pea-hcn. 

Principe, prince, Principessa, princess. 

Profeta, prophet, Profetessa, prophetess. 

Sacerdote, priest, Sacerdotessa, priestess. 

G7. The names oì fruit-trees ending in o arc masculine, but 

by changing the o into a they become feminine, and signify the 

fruit. Ex. 

II castagno, the chestnut-tree, La castagna, the chesnut. 

II pero, the pear-tree, Papera, the pear. 

II ciriegio, the cherry-tree. La ciriegia, the cherry. 

The following nouns mean the tree and the fruit,— il limone, 

l'arancio, il cedro, il dattero, and il fico, lemon, orange, cedar, 

date, and fig. 

EXERCISE XV. 

An actor and an actress may be virtuous and estimable.—She 

attore [65) possono virtuoso stimabile. 

is executrix to her husband's will, and guardian of her 

(65) dì suo marito (1) testamento tutore 

son and her daughter.—A poet's wife is rarely a poetess.— 

wild 

(63) di rado (66) 

fig-tree covered with figs.—The cherry-trees are laden 

coperto di (51) (67) carico 

''salvatico ^ 

with cherries.—The duke and duchess (were walking) in the 

di (55) [66) passeggiavano 

avenue of orange-trees.—The prophetess Cassandra predicted 

viale m. art. (66) predisse 

always the truth, but (was never) believed.—The Vestals were 

verità non fu mai creduta. Vestalem(\.2 

priestesses of the goddess Vesta, and guarded the sacred fire. 

(66) dea custodivano ^sacro ^ 

— A

34 ON ADJECTIVES. 

The emperor and empress were surrounded by princes and 

(65) ind. 2 circondato (66) 

princesses, by barons and baronesses, by counts and countesses. 

Groves of orange and lemon- trees. 

Boschetto (67) 

CHAPTER V. 

ON ADJECTIVES. 

68. Adjectives agree in gender and number with the nouns 

they qualify ; those ending in o become feminine by changing 

the into a. The plural of adjectives is formed according to 

the rules given for nouns. Ex. 

L'uomo generoso e dotto, 

La donna generosa e dotta, 

Oli uomini generosi e dotti, 

Lt donne generose e dotte, 

The generous and learned man. 

The generous and learned woman. 

The generous and learned men. 

The generous and learned women. 

69. Adjectives in e or i serve for both genders. Ex. 

Un re illustre e potente, 

Una regina illustre e potente, 

I re illustri e potenti, 

An illustrious and powerful king. 

An illustrious and powerful queen. 

Illustrious and powerful kings. 

Le regine illustri e potenti. 

Illustrious and powerful queens. 

70. When the adjective qualifies two or more singular nouns, 

it is put in the plural. Ex. 

II padre ed il figlio sono orgo- 

gliosi, 

La vedova e sua jìglia sono povere 

ma industriose, 

La rosa e la camelia sono belle. 

Il ricco ed il povero sono mortali. 

The father and son are proud. 

— 

The widow and her daughter are 

poor but industrious. 

The rose and the camellia are beau- 

tiful. 

Eich and poor are mortal. 

71. When the nouns are of different gender, the plural adjec- 

tive agrees with the masculine. Ex. 

La madre e il figlio sono sordi, 

I soldati e le loro mogli furono riconoscenti 

e civili, 

The mother and the son are deaf. 

The soldiers and thoir wives were 

grateful and civil. 

72. Adjectives may generally precede or follow nouns, taste

ON ADJECTIVES. 35 

and euphony being the best guide on this point ; however, in 

familiar style, adjectives which denote taste, shape, colour, phj- 

s/c«Z qualities, and those derived from verbs or names of nations, 

follow the noun. Ex. 

/ cavalieri della tavola rotonda, 

Una bandiera bianca è il segnale di 

tregua, 

Un uomo cieco ha Vudito acuto, 

Il Paradiso perduto del Milton, 

Le legioni Romane non potettero 'mai 

soggiogare i Caledoni, 

The kniglits of the round table. 

A white flag is the signal of truce. 

A blind man has sharp ears. 

Milton's Paradise Lost. 

The Roman legions were never able 

to subdue the Caledonians. 

73. Two or more adjectives qualifying the same noun are 

generally placed after it. Ex. 

Un oratore eloquente e persuasivo, 1 

Una fanciulla bella e modesta, I 

An 

A 

EXERCISE XVI. 

eloquent and persuasive orator. 

beautiful and modest young girl. 

The ancient Caledonians were implacable enemies, but 

(54) 

ind. 2 implacabile (53) '^nemico 

hospitable and generous friends.—A beautiful painting often in- 

ospitale generoso (73) pittura spesso in- 

spires (to) a poetic mind with noble and lofty sentiments. 

spira poetico (61) * nobile elevato sentimento 

Generous minds are capable of great sacrifices. — Poland 

capace grande (57) sacrifizio (27) Polonia 

was for many years the seat of domestic divisions.—An 

ind. 3 per molto sede (50) domestico (62) divisione 

amiable temper and a good education are more valuable 

amabile [Ql) carattere educazione jjregevole 

than great riches or pompous titles. Dr. Petrie, the 

che ricchezza pomposo titolo (33) Dottor 

celebrated Irish antiquarian, has proved that the round 

celebre (72) Irlandese antiquario provato (72) rotoìido 

towers of Ireland are of Christian origin, and served in the 

(61) Irlanda ^Cristiano ôrigine servivano a 

threefold capacity of belfries, strongholds, and watch-towers. 

triplice uso campanile (17) fortilizio vedetta 

—A retentive and cultivated memory, an extensive and varied 

ferreo coltivato memoria esteso variato 

— 

—

36 ON- ADJECTIVES. 

knowledge, and a lively imagination, are necessary to 

(62) erudizione vivace immagina:îone necessario per 

sliine in conversation.—A wreath of white and red camellias, 

brillare conversazione ghirlanda (72) camelia 

entwined with green leaves, was laid on the grave of the 

intrecciato verde foglia deposto sepoltura 

patriot Dandolo, at Milan. 

patriottu Milano. 

74. The following words are adverbs when governed by a 

verb or adjective, and are indeclinable ; but when governed by 

a noun, they are adjectives, and agree in gender and number 

with the word to which they relate : 

Molto, much, very. 

Tmito, so mucli. 

Altrettanto, as much. 

L'esilio è molto penoso, 

Egli ha molti nemici e pochi amici, 

Quanti ^;re

ON ADJECTIVES. ;^7 

have many imitators, few equals, and no superiors.—Many 

(74) imitatore (51) eguale nessuno superiore 

slaves (would become) tyrants if they had a little power. 

schiavo diverrebbero tiranno se subj. 2 (76) potere 

Religion (teaches us) to support with patience the many 

c'insegna a sopportare 

trials of this life.—How many letters have you received to-day ? 

vicenda vita (74) oggi 

Not many.—How long did the concert last ?—Few persons 

(75) '^concerto ^durb 

are satisfied (with their lot in life.)—He earns little, and 

contento della loro sorte guadagna (74) 

spends much.—To be too much dissatisfied (with ourselves) is a 

spende (34) (74) scontento di noi stessi 

weakness, but to be too much pleased is a folly.—The labour 

debolezza contento follia lavoro 

of many years was lost in a few moments.—Many are very 

perduto 

* 

momento (74) 

cautious in choosing a horse, and very careless in choosing 

cauto nello scegliere trascurato 

a friend. 

77. Mezzo, 7;r/(/; when 'placed after the noun, is invariable, 

I 

\ 

: 

but when placed before, is declinable. Ex. 

Una libbra e mezzo, 

Due ore e mezzo, 

Una mezza libbra, 

Due mezzi scudi, 

A pound and half. 

Two hours and a half. 

Half a pound. 

Two half-crowns. 

78. Half used substantively is expressed by metà. Ex. 

Qiiasila meth dei soldati jJer irono cU \ 

Almo.st the half of the soldiers 

fame e di freddo, perished from hunger and cold. 

I have eaten the half of an orange. 

Ho vmngiato ia metà di un arancio, ' 

79. The adjective bello is curtailed of the last syllable before 

masculine nouns beginning with a consonant, except an s im- 

pure ; before a vowel it loses the final letter and receives an 

apostrophe. Ex. 

fT)} bel j9«Z«2so, a fine palace, I 

Un bello specchio, a handsome mirror, 

Bei palazzi. 

Begli specchi. 

Bell'occ/iio, a beautiful eye, I Btgli occhi. 

—

y» 

ON ADJECTIVES. 

80. The adjective grande loses the final letter before mas- 

culine and feminine nouns beginning with a consonant, both in 

the singular and plural. This elision does not take place before 

an s impure; and before a vowel, grande drops the final letter 

and receives an apostrophe. Ex. 

if)i gran popolo, a great people, 

Gran j)opoU. 

Una gv&n flotta, a great fleet, 

Un grande scoglio, a great rock, 

Un gvand'i/jjpero, a great empire. 

Gran flotte. 

Grandi scofli. 

Grand' imperi. 

81. Santo, when it means saint, and comes before a masculine 

proper noun beginning with a consonant, an s impure excepted, 

loses the last syllable ; this elision does not take place when 

santo translates holy. Ex. 

San Paolo e San Pietro, I 

Saint Paul and Saint Peter. 

II santo sepolcro. The holy sepulchre. 

Saint Stephen. 

Santo Stefano, I 

82. Buono loses the final o before words beginning with a 

vowel or a consonant, an s impure excepted. Ex. 

Un buon architetto, I A good architect. 

Un buon pittore, A good painter. 

Un buono scultore, A good sculptor. 

I 

83. A few adjectives vary their signification according as they 

come before or after the nouns they qualify. Ex. 

Un gentil uomo, 

Un uomo gentile, 

Un uomo galante, 

Un galantuomo, 

Un uomo grande. 

Un grand'uomo, 

Una certa notizia, 

Una notizia certa, 

A gentle man. 

A kind man. 

A polite man. 

A worthy man. 

A tali man. 

A great man. 

A certain news. 

A news which is certain. 

EXERCISE XVIII. 

A great fortune in the hands of a fool is a great mis- 

(80) /or/M»a (61) (37) imbecille dis- 

f )rtune.—The good people of this great city.— Saint George is 

grazia. (82) popolo (81) Giorgio 

the patron saint of England, Saint Patrick of Ireland, and Saint 

^tutelare 

Andrew of Scotland.—Polite men are not always worthy men, 

Andrea Scozia. (83) (83) 

* Patrizio Irlanda

ON NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 39 

—The Athenians used (to crown) their great warrior» with 

Ateniese solevano incoronare guerriero di 

laurel, and their great poets with ivy and laurel.—How long 

alloro di edera {lb) 

have you studied drawing?—Two years and a half.— Half a 

disegno * * 

i'^'') 

pound* of coffee.—A great general makes good soldiers.—Cupid 

caj^è. geìierale fa soldato. Cupido 

is represented as a beautiful child with a bow and a quiver. 

rappresentato come (79) fanciullo arco faretra. 

—The holy office of the Inquisition was founded by Saint 

(81) uffizio Inquisizione ma. Z fondato 

Dominic.—The countryf of great men. 

Domenico. (83) 

Numeral Adjectives are divided into cardinal and ordinal 

numbers.

40 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 

84, Uno, oìic, a, is used substantively to signify a mem, a 

woman, a person, and is the only cardinal number which agrees 

with the noun it accompanies. Ex. 

ITo perduto uno spillo di diamanti, I have lost a diamond brooch and !» 

ed una collana di perle, pearl necklace. 

E uno che dice male di lutti, He is a man who speaks ill of every 

one. 

85. When the noun is placed after ventuno, trentuno. Sec, it 

must be in the singular, as it agrees with uno ; but when it comes 

before, it agrees with venti, and is therefore in the plural. Ex. 

Vendnia h'ra, i 

I Lire vent'una, 

Twenty-one 

Twenty-one 

pounds. 

pounds. 

8G. Eleven hundred, twelve hundred, &e., are rendered in 

Italian by mille e cento, mille e due cento. In speaking of years, 

the preposition in, which is used in English, is joined in Italian 

to the definite article. Ex. 

Nel mille quattro cento novanta due 

l'America fic scoperta, 

Nel mille sei cento sessanta sei fa 

venduto il tè a sessanta scellini la 

libbra, 

In fourteen hundred and ninety-two 

America was discovered. 

In sixteen hundred and 8Ìxty-.si.\, 

tea was sold at sixty shillings a 

pound. 

87. The transposition of the unit before the ten is not admissible 

in Italian. Ex. 

Ifa combattuto in venti due britta- 

fflie, 

Furon fatti trenta tre prigionieri, 

He has fought in two-and-twenty 

battles. 

Three-and-thirty prisoners were 

taken. 

88. The conjunction between numbers is not required, but 

may be used after mille and milione. Ex. 

was founded by Alex- 

I Alexandria Alessandria fufondata da Alessandro 

il grande, tre centotrenta due ander the Great, three hundred 

anni avanti Cristo, \ and thirty-two years before Christ. 

89. In speaking of age, the verb to have is used instead of to 

be, and the expression, of age, is not rendered. IIoio old is 

translated by quanti anni, or che età. Ex. 

Quanti anni or che età ha vostro How old is your brother ? 

fratello ? 

Ha venti anni, 

He is twenty years of age. 

Una sua figlioletta che aveva forse One of his daughters who was about 

diecianni. 

ten years old.

CARDINAL NUMBERS. 41 

KXERCI3E XIX. 

There are about four hundred famous pyramids in Egypt, 

circa famoso piramide Egitto 

three great ones, the rest smaller ; the largest of the tliree 

* 

resto pia piccolo ; pia grande 

great pyramids is 512 feet high, and 1028 feet broad 

piede m. alto in circonferenza 

at the bottom.— Herschel, the most distant of the planets, 

base. Urano piti distante [0)2) pianeta 

takes 84 years to make his revolution round the sun ; Saturn 

mette a fare giro intorno a Saturno 

29 years 5 mouths, and 17 days; Jupiter 11 years 10 months 

Giove 

and 14 days; Mars, 1 year 10 months 21 days; the Earth, 

Marte (85) 

1 year; Venus, 7 months 14 days; Mercury, 2 months 27 days. 

Venere Mercurio 

—Virgil was one-and-fifty years of age when he died at 

Virgilio (89) (87) (88) morì 

Brundusinm, and was buried at Naples 18 years before the 

Brindisi ind. 3 sepolto avanti 

Christian Era.—The Temple of Diana, at Ephesus, was sup- 

2 1 tempio Efeso ind. 2 sos- 

ported by 127 pillars, which were built by 127 kings; each 

tenuto colonna ind. 3 eretto (48) ogni 

pillar was sixty feet high.—How old are you ?— At Marathon a 

13 4 2 (39) Maratona[2>^) 

small town, distant from Athens about two-and-twenty miles, 

piccolo distante Atene (SI) (59) 

was fought the battle in which the Persian 

ind. 3 combattuto battaglia cui Persiano (72) 

army, of a hundred thousand men, was defeated by ten 

armata, forte (58) disfatto 

thoxisand Athenians.—In 1859. 

Ateniese (86)

43 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 

Primo, 

ORDINAL NUMBERS.

ORDINAI, NUMBERS. 43 

Eighth ; he, his son Edward the Sixth, Mary, and Queen 

Eduardo (33) 

Elizabeth, all died on a Thursday.— Cardinal Kichetutto 

morirono in * 

(33) Cardincde 

lieu, minister of Louis the Thirteenth, was named the King of 

ministro appellato 

the King,—The fourth scene of the third act was much apscena 

atto applauded.—Pope 

Sixtus the Fifth was the son of a poor peasant, 

plaudito Sisto contadino 

and had been (a hog-driver) himself; Adrian vi. was 

guardiano di porci egli stesso Adriano 

the son of a tradesman ; John xii,, who added a third 

mercante Giovanni che aggiunse 

circle to the tiara, and wore three crowns, (began life 

cerchio portò corona aveva cominciato 

by mending shoes) ; and Adrian iv. was the son of a 

col raccomodare scarpe 

beggar, and had been a beggar himself. 

mendicante 

92. The dates of the month are expressed in Italian by the 

cardinal numbers, preceded by the singular or plural definite 

article ; in speaking of ihe first day of the month, the ordined 

number is used. Ex. 

II, i, or li venti Settembre, gli Alleati 

attaccarono e sconjissero i Bussi 

all'Alma, 

Il primo di Gennaio si ricambiano 

in Francia molti regali, 

93, The preposition on, which is employed in English before 

dates, is omitted in Italian. Ex. 

II cinque di Novembre fu scoperta la 

cosjnrazione della jìolvere da cannone, 

Sabato prossimo. 

On the 20tli of SeptemLer, the Alh'ea 

attacked and defeated the Russians 

at the Alma. 

In Franje, many presents are exchanged 

on the 1st of January. 

On the 5th of November tlie gunpowder 

plot was discovered. 

On Saturday next. 

94. What o'clock is rendered by che ora. Ex. 

A che ora fate merenda ? At | 

A che ora faremo colazione ? | At 

what o'clock do you hinch ? 

what o'clock shall we breakfast ?

41 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 

95. The word ora, which translates o'clock, may be omitted 

in the phrases one o'clock, two o'clock, &c., the cardinal num- 

ber, preceded by the article le, which agrees with the word ore 

understood, being all that is required. Ex. 

Noi facciamo colazione alle otto, 

jìranziamo alle cinque e mezzo, 

prendiamo il te alle sette meno un 

quarto, e ceniamo alle dicci e un 

quarto, 

96. Distributive and Collective numbers 

Ad uno ad uno, 

A due a due, 

Tutti c due, 

Una coppia, 

Una dozzina, 

Bimestre, 

Trimestre, 

Semestre, 

Biennio, 

Triennio, 

Quinquennio, lustro, 

Decennio, 

Una volta. 

Due volte, 

Per uno, or a testa. 

We breakfast at ciglit o'clock, we dine 

at half-past five, we take tea at a 

quarter to seven, and we sup at a 

quarter-past ten. 

One by one. 

Two by two. 

Both. 

A couple. 

A dozen. 

Two months. 

Three months. 

Six months. 

Two years. 

Three years. 

Five years, or a lustre. 

Ten years. 

Once. 

Twice. 

Each, or a head. 

97. Ago is rendered in Italian by/a; this day week, by oggi 

a otto ; a fortnight, quindici giorni ; this day fortnight, oggi a 

quindici. Ex. 

Lasciammo la Scozia quindici giorni We left Scotland a fortnight ago. 

fa, or sono, 

Oggi a otto si riapriranno le scuole. This day week the schools will reopen. 

Fra quindici giorai avremo le In a fortnight we shall have vacavacanze, 

lions. 

EXERCISE XXI. 

On the 24th of April 1849, General Oudinot disembarked 

(93) (92) Generale sbarcò 

at Civita Vecchia with twenty-five thousand men, and on the 

(58) 

30th of April the French attacked Eome and were repulsed, 

attaccarono Roma ind. 3 respinto

ON AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 45 

leaving in the hands of the Komans, who were led by the 

lasciando (61) Romano * * condotto 

valiant Garibaldi, 560 prisoners and fourteen officers.—In 

valoroso prigioniere ufficiale. 

Germany, we dined at two o'clock, and we supped at six. 

Germania desinavamo (95) cenavamo 

(You will find me) at home from six to eight o'clock.— (I called 

Mi troverete casa Passai 

on) your brother-in-law twice.—We were in Berlin a year ago. 

da cognato (96) Berlino (97) 

—We entered (in) the cave one by one, but in proceeding 

Entramyno girotta (96) {nelV inoltrarci) 

the passage widened, and we walked two 

passaggio [divenne più largo) camminammo 

by two.—At what o'clock does the train leave for London ? 

* 

(96) (94) 

Hreno ^parte 

—This day fortnight all the hours of arrival and departure 

were 

(97) 

changed.—We spent 

arrivo 

a pound each, 

[11) partenza 

ind. 3 cambiato. spendemmo (96) 

CHAPTER VI. 

ON AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 

In Italian the meaning of nouns may be modified in various 

ways, by adding to them certain syllables ; nouns so modified 

are curtailed of the final vowel. 

98. The terminations one, otto, &c., are called augmentatives, 

and imply size, strength, vigour ; feminine nouns modified by 

one become masculine. Ex. 

I.a campana, il campanone, 1 

II ragazzo, il ragazzotto, I 

The bell, the great bell. 

The boy, the strong, stout boy. 

99. Accio, astro, icciattolo, aglia, &c., are called peggiorativi, 

and imply contempt, ugliness. Ex. 

—

46 ON AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 

Un soldato, soldataccio, 

Un poeta, poetastro, 

La f/ente, gentaglia, 

Un uomo, omicciattolo, 

A Boldier, a good-for-nothing solJicr, 

A poet, a poor rhjmster. 

People, mob. 

A man, a despicable little man. 

100. Ino, etto, iccino, oncello, elio, icello, eretto, &c., are called 

diminutives, and convey not only an idea of smallness, but also 

that of beauty and endearment. Ex. 

II cane, cagnolino, The dog, the nice little dog. 

II viso, visetto, 

Il libro, libricdno, 

Il bastone, bastoncello, 

Un meschino, meschinello, 

Il fiume, fiumicello, 

Un vecchio, vecchierello. 

The face, the pretty little face. 

The book, the small book. 

The stick, the small stick. 

A poor man, a poor unfortunate man. 

The river, the rivulet. 

An old man, a poor old man. 

101. Some adjectives and Christian names are modified in a 

similar manner. Ex. 

Ricco, riccone. 

Fresco, freschetto, 

Bello, bellÌ7io, 

Bianco, bianchiccio, 

Maria, Marietta, Mariuccia, 

Rich, very rich. 

Fresh, rather fresh. 

Beautiful, pretty. 

White, whitish. 

Mary, little Mary. 

102. Adverbs also admit of these modifications, Ex. 

Poco, pochino, pochetto, I A little, very little. 

Adagio, adagino. Softly, very softly. 

Well, pretty well, very well. 

Bene, benino, benone, \ 

The list of these modifications being very numerous, we only give some of 

the principal ; practice and attention, better than rides, will guide the 

student in the application of this peculiarity of the Italian language. One, 

accio, and ino are the most commonly used terminations, and may be applied 

to almost all words, whilst the others cannot be used indiscriminately. 

EXERCISE XXII. 

Every evening we take a walk along a small stream, 

Ogni facciamo passeggiata lungo [100) ruscello 

in which a thousand little fish play.— You speak Italian 

cui (41) pesce sguizzano parlate 

well, your sister pretty well, but your brother very well.—This 

(102) 

piece of music must be played very slowly at the beginning, and 

pesso dev' sonata (1^2) principio

OM COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 47 

a little, very little faster at the end.—I will buy a little 

pia presto fine (100) 

doll for ruy little sister.—Her little hands are too small 

fantoccio art. piccolo 

for these great gloves.—We have given some money to the poor 

(99) dato danaro 

old man, who is led by a nice little dog, that carries a little 

(100) che condotto (100) porta 

basket in his mouth.—Avery strong lad rings the great church 

paniere * bocca. (98) suona 

* 

bell on Sundays.— She pronounces Italian very well, but she 

(98) (93) Domenica. pronunzia 

should read a very little slower.—A great dog frightened 

dovrebbe (100) piiX adagio ha spaventato 

poor little Margaret. 

(101) Margherita. 

CHAPTER VII. 

ON COMrARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES, 

In Italian, the comparative degrees of superiority and in- 

feriority are formed by translating more., più; less, mono ; and 

than by di or che. 

103. I'/'ian is generally translated by (Z/ before all pronouns 

and numeral adjectives. Ex. 

Xon vi è gente pia credula di quella 

che ha interesse di essere ingannata, 

La Grecia era più colta di tutte le 

altre nazioni dell' antichità, 

Non mi mandate meno di cento lire, 

There are none more credulous tLan 

those who have an interest in 

being deceived. 

Greece was more polished than any 

other nation of antiquity. 

Do not send me less than a hundred 

pounds. 

104. The personal pronouns following di must be in the objective 

case, not, as in English, in the nominative. Ex.

48 ON COMPARATIVES. 

J^lla è pill dotta di lui, 

Eglino sono stati più saggi di me, 

She is more learned than he. 

They have been wiser than I. 

But when a personal pronoun is followed by a verb, of which 

it is the subject, than is rendered by che, and the pronoun is 

used in the nominative, as in English. Ex. 

La lingua Italiana è più facile che i The 

io non credeva, \ I thought. 

Italian language is easier than 

105. When the comparison is made between two mjimtives, 

two adverbs, or two adjectives, than is translated by che, and 

also when the two 7iou7is compared are only separated by than. 

E meglio salvare un colpevole che 

condannare un innocente, 

Faceva più caldo ieri che oggi, 

E meglio tardi che mai, 

I suoi capélli erano più bianchi che 

biondi, 

Vi s'incontrano più uomini che 

donne, 

It is better to acquit a. criminal than 

to condemn an innocent person. 

It was warmer yesterday than today. 

It is better late than never. 

Her hair was more white than fair. 

One meets there more men than 

women. 

106. Before proper names, as in many other cases, than may 

be rendered by di or che ; when di is used, the expression a comparazione, 

in comparison of, is understood, and when che is em- 

ployed, the verb of the proposition, accompanied by non, can be 

repeated ; if the sense of the phrase does not admit of this re- 

petition, che is not to be used. Ex. 

Cesare è più stimato (a comparazione) 

di Pompeo, or che (non è) 

Pompeo, 

L'uomo è meno paziente (a comparazione) 

della donna, or che [non 

è) la donna, 

107. When than is followed by a verb not in the infinitive, 

it IS expressed by di quel che, or che non. Ex. 

Igrandi della terra son meno da invidiarsi 

di quel che or che non si 

crede, 

II savio ascolta j)iù di quel che, or 

che non parla, 

Cfcsar is more esteemed than Pompey- 

Men are less patient than women. 

The great of the earth are less to be 

envied than we think. 

A wise person listens more than he 

speaks.

ON COMPARATIVES. 49 

EXERCISE XXIII. 

Silver is less precious than gold.— Usurers are worse than 

argento preziosailOQ) [bl] usuraio peggiore 

robbers.—He is richer than a.krog, because he is happier.—It 

ladro. (103) perchè 

is better to forgive than to revenge,—In the first centuries the 

meglio * perdonare [105) * vendicarsi. secolo 

Eomans were more warlike than literary. — A feigned 

guerriero (105) letterato. [12) simulato 

peace is more dangerous than an open war.—Nothing is more 

pace pericoloso aperto Niente 

transient than beauty.—The charms of a cultivated mind 

passeggiero incanto coltivato 

attract more than the graces of the most faultless forms.—He 

allettano grazia piil perfetto forma. 

is less poor than is believed.—He owes his success more to chance 

(107) si crede. deve successo caso 

tlian to merit.—Many strive to obtain more than they really 

(105) merito. cercano ottenere (107) realmente 

want, and to appear better than they are.— You are richer 

abbisognano sembrare migliore 

than I, but I am happier than you.— Greater virtue (is re- 

(103) (104) hnaggior ^ ^si ri- 

quired) in good fortune than in bad,—Croesus had more gold 

chiede fortuna {105) cattivo Creso ind. 2 oro 

than his conqueror Cyrus ; but Cyrus had better iron than 

conquistatore Ciro miglior ferro {106) 

Croesus.—It is better to rise early than late. 

meglio levarsi di buon ora (105) tardi. 

108. The following adjectives may form the comparative degrees 

in two ways, Ex. 

Buono, good, pia buono, or migliore* better. 

Cattivo, bad, p)iù cattivo, ox peggiore, worse, 

* Migliore, peggiore, are move generally used in speaking of abstract 

is tlie worst of social evils, la guerra è il peggiore dei mah so- 

things : War 

ciali-—Possession is better than hope, il possesso è migliore della speranza.

50 ON COMPARATIVES. 

Graìide, più grande^ or maggiore^\ 

Large, great, larger, greater. 

Piccolo^ pia piccolo, or minore, 

Small, smaller. 

109. In speaking of physical size, piii grande, più, piccolo, 

must be used, and not maggiore, minore. Ex. 

// mio giardino e più grande del 

vostro, 

La luna e più piccola della terra, 

My garden is larger than yours. 

The moon is smaller llian the earth. 

110. The following adverbs form the comparative degrees 

without the help oi più or meno. Ex, 

Bene,

COMPARISONS OP EQUALlTV. 51 

the desire of doing better.—The crocodile is hirger than the 

desiderio fare (110) coccodrillo (109) 

lizard, but of the same fatoily.—Xenophon acquired greater 

lucertola stesso Senofonte acquistò (108) 

glory from his celebrated retreat than (many modern 

con celebre ritirata {107) 2 

(have obtained) from great victories, 

^sub. 1 ottenuto con 

COMPARISONS OF EQUALITY. 

111. Comparisons of equality arc formed as follows : 

FIRST TERM. SECOND TEEM. 

Così or si, as or so, Come, as. 

Tanto, altrettanto, as or so Quanto, as. 

much. 

Tale, such, Quale, as. 

Più, or quanto piìl, the more, Più, or tanto più, the more. 

Meno, or quanto meno, the less, Meno, or tanto meno, the less. 

Tanto, quanto, should be used in forming comparisons of quan- 

tit!/. Ex. 

Napoli non ha tanti abitanti quanti 

ne ha Parigi, 

L'occhio del servitore non xmle mai 

così bene come l'occhio delpadrone, 

Questa stanza è tanto lunga quanto 

la vostra e larga, 

Ve lo descrivevo tale quale l'ho veduto. 

Più, or quanto più, uno e ignorante 

più, or tanto più, uno è j)'''onto a 

giudicare, 

Meno, or quanto meno, studierete 

meno, or tanto meno, imparerete, 

— 

Naples has not as many inhabitants 

as Paris. 

A servant's eye never sees so well as 

a master's. 

This room is as long as yours is 

broad. 

I will describe it to you as I have 

seen it. 

The more ignorant one is, the moro 

ready one is to judge. 

The less you study, the less you will 

know. 

112. The first terms, così, tanto, tale, maybe omitted, but not 

if they relate to nouns of different gender. Ex. 

Ef]li non è gonzo come ne ha l'aria, He is not so silly as he looks. 

Non ha studiato quanto sua sorella, He has not studied as much as his 

sister. 

Si e mostrato quale l'avevamo giudi- He has shown himself such as we 

cato, judged him to be.

52 COMPARISONS OF EQUALITV. 

Poverty is tbe only enemy of the poor 

| La povertà 

gente, 

è il solo nemico 

il dissoluto ne 

dell'indiha 

tanti, man ; those of the dissohite are as 

quante sono le sregolate sue brame, \ numerous as his unbridled desires. 

113. Tanto, quanto ; tale, quale, when governed by .a noun, 

are used as adjectives, and are declinable. Ex. 

Tyrants I tiranni hanno tanti nemici quanti 1 

sono i loro sudditi, \ they have subjects. 

have as many enemies as 

114. Al par di, equally, as, may be used instead of cosi, come ; 

tanto, quanto. Ex. 

Si mostrarono valorosi al par degli 

antichi Spartani, 

Non sarete ricompensato al par di 

vostra sorella. 

EXERCISE XXV. 

— 

They proved themselves as valiant as 

the ancient Spartans. 

You shall not be equally rewarded as 

your sister. 

The inhabitants of towns are not as healthy as those of the 

(111) sano quello 

country.—The more he studies the more he wishes to study. 

(HI) studia desidera 

She is not so proud as her sister.—This pen is as bad as the 

orgoglioso penna (112) 

other.—Aristides was as valiant as just.—Those mountains 

Aristide valoroso giusto. Quello montagna 

are not so high as they appear in the distance.—The more 

alto sembrano * distanza. 

(we praise ourselves,) the more we dispose others to criticize 

ci lodiamo disponiamo art. altro a criticare 

our defects.—He was such as a good and happy man should 

dovrebbe 

be.—His conduct was not such as his enemies represented. 

condotta 

la rappresentarono 

The more he studied nature, the more he felt veneration for 

studiava (25) sentiva 

the wisdom and omnipotence of the Creator.—The soldiers 

sapienza onnipotenza 

were praised as much as their officers, 

ind. 3 (114)

ON 6UPEELATIVE8. 58 

ON SUPERLATIVES. 

115. The Superlative Absolute is formed, 

Is/, By changing the final vowel of adjectives and adverbs into 

issiiuo. Ex. 

Grande, grandissimo. Male, malissimo, 

Great, very great. Badly, very badly. 

Piccolo, piccolissimo. Bene, benissimo. 

Little, very little. Well, very well. 

Observe—Adverbs which are formed by adding mente to ad- 

jectives, form the superlative by omitting the final vowel of the 

adjective, and adding issimamente. Ex. 

Grande, grandemente, cjrandissimamente. 

Great, greatly, very greatly. 

Dotto, dottamente, dottissimamente. 

Learned, learnedly, very learnedly. 

2dly, By translating very by the adverbs molto, assai, oltre- 

modo, &c., or by a repetition of the adjective. Ex. 

Egli ajjpartiene ad una famiglia I 

— 

He belongs to a very rich aud es- 

assai ricca e molto stimata, teemed family. 

Voi mi sembrate oltremodo afflitto, 

Quando mi vide, ella divenne rossa, 

You seem very much grieved. 

When she saw me, she became very 

rossa, red. 

116. Adjectives ending in io lose these two vowels before the 

superlative tennination zWrno ; and those ending in co and ô, 

ca and ga, which take an h in the plural (see § 50, 51), also 

take it before issimo. Ex. 

Ex. 

Savio, wise. Savissimo, very wise. 

Bieco, rich. Biechissimo, very rich. 

Largo, wide. Larghissimo, very wide. 

117. A few adjectives form the superlative absolute in errimo. 

Misero, miserable. Miserrimo, very miserable. 

Celebre, celebrated. Celeberrimo, very celebrated. 

Acre, bitter. Acerrimo, very bitter. 

Integro, honest. Integerrimo, very honest. 

Salubre, salubrious. Saluberrimo, veiy salubrious.

54 ON SUPEKLATIVEB. 

EXERCISE XXVI. 

Tlie study of languages is very agreeable and very useful. 

studio (25) piacevole 

liouis the Eleventh and Ferdinand of Spain were both very 

(91) Spagna (96) 

cruel and very perfidious, nevertheless (the former) assumed the 

perfido nondimeno quegli assunse 

title of very Christian, and (the latter) of Catholic.—Very 

— 

questi Cattolico. (116) 

wise men have very often made great mistakes.—He is 

savio (58) spesso fatto (80) (57) sbaglio. 

very rich and very honest.—Michael Angelo was a (very 

(116) (117) Michelangiolo 2 

celebrated) (painter, sculptor, and architect.)—Napoleon made 

(117) ^pittore scultore architetto. 

very favourable laws for the Jews, and during his reign many 

favorevole legge Ebreo durante regno 

occupied very high posts.—Tlio ancient Gauls were very 

occuparono eminente carica. Gallo 

vain and fond of ornaments, and wore bracelets, necklaces, 

vano amante portavano smaniglia collana 

and rings of gold, of very great value.—The sea air is very 

anello valore. (3) aria 

salubrious.—It is much easier to teach by precept than by 

(117) facile insegnare per precetto 

example. 

esempio. 

118. The Superlative Relative is formed by placing il piii^ 

il meno, before the adjective. Ex. 

11 Tîxx felice degli uomini, 

Il meno allegro della brigata, 

La grazia è la più nobile parte della 

bellezza, 

The happiest of men. 

The least gay of the party. 

Grace is the noblest part of beauty. 

119. Tlie article may be omitted when più and meno follow 

the noun. Ex.

Kossuth è Voratore più eloquente dei 

nostri tempi, 

Washington è il cittadino più grande 

che abbia prodotto l'America, 

ON SUPERLATIVES. 55 

Kossuth is the most eloquent oiator 

of our day. 

Washington is the greatest citizen 

America has proihiceJ. 

120, Adjectives ending in ore require no adverb to form the 

superlative relative. Ex. 

// maggiore, 

The greatest, 

il minore, 

the least, 

il migliore, 

the best, 

il peggiore. 

the worst. 

121. The following words express the superlative absolute degree, 

and preceded by the article the superlative relative :— 

Ottimo, very gooJ, 

Pessimo, very had, 

Massimo, very great, 

Minimo, very little. 

Sommo, very high. 

Infimo, very low. 

EXERCISE XXVII. 

L'ottimo, the host. 

Jl pessimo, the worst. 

Jl massimo, the greatest. 

II minimo, the least. 

// sommo, the highest. 

L'infimo, the lowest. 

The language of a people is the most important monument of 

popolo monumento 

their history.—Gold is the purest and most precious of metals. 

sua storia. (25) puro prezioso metallo. 

— A 

God's power extends from the lowest abyss of the earth to the 

(1) potere si estende {121) abisso 

highest part of the heavens.—Men gifted with the best under- 

cielo dotato di (120) intel- 

standing and the greatest genius do not always shine in conletto 

(17) genio sempre brillano 

fersation.—The richest people are not always the most satisfied. 

* contento 

—The most pernicious of crimes is slander, it often ruins the 

pernicioso delitto ccdunnia essa spesso rovina 

reputation of the most honest people, it disunites the 

gente {mette la discordiafra) 

most intimate friends, and, in short, is the worst of crimes.— 

intimo 

peaceful conscience is 

fine 

the highest happiness of man.— 

^tranquillo ^coscienza

5G ON SUPERLATIVES. 

The highest Christian virtue, and the most difficult to practise, 

(121) 

^ * 

praticarsi 

is to love our enemies.—Nature is a temple worthy of Deity. 

The seat of true religion 

(25) 

is the 

tempio degno Divinità 

heart.—Public worship is the 

sede [^'2) religione {&\) cuore cidto 

public expression of homage to the Sovereign of the universe. 

omaggio (62) Monarca 

ADDITIONAL EXERCISE. 

Adversities and difficulties weaken ordinary minds, and 

(48) Avversità indeboliscono ^ (57) ^spirito 

redouble the faculties and energy of superior souls.—Sudden 

^ 

raddoppiano 

changes are always dangerous.— Humanity 

^ 

is 

repentino 

like a man 

who lives indefinitely, and 

(25) umanità {simile a) 

learns ever.— In 1667 theatrical 

vive indefinitamente impara (86) Heatrale 

representations in France began at two o'clock, and 

^rappresentazione (28) cominciavano (95) 

ended at half-past four.—The mosaics of Rome are tlje 

terminavano (53) mosaico 

most famous in Europe.—Florence produces the most beautiful 

produce (79) 

inlaid woods.—Mosaics may be called a kind of painting, 

{intarsi in legno) {si possono appellare) pittura 

the figures and landscapes being formed of atoms of stone, 

{51) paesaggio atomo 

marble, or wood.—The twilight in the south is much 

crepuscolo mezzogiorno 

shorter than in the north. 

(106) 

settentrione. 

—

PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 57 

CHAPTER Vili.

58 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

Third Person Fern.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 59 

on the pronoun ; in this case the pronouns are generally placed 

after the verb. Ex. 

10 insegno a voi l'Italiano e voi insegnate 

a me l'Inglese, 

11 maestro lodò lei perche è stata 

diligente, e biasimo lui per essere 

negligente, 

Farlo a voi Enrico, 

I teacli you Italian and you teach 

me English. 

The master praised her hecause she 

has been attentive, and blamed 

him for being negligent. 

I speak to you, Henry. 

123. The conjunctive pronouns are used when there is one 

dative or one accusative in the same phrase,—they are placed 

before the verb, and in compound tenses before the auxiliary. Ex. 

Egli mi 2)arla Francese, ma io non 

lo cajnsco, 

Io le ho promesso le tragedie deWAl- 

fieri, 

— 

He speaks French to me, but I do 

not understand him. 

I have promised her Alfieri's trage- 

dies. 

EXERCISE XXVIII. ' 

The milliner has not sent me my bonnet.—Has the shoemodista 

mandare (123) cappellino calmaker 

sent (to) him his boots?—My verses cost me very 

zolaio (123) stivale costare (H^) 

little, said a bad poet ; they cost you what they are worth, was 

disse (99) (ceo che vagliano) ind. 3 

answered to him.—Did you speak to me or to her ?—The letter 

risposto (123) (122) 

was addressed to me, but was brought to my brother.— I have 

indirizzare (122) portare 

met them this morning in the museum, but they did not 

incontrare galleria 

recognise me. John's barons forced liim to grant 

riconobbero (123) Giovanni (1) costrinsero a concedere 

(to) them the famous charter, and they called it Magna 

carta 

Charta.— (We should not believe) (to) 

-chiamare Ha 

those who flatter us. 

Carta Non si dovrebbe dar fede coloro che adular e {12 o) 

—Men naturally love friends who love them ; but religion 

(25) 

* The regular verbs will be henceforth given in the present of the infinitive.


teaches us to love our enemies, and to do good to them. 

insegnare ad [far ^del bene 2 

—The book he gave (to) you is better bound (than the one) 

die dette (122) {110) rilegare di quello che 

he gave (to) me.—Have you invited her ? 

(123) 

124. The CONJUNCTIVE pronouns are placed after the verb 

2ia(\ joined to it in the following cases : 

1st, When they come with a verb in the infinitive, in which 

case the final e of the infinitive is dropped, and if it ends in rre, 

the final re is omitted. Ex. 

Aveva incominciato ad insegnarmi il 

disegno, 

Spero (^'indurlo a venire a passare le 

vacanze con me, 

— 

2dly, '^'xih present &xià.past participles. Ex. 

Scrivendogli potete informarlo del 

vostro progetto, 

Fattaci Vimbasciata, parù a gambe, 

He had begun to teach me drawing. 

I hope to induce him to come and 

spend the vacations with me. 

In writing to him, you can inform him 

of your phan. 

Having given us the message, he ran 

2dl>/, With the imperative used affirmatively. Ex. 

Eipetetemi la lezione. 

Consigliatela ad andare sid Conti- 

nente, 

Prestatemi il vostro temperino, 

off. 

Kepeat your lesson to me. 

Advise her to go on the Continent. 

Lend me your penknife. 

With the imperative used negatively, or with the third per- 

sons of this mood, even when used affirmatively, the conjunctive 

pronouns />receJe the verb. Ex. 

Nonmi parlate pili su questo soggetto, 1 

Do 

not speak to me any more on this 

subject. 

Le dica la verità, Let him tell her the truth. 

Mi dicano quello che hanno fatto, I Letthem tell me what they have done. 

125. When the verb to which the pronoun is joined ends in 

an accented vowel, or is composed of one syllable, the initial con- 

sonant of the pronoun, except of gli, is doubled, and in the first 

case the accent is omitted. Ex.

Appena ci vide, invitocci a pranzo, 

Fammi il favore di tradunx la tua 

lettera in Inglese, 

Dalle la musica che è sid inanofurtc, 

PEIISONAL I'KONOUNS. CI 

EXERCISE XXIX. 

As soon as be saw us, he invited us 

to dinner. 

Do me the favour of translating thy 

letter into English. 

Give her the music which is on the 

piano. 

Mirth, by cheering us, makes us healthy and happy. 

gioia * rallegrare {\2i) rendere [l^Z) sano felice. 

Did you repeat to her my words ?—Do not speak to me when 

ripetere (123) 

quando 

you see me occupied.— Give me (thy whole heart,) sailh the 

occupare. (125) tutto il tuo cuore dice 

Lord.—My father has promised me to take me to Italy 

Signore. promesso condurre (124) in 

when (I shall be able) to speak Italian.—In praising you he 

potrò * * lodare (122) 

praises himself.—Send me the books either by railway 

se stesso. (124) o [colla strada ferrata) 

or by the steam-boat.—It was customary amongst the ancient 

{battello a vapore.) costume fra 

Gauls to immerse their children in cold water (in order to) 

Gcdlo immergere 

make them strong.— Teach (to) 

^ 

thy son 

^ 

onde 

obedience, and he 

rendere insegnare ubbidienza 

shall bless thee ; teach him science, and his life shall be usebenedire 

(124) scienza 

fui; teach him religion, and his death shall be happy.—Let them 

viorte 

write to me often, and I will never fail to answer (to) 

[io non mancherò mai) rispondere 

them. 

126. The English neuter objective pronouns it., them, aie 

rendered in Italian by the conjunctive pronoun Zo, w-hich in this 

case serves as a relative pronoun, and agrees with the antecedent 

to which it relates, and precedes or follows the verb according to 

tlie rules given for the conjunctive pronouns. Ex. 

—

62 PHK30NAL PRONOUNS. 

Chi ha preso U mio ombrello f 

ha preso vostro zio, 

Idajìete la lezione ì Non la so, 

Chi vi ha dato questi bei fiori ? 

Li ho comprati, 

Sulla piazza di Palazzo Vecchio a 

Firenze vi sono delle bellissime 

statue ; le avete vedute ? 

Lo Who has taken my umbrella ? Your 

uncle has taken it. 

Do you know the lesson ? I do not 

know it. 

Who has given you those Leautiful 

flowers ? 

I have bought them. 

In the square of the old Palace in 

Florence there are very beautiful 

statues. Have you seen them ? 

127. The conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, si, change the 

final i into e when followed by any of the relative pronouns lo, 

la, li, le, ne. These pronouns are written separately when they 

come before the verb, and are joined to it when they follow. Ex. 

II custode me hfece vedere, 

Nel mostrarmelo, egli mi disse. 

Ve ne abbiamo avvertito in vano. 

Dove avete comprato questi aranci : 

Ce li ha regalati il nonno, 

Non posso prestarvelo, 

So ne sono jjentiti, 

Tlie keeper showed it to me. 

In showing it to me, he said to me. 

We warned you of it in vain. 

Where have you bought tliose 

oranges ? Our grandfather has 

made us a present of them. 

I cannot lend it to you. 

They have repented of it. 

Observe—By the above examples it will be seen that in Ita- 

lian the relative pronouns are placed after the conjunctive, and 

not, as in English, before. 

In poetry, and for elegance, mei, tei, eel, vel, cen, &c., are 

used instead of me lo, te lo, ce lo, ve lo, ce ne, &c. Ex. 

Orsù Mirtillo, è tempo che tu ten 

vada.— G. P. Fido. 

Non mei jìermise.—Zan. 

Dio vel perdoni, 

Temo cen privi.— Tasso. 

Mirtillo, it is time thou wert going. 

He did not allow it to me. 

May God pardon you this. 

I fear he will deprive us of it. 

128. When several verbs govern the same pronouns, the pronouns 

are generally repeated with each verb. Ex. 

Niuna accademia si puo attribuire 

piena e sovrana signoria sopra una 

lingua. L'uso del popolo che la 

parla è il sovrano padrone ; i dotti, 

gli scrittori, jìossono bensì mantenerla, 

illustrarla, pulirla, ed accre- 

scerla, 

Lo amiamo e lo stimiamo, 

No academical body can arrogate the 

entire and supreme control of a 

language. The custom of the 

people who speak it becomes an 

absolute standard ; authors and 

scientific men may, however, 

maintain, illustrate, puiify, and 

enrich it. 

We love and esteem him.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS. G3 

EXERCISE XXX. 

Fear warns us of dangers, firmness removes them, 

timore avvertire (123) pericolo fermezza allontanare (126) 

and restores composure to us.—When you have written the 

rendere calma (123) fat. scritto 

exercise, read it to me, and I will correct it.—A bad poet 

(12G)(127) correggere (99) 

having written a satire against Benedict the Fourteenth, the 

satira contro Benedetto (91) 

Pope examined it, and after having corrected it sent it 

(12G) dopo inf. corretto rimandare 

back to the author, assuring him that thus corrected he would 

* accertare (124:) così 

sell it much better.—The bookseller begged me to tell you that 

libraio pregare 

he has not yet received the French books, but he will send 

ancora (72) mandare 

them to you (as soon as) they arrive.—Either sell or lend it 

(127) tosto che * fut. m. 

to me.—Dante found the Italian language in its cradle, and 

(128) trovare * cuna, 

placed it on a throne.— Courtiers hide from monarchs 

pose [sul trono) cortigiano nascondere a 

the truth, historians alone tell it to them. 

storico dicono 

129. The pronoun gli, when followed by a relative pronoun, 

instead of changing the final i into e like the other conjunctive 

pronouns, takes an e after the final i, and forms one word with 

the relative pronoun. Ex. 

Glielo darò volentieri, 

Glieli /iO spediti, ed a quest'ora deve 

averli ricevuti, 

I suoi amici gliene parlarono in 

confidenza, 

130. Glie is also used for the feminine instead of le, when fol- 

lowed by a relative pronoun. Ex. 

I will give it to bim willingly. 

I have sent them to him, and he 

must have received them by this. 

His fi lends spoke to him of it in 

confidence.


Su che mia cur/ina ama i fiori, ed io 

gliene mando sovente, 

Dovete darglielo x>oicliè voi glielo 

avete promesso, 

I know my cousin likes flowers, anJ 

I send lier some often. 

You must give it to her, as you have 

promised it to her. 

131. A loro, to them, serves foi- both genders, and is used 

Avith or without the preposition a; it always follows the verb, 

and is never joined to any other word. Ex. 

Presentai a loro, or loro mia moglie, 1 I introduced my wife to them. 

Nc detti a loro, or loro la metà, I gave them the half. 

\ 

E inutile dar loro, or a loro dei It is useless to give them good adhuoni 

consirjli, vice. 

132. When a conjunctive pronoun is accompanied by the 

word ecco, here is, there is, it must be placed after it, awàjomed 

to it. Ex. 

Eccomi iironto a servirvi, 

Dove sono gli altri Ì Eccoli, 

Eccoci giunti, 

Here I am ready to serve you. 

Where are the others ? llere they 

are. 

Here we arc an 

133. Wlien the pronouns myself, thjself himself e^c, only 

repeat the subject of a verb which is not reflective, they are 

omitted, or rendered by io stesso, tu stesso, egli stesso, &c., and 

not literally by me stesso, te stesso, lui stesso, &c. Ex. 

L'ho tradotto io, I translated it myself. 

Gli ho parlato io stesso, I spoke to him myself. 

Ella stessa ci ha sgridali. She scolded us herself. 

134. But when these pronouns are used as reflective pronouns, 

they are expressed by mi, ti, si, ci, vi, si. Ex. 

Mi riposai aWomhra di una guer- 

cia, 

Ella si abbigliò elegantemente, 

In vano si lusingano di persuaderci, 

Ci rassegnammo al nostro destino, 

EXERCISE XXXI. 

1 rested myself under the shade of 

an oak. 

She dressed herself elegantly. 

They vainly flatter themselves that 

they will persuade us. 

We resigned ourselves to our fate. 

The Greeks, (in order to) oblige their wives to remain at 

(51) onde costringere (58) a 

home, forbid (to) them to wear shoes in the house.—He wrote 

proibire (131) portare 

* scrisse 

himself (his own epitaph). — Your sister wished to see tho 

n33) il proprio epitaffio desiderare

TEIISONAL PKONOUNS. 65 

pictures that I have bought m Florence, and I have sent Ihcni 

quadro (126) 

to her.—Virtue unites men by inspiring (to) them with mu- 

(130) (25) coll' inf. (131) ^'"

G6 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

137. In order to prevent repetition, vi and ci are substituted 

for each other. Ex. 

Vi ci condussero, not vi vi condus- 1 

sevo, 

They 

I 

took you there. 

138. Ne is used as a conjunctive pronoun, instead of ci, in 

poetry, or in a lofty style ; it is also employed as a relative pro- 

noun, to render some, any, of, for, about, concerning him, her, it, 

them, away, from a place. It answers to the French word en. 

Ex. 

Ne ho tanti che mi bastano, 

Ì^Q parliamo costantemente, 

Dopo il primo atto se ne andò, 

Efjli ne parla con molto interesse, 

Avete danari ? Ne ho, 

1 htave quite enough of them. 

We speak of it constantly. 

After the first act he went away. 

He speaks of bini or it with much 

interest. 

Have you money ? I have some. 

139. Ne is employed to supply the omission of a noun, which 

in English is often understood. Ex. 

Avete dei libri italiani? 

Ne ho dueo tre, 

Ve ne darò io uno interessantissimo, 

Una disgrazia spesso ne conduce 

seco molte, 

EXERCISE XXXII. 

Have you any Italian books ? 

I have two or three. 

I will give you a very interesting 

one. 

One misfortune often brings many. 

Fléchier was of low extraction ; a bishop having once 

basso estrazione vescovo (96) 

alluded to it with contempt, he replied : (My lord,) there 

fare allusione {135) disprezzo rispose Monsignore 

is this difference between you and me, if you (had been) born in 

fra foste nato 

my father's shop, you would be there still.—It is characteristic 

[1) bottega ancora proprio 

of a fool to say, I did not think of it.—This rule is not difsezocco 

(34) pensare (135) regola 

ficult if you pay attention to it.—You will succeed in it.—If 

fare riuscire (135) 

you do not know the way, I will accompany you there.—It 

sapere accompagnare (137)

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. G7 

was an ancient Roman custom to recite funeral orations at the 

recitare funebre orazione 

burial of old women ; Cajsar was the first to recite one at the 

funerale Cesare inch 3 a (139) 

death of his wife.— Stenography, or the art of writing in abbremorte 

Stenografia ossia inf. abhreviation, 

was used in Eome in the time of Cicero, who 

viatura [si cominciò ad usare) a Cicerone che 

(it is said) was the inventor of it.—Some laugh at it, some 

si dice (138) Chi s. ridere (138) 

weep for it.—Are there any public libraries in this town? 

piangere pubblico (50) biblioteca 

There are three.—Here are some fine nuts ; 

take some yourself, 

(139) (132) bello noce {\2A.) {n^) per voi 

and give some to your little sister. 

art. (100) 

ON POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

Mio^ nna, miei, mie, 

Tuo, tua, tuoi, tue. 

Suo, sua, suoi, sue. 

Nostro, nostra, nostri, nostre, 

Vostro, vostra, vostri, vostre. 

Loro, loro, loro, loro. 

my, mine, 

thy, thine, 

his, hers, her, its. 

our, ours, 

your, yours, 

their, theirs. 

140. In Italian, possessive pronouns agree with the thing j90s- 

sessed, and not with the possessor; and are generally preceded 

by the definite article. Ex. 

II mio dovere, la vostra giustizia, lo 

loro virtù. 

Egli amo la stia patria più della sna 

vita, 

My duty, your justice, their virtues. 

He loved bis country more than his 

141. The article is omitted when the pronouns, loro excepted, 

precede nouns of kindred or rank in the singular. In the plural, 

the article is used. Ex. 

life.

C8 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

Tua madre e Ina sorella furono a 

casa di mia zia, 

Sua Ifaestà la Ber/ina Vittoria, 

Il loro cugino abita in Firenze, 

Le mie sorelle ed i miei fratelli sono 

adesso in Italia, 

Tliy mother and tLy sister were at 

my aunt's. 

Her Majesty Queen Victoria. 

Their cousin lives in Florence. 

My sisters and my brothers are now 

in Italy. 

142. When the noun of kindred in the singular is preceded 

by an adjective, or modified by a diminutive or augmentative ter- 

mination, the article is prefixed to the pronoun. Ex. 

II vostro ottimo j^ndre, e la vostra 

amorosa madre, 

Ho dato al vostro fratellino una 

lettera per voi, 

La sua sorellaccia mi fa sempre disjnacere, 

Your excellent father, and your affectionate 

mother. 

I gave your little brother a letter for 

you. 

His disagreeable sister always displeases 

me. 

143. The possessive pronouns may be placed after the noun, 

and in this case the article is placed before the noun instead of 

the pronoun. Ex. 

Excellency. 

I L'Eccellenza vostra, 

II padre nostro, 

II dover mio, Vonor suo, | 

Your 

Our father. 

My duty, his honour. 

144. The possessive pronouns require the article when they 

precede the following nouns of kindred. 

II mio genitore, instead ofjmdre, father. 

La mia genitrice, „ madre, mother. 

Il tuo germano, „ fratello, brother. 

La tua germana, ,, sorella, sister. 

Il suo sposo, „ marito, husband. 

Il suo consorte, „ „ „ 

La vostra sposa, „ moglie, wife. 

La vostra consorte, „ „ 

EXEUCISE XXXIII. 

Cornelia, the mother of the Gracchi, said to her friends 

disse (140) f. 

as she showed (to) them her sons, "There are my jewels." 

mentile mostrare (131) (132) gioiello. 

—His Holiness Pope Adrian the Fourth, the only Englishman 

[III) Santità Adriano {°l\) solo 

(who ever attained) to that dignity, rendered his memory 

che sia mai pervenuto rese (140) memoria

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. G'J 

infamous by condemning Arnaldo da Brescia to be burned. 

infame 

* ad bruciare. 

— 

" If you lose your colours, be sure to rally round 

stendardo [non mancate) raccogliervi intorno 

my white feather ; you will ever find it in the road to 

pennacchio sempre (12G) su cammino di 

honour and glory," were the celebrated words of his Majesty, 

(35) ind. 3 celebre (141) 

Henry the Fourth, to his troojjs before the battle of Ivry. 

truppa innanzi battaglia 

Give my compliments to your little sister and to your aunt. 

Fare saluto (142) (141) 

(It has been) remarked of the Jews, that their obstinacy 

Fu rimarcare Ebreo ostinazione 

increased with their misfortunes.—Cato, surnaraed the censor, 

aumentare sventura. Catone censore 

was distinguished by his ardent love of his country, the 

distinto per (17) 

austerity of his manners, and his inflexible integrity. 

austerità costume inflessibile integrità. 

145. When the noun, preceded by the possessive pronoun, is 

used in a vague and indefinite sense, the article is not required 

before the pronoun. Ex. 

Aspetto con impazienza vostre lettere, I expect impatiently letters from you. 

Per amor mio egli vi consentì, He consented to it for my sake. 

Era suo parere che non vi andas- It was his opinion that we should 

simo, not go. 

146. The possessive pronouns mine, thine, &c., are rendered 

in Italian by il mio, il tuo, &c. ; these pronouns agree in gender 

and number with their antecedent. Ex. 

Ecco il vostro cappello, non prendete 

il mio, 

La sua casa è più grande della 

nostra. 

Conosco i suoi fratelli, ma non i 

vostri, 

Here is your hat, do not take mine. 

His house is larger than ours. 

I know his brothers, but not yours. 

147. When these pronouns accompany the verb essere, the 

article is usually omitted. Ex.

70 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. , 

papers are mine. 

Questi fogli sono miei, 1 These , 

t>i cJd è questa scatola ? È sua, Whose box is this? It is hh. 

Le vostre cugine son mie scolare, Your cousins are I pupils of mine. 

148. The expressions a friend of mine, a sister ofyours, &c., 

are rendered by un mio amico, una vostra sorella, &c, : one of 

my friends, &c., having a more specified meaning, is rendered by 

im dei miei amici, &c. Ex. 

Scrivo in questo momento ad un mio I am writing just now to a friend of 

amico, mine. 

E un mio nemico, He is an enemy of mine. 

Un dei miei amici ha sposato un'ami- One of my friends has married a 

ca vostra, friend of yours. 

Un dei miei servi è ammalato, One of my servants is sick. 

149. When the possessive pronouns are preceded bj' a numeral 

adjective, by a demonstrative or an indeterminate pronoun, with 

the exception of tutto, or when followed by a noun in the vocative, 

the article is omitted. Ex. 

Due rdici condiscepoli sono orai^rofessori 

neir Università, 

Datelo a questo mio amico. 

Ila venduto alcune sue terre, 

Ogni nostra speranza. 

Tutte le vostre ragioni non mi appagano. 

Mio carissimo amico, 

EXERCISE XXXIV. 

Two of my fellow-students are now 

professors in the University. 

Give it to this friend of mine. 

He has sold some of his estates. 

Our every hope. 

All your reasons do not satisfy me. 

My dearest friend. 

The customs of our ancestors were more simple and healthy 

antenato ind. 2 

than ours.—A friend of mine has been appointed Professor of 

(103) (146) (148) iiominare 

Greek, in place of a brother of theirs.—The labour was mine, 

vece travaglio ind. 3 [lAl) 

the glory is his.—All her thoughts are centered 

concentrare 

in her son. 

It is my opinion, and it is vours also.—One of our horses is 

(147) "(146) 'pure. 

so lame, we cannot drive to-day.—I do this for 

zoppo clic [andare in legno) fare lo 

—

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 71 

your sake.— One of my favourite studies is lotany.— I was at 

(145) 2 1 botanica. 

your house tbis morning.—I have seen one of your nieces, and 

" ^ (148) nepote 

have spoken to her.—The ribbons that you have sent to tlie 

nastro 

milliner are mine and not yours.—If you do not find your fan, 

modista (147) ventaglio 

take mine.—Your sister's exercise is better written than ours. 

(146) (110) 

150. In Italian, i\iQ possessive pronouns may be omitted and 

replaced by the article when there can be no doubt of the possessor. 

Ex. 

Egli lia perduto i henl nella rivoluzione, 

Ho male al lìicde, 

Mettete in tasca la lorsa, 

Volgete gli occhi alla cupola, 

He has lost liis property in the revolution. 

My foot pains mo. 

Put your purse in your pocket. 

Turn your eyes towards the dome. 

151. When in English the possessive pronoun precedes a noun, 

indicating mental oìì physical qualities, or any part of the dres? 

or body, if the action expressed by the verb falls on its subject, 

the p)ossessive pronoun is not translated, and the verb is used 

reflectively. Ex. 

Egli si guasta la salute col troppo studiare. 

Egli s'invìgoriscela, mente collo studio 

della filosofia, 

Eglino si bagnarono \ piedi nelfiume, 

Si mise il mantello e uscì, 

152. But when the action of the verb is not directed to its 

siibject, the possessive pronoun is replaced by the conjunctive. 

pronouns in the dative case. Ex. 

II perrucchiere gli taglio i capelli, 

Il chirurgo mi rimise il braccio, 

Le strinsi la mano, 

E in questo modo scdvo loro la vita, 

He ruins Itis health with too much 

study. 

lie strengthens his mind with the 

study of philosophy. 

They bathed their feet in the stream. 

He put on his cloak and went out. 

The hair-dresser cut his hair. 

The surgeon set my arm. 

I pressed her hand. 

And in this way he saved their life.

72 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

EXERCISE XXXV. 

He lost his life in a naval engagement.—Michael Angelo 

perdere (loO) "navale ^battaglia 

having sculptiiretl a sleeping Cupid, (broke off) its arms and 

scolpire dormente Ciqoido ruppe (152) 

hnried the statue ; when it was found, (it was thought) 

sotterrare si credette 

to be a precious relic of Grecian art; but the sculptor 

che fosse reliquia Greco 

soon proved it to be his own work.—I had my purse in my 

hen tosto * 

(147) opera (150) 

pocket when I left yonr house.—He cut my hair too 

[sono uscito di) ^ » (152) p. 

short.—^neas abandoned his wife and saved liis father. 

corto Enea abbandonare (150) 

A brave soldier having lost both his 

salvare 

arms, his colonel offered 

(96) (150) 

colonnello offrire 

(to) him a guinea; "You think, perhaps, that I have lost my 

(123) ghinea sub. 1 

gloves," answered the soldier.— (Take off) your boots.—Do not 

rispose Levare (151) stivcde 

hurt my hand.— (Put on) your coat. 

far male a [152) (61) mettere vestito. 

153. The possessive pronouns il mio, il tuo, &c., are sometimes 

used substantively, and signify, in the singular, one's iwoperty, 

share, &c., and in the plural, one's friends^ relations, supporters, 

party, followers, Szc. 

EfjU ha scialacquato tutto il suo, 

Finche spendete del vostro, 

I nostri si son portati valorosamente, 

Andra a passare Vinverno coi suoi a 

Parigi, 

Quando i nostri avranno tutti votato, 

— 

He has squandered all his fortune. 

As long as you spend your own monei/. 

Our troops conducted themselves 

valiantly. 

. He will go to spend the winter in 

Paris with his relations. 

When our supporters shall all have 

voted. 

154. When h>'s, her^ do not refer to the subject of the vert, or

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. i3 

when there are two nonns of different genders in tlie same pro- 

position, in order to avoid ambiguity, the prononns di lui, of him, 

di lei, of her, replace suo, sua. Ex. 

Ella Jtapreso il dì lui omhreìlo, 

Egli ama sua sorella ed i di hi figli, 

Antonio trovT) il di lei anello in un 

She has taken his umbrella. 

He loves his sister and her sons. 

Anthony found lier ring in a path in 

viale del parco, the park. 

155. The relation expressed by the possessive pronouns is 

sometimes conveyed in Italian by means of the conjunctive pro- 

nouns in the dative case. Ex. 

E(]U mi e fratello, instead of, Egli è 

mìo fratello, 

Io non gli sono amico, instead of, Io 

non sono suo amico, 

10 le son figlia, instead of, Io son sua 

figlia, 

156. One^s own is rendered hy iiroprio ; but if own is added 

to one of the possessive pronouns, my, thy, &c., it may be trans- 

lated with the possessive pronoun, or alone. Ex. 

11 confessare i propri /aHt è il ijrlmo 

passo verso Vemenda, 

Llio vedxdo coi miei propri, or, coi 

propri occhi. 

Me lo porse colle sue proprie, or, colle 

sue mani, 

EXERCISE XXXVI. 

He is my brother. 

I am not his friend. 

I am her daughter. 

To confess one's own fiiiills is the 

first step towards amendment. 

I have seen him with my own eyes. 

He gave it to me with his own hands. 

He is charitable to (every one) except to his family. 

— 

caritatevole verso tutti verso (153) 

(They endeavoured) to persuade me not to claim my own. 

I 

S'ingegnarono 

know her by sight, but am not a 

ripetere (153) 

friend of hers.—The 

conosco (123) di vista (148) 

historian Suetonius relates, that almost all Caesar's assassins 

storico Svetonio narrare quasi 

killed themselves with their own hand.—We arc seldom 

uccisero (134) di (156) raramente 

conscious of our own defects.—I have spent Christmas with 

consapevole (156) difetto passare Natale

74 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

my family.—She lent mc liis seal.—He gave her liis purse to 

(153) {\5i) sigillo diede 

reward her honesty.—He is my brother, and has married 

ricompensare [lò-ì) sposare 

her sister-in-law.—Their sailors are always beaten by ours. 

(154) cognato marinaro 

The games ended, she distributed the prizes and crowns with 

terminare premio 

her own hand.—Remember that he is your relation. 

(156) ref. (155) parente. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

157. Questo, this; cotesto, quello,

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 75 

words beginning with a consonant. The formation of the feminine 

is resfular. Ex. 

Quel giardino, e queIl'o?"fó ajipartengono 

a quei/ra^/, 

Quello scudo, e quegli scJnopjn sono 

anticJiissimi, 

Comprammo quelle ciriege e quelle 

olive dalfrutlaiolo, 

That garden and tliat orchard belong 

to those monks. 

That shield and those guns are very 

ancient. 

We bought those cherries and those 

olives at the fruiterer's. 

161, These adjectives are generally repeated before each 

noun. Ex. 

Queste tazze, e questi piattini sono 

scompagnati, 

Questi bicchieri, e questi hicchierini 

sono di cristallo di Boemia, 

These cups and saucers do not 

match. 

These tumblers and wine-glasses are 

of- Bohemian glass. 

162. Questi^ cotesti, quegli, are used often in the nominative 

singular to express this man, that man, this one, that one; in 

reference to things, this one, that one, are rendered by questo, cotesto, 

quello. Ex. 

Questi fu felice, quegli or cotesti 

sfortunato, 

Interrogandolo cJd è questi, 

Quale volete di questi mazzolini, 

questo quello ? 

This man was fortunate, that one 

unfortunate. 

Asking liim, who is this man ? 

AVliich of these two bouquets will 

you have, this one or that one ? 

163. The former, the latter, may be expressed by quello, 

questo, with reference mostly to inanimate things ; in speaking 

of persons, quegli, questi may be used, but only as masculine nominatives 

in the singular. Ex. 

Un clima freddo e asciutto è più 

salubre di un clima caldo; quello 

invigorisce, mentre questo infievo- 

lisce, 

lìacine e Corneille hanno rappresentato 

gli uomini, quegli quali essi 

sono, questi qucdi dovrebbero es- 

sere, 

EXERCISE XXXVII. 

A cold and dry climate is more 

healthy than a warm one ; the 

former invigorates, while the latter 

weakens. 

Racine and Comeille have represented 

men, the former as they 

are, the latter as they should be. 

That brevity which weakens the vigour of a narration. Is 

brevità che [indebolisce) narrazione 

a defect of style.—The models of these statues were Roman 

stile ind. 2

7C DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

peasants.—That spendthrift lias ruined his family and that 

contadino scialacquatore rovinare (160) 

poor tradesman.—When Crossus showed (to) Solon his vast 

bottegaio mostrare Solone 

treasures, the latter said, Sire, if another comes with better iron 

(163) disse alcuno viene (1^8) 

than yours, he will be master of this gold.—This fiction 

(103) padrone favola 

teaches us that honesty is the best policy.—We did not 

insegnare (123) 2)robità [120)politica 

know this morning that we should sec you this evening. 

sapere (158*) (âvremmo veduto) 

—I can not distinguish the bones of your father from those of 

posso distinguere 

his slaves, said Diogenes to Alexander, as the latter asked (to) 

schiavo mentre (163) 

the philosoiìher what he saw ina heap of bones.—I have 

fdusofo [ciò che riguardasse) mucchio 

bought two shawls, this one is for you and that one is for me. 

scialle (162) 

That pride, bigotry, and idleness, which characterize 

[ì&Qì) orgoglio {l&\.)higotteria pigrizia che caratterizzare 

fools. —We are body and soul, the former should obey, the 

stolto (163) dovrebbe 

latter command.—Those knives, forks, and spoons. 

(159) coltello (161) forchetta cucchiaio 

Costui, this man. 

Costei, this woman. 

Costoro, these men, these women. 

Colui, that man. 

Colei, that woman. 

Coloro, those men, those women. 

164. The above pronouns are always used absolutely^ that is, 

without reference to an antecedent ; they are used in a familiar 

style, and sometimes express contempt, when they correspond to 

—

the English word fellow, loretch 

Ex. 

Elettra—Io serbo, Oreste, ancora 

Quel ferro io serbo, che al marito 

in petto Vibri) colei, cui non osiam 

2nù madre Nomar dajipoi. Al- 

fieri. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 77 

they always refer to pcìsons. 

Electra—I stili keep that dagger, 

Orestes, which the woman, whom 

we dare uo longer call our mother, 

plunged into the breast of her con- 

sort, 

Here Electra makes use of the word colei, in speaking with horror 

of ber mother, by whom her father had been killed. 

Che farem noi, diceva l'uno aW al- What shall we do with this fellow ? 

tro di costui ? 

Non seguitar l'esempio di costei, 

said one to the other. 

Do not follow that woman's 

ample.ex- 

Coloro sono appunto usciti di prigione, 

Those fellows are just out of prison. 

Colui mi disse che non era ricco, That man told that he was not 

rich. 

165. These pronouns, followed hy the relatives che or il quale^ 

express the man who, the woman who, he who, she who, those who, 

&c., with no reference to an antecedent. Ex. 

Colui che veramente ama la virtù la 

pratica, 

Colei che lascio i comodi di una vita 

agiata, per andare negli ospedali 

dell' Oriente, ad assistere i malati, 

ed i feriti. 

Coloro che offendono, raramente perdonano 

a coloro che essi hanno 

He who really loves virtue practises 

it. 

She who left the comforts of home, 

to attend the sick and wounded, in 

the hospitals of the East. 

Those who offend, rarely forgive 

those they injure. 

166. He ivho, she ivho, those ivho, that ivhich, those which, used 

in reference to an antecedent, are expressed hy quello che, quelli 

che, quella che, quelle che, according to the preceding noun. 

Ex. 

Tutti i soldati ricevettero una medaglia, 

quelli che si distinsero ri- 

cevettero una croce, 

Il tappeto che vi mostrai, è quello 

che abbiamo portato di Turchia, 

EXERCISE XXXVIII. 

Ali the soldiers received a medal, 

those who distinguished themselves 

received a cross. 

The carpet I showed you is that 

which we brought from Turkey. 

That man has chosen a wife with his eyes, hut not with his 

(164) scelto (150)

78 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 

reason.—Fortune often pursues those who do not seek 

{corre dietro a) 

the capricious goddess.—He who is too 

(165) 

proud to 

cercare 

work 

is often obliged to 

(165) 

bog.—The man 

orgoglioso per lavorare 

who assassinated Henry 

a mendicare (165) 

the Third, King of France, was a monk, by name James 

ind. 2 frate di 

Clement.— 

" (How is it) that this fellow, who is a 

Giacomo 

fool, is 

Donde avviene (164) saocco sub. 1 

liked by every one, and you are not ? " a prince asked (to) 

grata a tutti {non lo siate) 

Dante ; the poet replied, " Those who resemble (one another) 

(165) somigliare si 

like one another."—Common sense is that which we most 

amare 2 i (igc) ^j/ii 

rarely meet.—That man is a bore.—That which pleases (to) 

incontrare (164) seccatore 

the eyes is not always beautiful.—Those who believe themselves 

(57) (165) (134) 

happy are so.—True taste is that which leads the mind to 

lo gusto (166) conduce 

understand and appreciate that which is beautiful.—These little 

apprezzare (161) 

girls are very clever, particularly she who repeated the 

(100) ragazza (166) 

hymns. 

inno. 

167. That which, what, when not referring to any ante- 

cedent noun, are rendered by ciò che, quel che^ or quello che. Ex. 

Ciò die è superfluo spesso costa più 

di quello clie è necessario, 

Ciò che mi dite non, mi sorprende, 

That whicli is superfluous often costi 

more than that which is necessary. 

What you tell me does not surprise 

me. 

168. That, this, so, when referring to an anterior sentence, 

are translated by ciò, which is never joined to a noun. Ex.

Di ciò parleremo a miglior comodo, 

Kon mi ricordo di aver mai detto ciò 

Ciò non sta lene, 

DEMoNSTPwVTIVE PRON'OUXS. 79 

169. All, all that, all wiucii, may Le expressed by tiilto 

ciò che, tutto quello che, or quanto. Ex. 

Tutto ciò che risplende non è oro, 

Dissi quanto seppi onde distorlo dal 

stto proponimento, 

Io faro tutto ciò che, tutto quel che 

or quanto dipenderà da me, 

'\^''e shall speak of tliis at a more 

convfuieiit time. 

I do Dot remember liaving ever said 

that. 

That is not well. 

170. All those, all those which, are expressed by quanti, 

tutti quelli che. Ex. 

Di quanti ho sentiti parlare, nessuno 

mi piace. 

Tutti quelli che, or (\\\m\ì\ predicano 

il vancjelo dovrebbero seguirne i 

precetti, 

All that glitters is not gold. 

I said all that 1 could to dissuade 

him from his intention. 

I will do all that depends on nie. 

Of all those I have heard speak, not 

one pleases me. 

All those that preach the gospel 

should follow its precepts. 

171. Which, used in reference to a clause of a precedine 

phrase, is expressed by il che. Ex. 

Egli parti senza congedarsi, il che ci 

sorprese tutti. 

Quando ritorneranno in Italia, il 

che spero sarà fra poco, utilizzeranno 

a pro della patria, gli 

ammaestramenti dell'esilio. 

EXERCISE XXXIX. 

He left without taking leave, which 

surjirised us all. 

When they return to Italy, which I 

hope shall be soon, they will employ 

in the service of their country 

the experience gained in exile. 

Modesty is to merit what shadows are to the figures of a 

(25) merito [1^1) ombra in 

painting.—Let ns not speak (of that) (any more.)— PLato says 

quadro 2 (168) ^pm Platone 

that knowledge is what perfects man, but witliont religion 

sajjienzcc (167) perfezionare 

knowledge cannot do so.—Men first invent that which is 

[non può) (1G7) 

necessary, then that which is comfortable, and, finally, all that 

quindi comodo finalmente (109)

80 RELATIVE PE0N0UN3. 

is superfluous and luxurious.—From that we may conclude, 

superfluo dilusso [168) possiamo concludere 

that virtue leads to happiness.—Homer informs us, that in 

conduce Omero informare a 

his time husbands gave a dowry to their wives, whicli, says 

la dote (58) (171) 

Tacitus, the ancient Germans (used to do) (also).—The policy 

Tacito -costumare ^pure politica 

of a sovereign is to preserve what he has, and to usurp what 

sovrano conservare (167) usurpare 

he has not.—That which changes easily has no character. 

(167) 

cambiare facilmente 

True eloquence is that which springs from the heart, and is 

eloquenza (166) nascere 

enriched by the imagination.—The highest courage is that 

arricchire immarjinazione (121) 

which is tempered by prudence and humanity. 

temperare 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS, 

Chi, Who. 

NoM. Chi, who. 

Gen. Di chi, of whom, whose. 

Dat. a chi, to whom. 

Ace. Chi, whom. 

Abl. Da chi, from whom. 

172. The pronoun who, when used without reference to any 

antecedent, is rendered in Italian by chi, which is invariable, and 

serves for both genders and numbers. Ex. 

Xon indovinereste mai chi è stato 

eletto, 

Mi disse chi erano i suoi scolari 

prediletti, 

Mi- ha confessato chi è la sua bene- 

fattrice, 

Non posso scoprire chi sono le signore 

che lo proteggono, 

Da chi avete avuto queda notizia, ed 

a chi Vavete ripetuta ? 

— 

You could never guess who has been 

elected. 

He told me wlio were his favourite 

pupils. 

He has acknowledged to me who his 

benefactress is. 

1 cannot discover who the ladies are 

that protect him. 

From whom have you heard this 

news, and to whom have you repeated 

it ?

REr.ATIVF, PRONOUNS. 81 

173, Chi may also be used to express luhoever, whichever, the 

man who, he ivho, she who, those tvho, some one ivho, when em- 

ployed in a vague sense, and without reference to a noun expressed 

before. Ex. 

Chi ci ama ci dice i nostri difetti, 

perciò diffidatevi di chi vi adula 

continuamente, 

Chi vi ha detto ciò si burlava di voi, 

Troverete chi vi additerà il cammino, 

Those wlio love us tell us our defects, 

therefore distrust those who flatter 

you continually. 

Whoever has told you that was 

jesting with you. 

You will find some one who will 

show you the waj'. 

174. The interrogative pronoun who is rendered by chi, and 

can only refer to persons or things persoiiified. 

Chi è l'autore di questo saggio ? 

Chi è la vostra modista? 

Chi sono coloro che fecero fiasco nella 

nuova opera ? 

Di chi sono questi baidi? 

Da chi è stata scoperta VAmerica ? 

Ex. 

Who is the author of this essay ? 

Who is your milliner ? 

Who are they who failed in the new 

opera ? 

Whose trunks are these ? 

By whom has America been discovered 

? 

175. Chi requires the verb to which it is subject to be in the 

singula?^, essere excepted. Ex. 

Chi sono ipiùfamosioratori dell'an- 

tichità Ì 

Chi vince le proprie passioni, è degpo 

ddValtrui rispetto, 

Chi semina raccoglie, 

Who are the most famous orators of 

antiquity ? 

Those who conquer their own passions, 

deserve the respect of others. 

Those who sow reap. 

176. Some. ..OTHERS, used as distributive pronouns, may be 

rendered by chi... chi. Ex. 

Chi si occupa al commercio, chi alle 

belle arti, chi siegue una profes- 

sione, chi un altra. 

EXERCISE XL. 

Some are engaged in commerce, 

some in the line arts, some follow 

one profession, some another. 

Those who follow blindly their own passions, are not fit 

(173) (175) ciecamente (156) atto 

to lead others.— "Who has sent (to) you those beautiful 

(a condurre gli altri) (174) (123) (159) (79) 

flowers?—Who has greater pride and less humanity than a 

(172) (108*) (103)

82 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

fortunate fool ?—The man who fears the least to err, is 

^ 

Sfortunato 

generally he who 

(1^3) (HO) errare 

knows the least of virtue.—Whoever does 

(165) conoscere 

* 

(173) 

good for the love of virtue, seeks neither praise nor 

bene [non) cercare 

reward.—Whose fault is it ?—Who were 

ne nò 

the first reformers ? 

ricompensa. colpa (l'^5) ind. 3 riformatore 

—(To) some like one author, (to) some another ; some praise, 

[11 Q)) piacere un altro 

some blame the same work.—Whichever of you will come 

biasimare opera. (173) vuol 

•with me may (get ready.)—To whom have you told it ?—Who 

può allestirsi (126) 

enjoys sleep without first having endured fatigue ? Who relishes 

sonno inf. patire gustare 

food without having felt hunger ?—Whose children are those ? 

cibo inf. sqfrire 

—Whoever has told you this, has 

^ * 

misinformed 

« s^jgo) 

you.—Who does 

(173) (168) mal informare 

not admire the classical severity and simplicity of Alfieri's 

ammirare classico 

tragedies ?—Those who sow oppression and tyranny, will inevitragedia 

(173) 

tably reap discontent, hatred, and rebellion. 

scontento odio 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Che, Quale, 

singular. 

NoM. Che^ il quale., who, which, that. 

Gen. Bi cui, del quale, of whom, of which. 

Dat. a cui, cui, al quale, to whom, to which. 

Ace. Che, cui, il quale, whom, which, that. 

Abl. Da cui, dal quale, from or by whom or which.

RELATIVE TRONOUNS. 83 

PLURAL. 

NoM. Che, i quali, wLo, which, that. 

Gen. Di cui, de quali, of whom, of which. 

Dat. a cui, cui, a! quali, to whom, to which. 

Ace. Che, cui, i quali, whom, which, that. 

Abl. Da cui, da' quali, from or by whom or which. 

177. When these pronouns refer to an antecedent expressed, 

they are rendered in Italian by che or il quale. Che serves for 

both genders and numbers, a-nd is employed without the article ; 

quale requires the article, and agrees with the noun to which it 

relates. Ex. 

Uuomo che or il quale valuta più 

le ricchezze che la scienza, e simile 

allo stolto, che or il quale getta via 

la noce e conserva il guscio, 

Ill maestro di cui or del quale vi ho 

jmrlato, 

Lc farfalle che or le quali avete acchiappate. 

L'uomo e il solo animale che or il 

quale conosca il bene, e che or il 

quale segua il male. 

Il paese in cui or nel quale dimoriamo, 

The man who values wealth more 

than knowledge, is Hke a fool, who 

throws away the nut and keeps 

the shell. 

The master of whom I have spoken 

to you. 

The butterflies that you have caught. 

Man is the only animal who knows 

what is right, and who does what 

is wrong. 

The country in which we live. 

178. Che, referring to an antecedent, can only be used in the 

nominative and accusative ; the other cases of this pronoun are 

formed with cui, accompanied by prepositions ; 

some cases be omitted. Ex. 

L'uomo di c\np)arlate, ed a cui aììete 

dato vostra figlia, è mio amico, 

Il fiume da cui il prato è irrigato, 

the latter may in 

The man of whom you speak, and 

to whom you have given your 

daughter, is my friend. 

The river by which the field is 

watered. 

179. Cui, as well as che, may be used in the accusative; when 

there is ambiguity between the subject and the object of the 

phrase, cui, which can never be the subject, should be used, and 

not che. Ex. 

Luomo cui uccise vostro fratello. 

Conosco il ministro cui lodo vostro 

padre, 

The man whom your brother killed. 

I know the minister whom yonr 

father praised.

84 REr-ATIVE PRONOUNS. 

180, When cui translates wJiose, it is generally placed between 

the article and the noun, and no preposition is required. Ex. 

L'eroe le cui gesta hanno fatto maravigliare 

il mondo, 

Il chimico alle cui scoperte la scienza 

va tanto debitrice, 

La regina il cui nome non sarà mai 

dimenticato, ed il cui regno fu sì 

glorioso. 

The hero whose deeds have astonished 

the world. 

The chemist to whose discoveries 

science owes so much. 

The queen whose name shall never 

be forgotten, and whose reign was 

so glorious. 

181. When the pronoun relates to one of two nouns of different 

gender or number, quale, preceded by the definite article, must 

be used, and not che, in order that it may be clearly understood 

to which noun the pronoun refers. Ex. 

II progresso della scienza, la quale 

ci ha svelato tanti segreti della 

natura, 

L'amore della patria, il quale Vesule 

non può cancellare dal cuore. 

EXERCISE XLI. 

The progress of science, which has 

revealed to us so many secrets of 

nature. 

The love of country, which exile cannot 

eradicate from the heart. 

Voltaire used to say, I have three kinds of friends; 

solere ind. 2 * 

(48) specie 

the friends who love me, those to whom I am indifferent, and 

{111) amare (160) 

those by whom I am detested.—In all countries, says Ugo 

detestare tutto art. 

Foscolo, I have seen two kinds of men, the few who command, 

comandare 

and the generality who serve.—Persons who speak much, or who 

generalità persona o 

always laugh, are tiresome companions.—The historian relates 

ridere noioso compagno. storico narrare 

things which have happened, the poet imagines things which 

essere avvenuto immaginare 

may happen.— Humility is a virtue without which all 

[possono) accadere. art. 

other virtues perish, and by which men learn to know themaltro 

[periscono) a conoscere

IIKLATIVE PRONOUNS 85 

selves.—The Christian religion, whose origin is divine.— 

2 1 

(180) 

divino. {37} 

Spartan was reprimanded for having used three words on 

Spartano rimproverare inf. impiegare in 

an occasion in which two would have sufficed.—The hero whom 

England honours.—The 

[sarebbero bastate.) 

watch-key that 

eroe (179) 

you bought on 

Saturday. 

onorare. oriolo (4) chiave (181) ind. 3 (93) 

182. Quale and che are also used as interrogative pronouns ; 

quale means ichich of two or many, and requires no article ; 

A 

che, 

or che cosa only means what. Ex. 

Quali sono i cavalli che correranno il 

palio ? 

Which horses are to run the race ? 

Quale preferite di questi due quadri ? ^Vliich of 

prefer? 

two pictures do you 

Che opera hanno dato ieri sera al Wliat opera did they perfonn last 

teatro ? 

Che or che cosa faremo ? 

night at the theatre ? 

What shall we do ? 

183. The exclamations what ! ivhat a ! are translated by che 

or quale, without the article. Ex. 

Che sventura e per gli uomini la 1 A^liat 

nascita di un eroe ! is for mankind ! 

Quale incantevole colpo d'occhio ! What a channing view ! 

Che belfiore! I What a beautiful flower ! 

a misfortune the birth of a hero 

184. Quale may be used to render some.. .some used distributively. 

Ex. 

Erano in uno stato dafarpietà, quale 

cogli àbiti stracciati, quale colla 

testa rotta grondante sangue, 

Quale potava, quale legava le viti, 

They were in a pitiable condition, 

some with their clothes torn, some 

with their headsbroken, and streaming 

with blood. 

Some were pruning, some were tying 

up the vines. 

185. Quale is often used to translate such as, as, instead of 

(ale"-quale, tale being understood. Ex. 

&pe>-o che lo troverete quale ve Ilio I hope you will find it such as I have 

descritto, 

La vera filosofia consiste nel vedere le 

described it to you. 

True philosophy consists in seeing 

cose quali sono. 

things as they are. 

* Such a is translated by un tale, as, such ai sfortune, una tale sventura; 

«such a man, un tal uomo.

86 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

186. Onde is often used in poetry, or in an elevated style, in 

place of di cui, del quale, &c., to render of which, tuith which, 

&c. ; in prose, onde translates in order to, in order that. Ex. 

Di quei sospiri ond' jo nutriva il cuore, 

P. 

Un regnoôni'io la corona atfevdo, B. 

Onde salvar la patria, Bruto si finse 

pazzo, 

EXERCISE XLII. 

Of those sighs with which I fed my 

heart. 

A kingdom whose crown I expect. 

In order to save his country, Brutus 

feigned madness. 

Fontenelle said at liis deatb, It was time I should die, for 

[disse al punto di) che dovessi poiché 

I was beginning to see things such as they are.—What a 

* ind. 2 a (185) (183) 

pity (that) we have not a telescope, in order that we might 

peccato cannocchicde (186) * * 

see those vessels.—What a happiness to have sncli a brother. 

inl{l&0)lastimento (183) felicità (185*) 

—What a divine spectacle religion offers, when Christians forspettacolo 

^ 'ôffrire ab- 

sake (everything) iu order to carry truth to the Heathen. 

handonare tutto portare Pagano 

—What a noise those children make !—Which do you prefer 

chiasso 2 3 Sfanno (182) preferire 

of these desks ?—I tell you this in order to show you 

(56) leggìo dico mostrare 

what powerful enemies you have.—What can be more sublime 

(182) potente (182) pwò 

than great genius united to great modesty ?—Historians repre- 

(80) genio modestia rajjpresent 

men such as they are, poets depict them such as they 

sentare (185) dipingere 

should be.— Conscience is the voice of the soul, the passions 

{dovrebbero) coscienza voce 

that of the body ; to which voice should we listen ? 

corpo * (182) dovremmo ascoltare

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 87 

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 

187. Tutto, all, the whole, used adjectively, is always followed 

in Italian by the definite article, and agrees with the noun 

it refers to. Ex. 

La storia di tutti i costumi di tutte 

le nazioni. 

Tutto il paese lo piange, 

Tutta ]a flotta fu dispersa, 

The history of all the customs of al 

nations. 

The whole country regrets him. 

The whole fleet was dispersed. 

188. When all is used as an indefinite pronoun, it is translated 

by tutti, unaccompanied by the article. Ex. 

Tutti volevano comandare, e niuno I 

AH wished to command, and nobody 

voleva ubbidij-e, would obey. 

All did their duty. 

Tutti/eeero il loro dovere, I 

189. II tutto* is used substantively to signify the whole ; tutto 

without the article means everything, all. Ex. 

Qui tutto è a buon mercato, 

Neppure il tutto lo contento, 

Hanno confessato tutto, 

Noi slam del tutto hagnati, 

IlcoccJiiere tutto furioso risicose. 

Il nemico non fu del tutto vinto, 

Here everything is cheap. 

He was not even content with the 

whole. 

They have confessed all. 

190. Tutto, and more generally del tutto, are used adverbially 

to signify quite, completely. Ex. 

We are quite wet. 

The coachman quite angrily replied. 

The enemy was not completely vanquished. 

Observe— Tutto quanto, tutti quanti, &c., may also be used to 

translate all. Ex. 

Tutte quante penrono, I 

a avrebbero derubati tutti quanti, | 

All perished. 

They would have robbed us all. 

191. Before a numeral adjective preceded by tutto, the particle 

e is placed. Ex. 

* Observe— Tlie iclwle used adjectively, is expressed by tutto followed by 

the article, but taken substantively, tlie wJwle is rendered by il tutto, tho 

Jirticle preceding tutto.

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 

die andate voi cercando a quest'ora 

tutti e tre ? B. 

Tutti e quattro venfjon chiamati (jli 

Evangelisti, 

EXERCISE XLIII. 

What are you all three looking for at 

this hour ? 

All four are called the Evangelists. 

A flatterer, of all domestic enemies, is the worst.—The 

adulatore {1S7) ^domestico i 

(120) 

hail has destroyed all the fruit and all the flowers in our 

grandine guastare (60^) 

garden.—If you cannot give me the whole, give me the half. 

non potete (124) (189) (78) 

—The eloquence of the orator moved the whole nation. 

eloquenza oratore [commosse) (187) 

Courts in all ages, and in all countries, lead the fashions, 

Corte età {introducono) vioda 

so that all the ridicule must fall on them, and not on their servile 

così ridicolo deve su 

imitators.—Their education was quite neglected.—All virtuous 

imitatore (190) trascurare ^ 

affections, (such as) love, hope, joy, pity, add to 

âffezione come gioia pietà aumentare * 

beatity, whilst all the bad passions deform the 

bellezza mentre che [contraffanno) 

countenance, and rob it of allits charm.—All three have 

fisonomia privare (126) vezzo p. (191) 

confessed their crimes, and they have all been condemned to 

delitto (188) 

death.—The laws of Nature are immutable, and the same for 

legge stesso per 

all people.— It is a great sign of folly to laugh at 

everything. 

(189) 

p. segtio follia (34) ridere di 

192, Ogni, every, each, is of both genders, and can only be 

used in the singular ; it takes no article. Ex. 

—


begets every evil. 

I 

La guerra produce ogni male, I 

Ogni scienza ha i suoi principii, ed 

War 

Every science lias its principles, and 

ogni età i suoi divertimenti, every age its enjoyments. 

193. Ogni is used adverbially in some locutions, as ogni dove, 

per ogni dove, in ogni luogo, everywhere, wherever. Ex. 

In ogni luogo s incontrano viaggia- 

tori Inglesi, 

Chiaro mi fu allor come ogni dove 

lu cielo è Paradiso, D. 

English travellers are met everywhere. 

It was then clear to me, that everywhere 

in heaven Paradise exists. 

194. Ognuno, ciascuno, ciascheduno, every one, each. 

Ognuno is only used in the singular, with or without reference to 

an antecedent, but always as a pronoun ; it conveys a collective 

sense, while ciascuno, ciascheduno, are used both as pronouns 

and adjectively, and imply a distributive idea. Ex. 

Ognuno appellerebbe colui un tiranno, 

Ciascun paese ha i suoi costumi, 

Ciascheduno dinoi ha dei doveri da 

adempiere, 

Every one would call that man a 

tyrant. 

Each country has its customs. 

Each of us has duties to perform. 

195. The expressions each other, one another, are rendered by 

Vun l'altro. Ex. 

Si assistono Tun l'altro, 

Sparlano I'un dell'altro, 

Nonfuron mai veduti I'un dall'altro 

divisi. 

EXERCISE XLIV. 

They assist each other. 

They speak ill of one another. 

They were never seen separated 

from each other. 

In every age great men have protected literary men and 

secolo grande "' 

{protetto) letterato 

encouraged arts.—Every century, every generation, and every 

incoraggiare arte. (192) secolo generazione 

country, is remarkable for some useful discovery.—The customs 

rimarchevole utile scoperta. 

of each country differ, and every one of good sense should 

differiscono (194) {dovrebbe 

conform, as much as possible, to the usages of the country in 

conformarsi per quanto è) 

uso 

which one dwells.—Every obstacle may be overcome with per- 

(177) dimorare. può superare 

a 

"

90 ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 

Beveivance. — Every good citizen should willingly sacri- 

(82) cittadino dovrelbe di buon animo sacri- 

fico liis life in defence of his country.—Wherever we turn 

ficare {150) difesa (193) {ci voltiamo) 

we see beautiful and picturesque views. The Ota- 

— 

prospettiva. {Gli abitanti 

heitans cat separated from one another, and each maintains 

d'Otaiti) separare (195) {Idi) {maìitiene) 

profound silence during meals.—Every truth may be told 

profondo silenzio durante pasto. può narrare 

under the disguise of an allegory. 

sotto velo allegoria. 

196. Altro, other used adjectivehj^ ;igrees with the .^ noun to 

which it relates. Ex. 

llfi(jUo non ehhe altra eredità tranne 

la spada del padre, 

Dovete convincermi con altri argomenti, 

C'ji'altra sorpresa vi attende, 

Altro speranze ed altre cure, 

Tlic son liaJ no otlier inheritance 

than the sword of his father. 

You must convince me with other 

arguments. 

Another surprise awaits you. 

Other hopes and other cares. 

197. When used substantively, altro is masculine singular, 

and means something else., another thing ; accompanied by the 

negation, it expresses nothing else. Ex. 

Altro è il parlar di morte, altro è il 

morire, 

Non avete altro da dirmi? 

Parliamo tZ'altro, 

It is one tiling to speak of death, 

but another to die. 

Have you nothing else to toll me ? 

Let us speak of something else. 

198. The indefinite pronouns another^ others, are expressed by 

un altro, altri. Ex. 

Un altro sarebbe stato scoraggiato i Another 

dalla risposta, 

would have been discour- 

aged by the answer. 

Altri colsero la gloria delle sue sco- Others reaped the glory of his dis- 

pei'te, I 

coveries. 

199. Altri... ALTRI, gli uni. ..gli altri, may be used in a 

distributive sense, and signify soyne... others. Ex. 

pensatori e meno parowi, 

are more lively than lie, others 

greater thinkers iiiniKerH and auu less prosy. 

were ploughing some were 

varai, sowing. 

Altri soìio di lui jnìi vivaci, altri jnù \ Some 

pensatori e meno parolni, | 

Gli uni aravano, gli altri semina- \ Some

0\ INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 91 

200. Altki is sometimes used in the nominative singular for 

qualcun altro, and means some or ani/, one else, amj other man. 

In a familiar style, altri is sometimes joined to noi, voi ; as, noi 

altri, voi altri, we, you. Ex. 

Noi altri Scozzesi riflettiamo prima 

dì parlare, 

Voi altri fanciulli potete andare a 

ruzzare, 

Ne voi ne altri mi persuaderete a 

partire, 

We Scotch reflect before we sjicak. 

You children may go and play. 

Neither you nor any one else wil 

persuade me to leave. 

201. Altrui, others, is only used as the complement, never as 

the nominative of a verb ; it may either precede or follow the 

noun to which it relates, and be declined with or without the 

prepositions o/and to. Altrui only refers to persons, and, pre- 

ceded by the definite article, means the property of others. Ex. 

Critico severamente i difetti altrui 

or d'altrui, 

L'altTuigloria or la gloria viìtnn non 

deve renderci invidiosi, ma stimolarci 

ad acquistarne noi pure, 

Chi desidera l'altrui si rende moralmente 

reo difurto, 

EXERCISE XLV. 

He criticised severely the defects of 

others. 

The glory of others should not make 

us jealous, but stimulate us to acquire 

the same. 

AVlioevercovets others' property, becomes 

morally guilty of theft. 

Let us do to others as we would have others do to us. 

Correct 

(198) (ciò che vorremmo che) facessero (122) 

your own faults, and let others correct theirs.— 

Correggere difetto lasciare 

long procession of ants ; some (were setting out,) others 

formica (199) partire ind. 2 

returning, all active and industrious.—Other people's opinions 

ind. 2 (201) 

are not always to be adopted.—Charity rejoices at the good for- 

[da seguirsi.) godere di 

tune of others.—We had nothing else to do.—'He left the other 

(201) (197) da 

half of his fortune to his other nephews.—Have they brought 

— A 

(78) ^ 1 

anything else with them ?—The other citizens envied his suc- 

(197)

92 ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND rRONOHNS. 

cess.—We should respect tlie opinions of others, however incor- 

{Dohbiamo) (201) per quanto er- 

rect they (may seem) to us.—To covet the property of 

roneo sembrare sub. 1 

others is the first step towards dishonesty.—You children may 

(201) passo verso disonestà. (200) potete 

now go and play. 

(9) divertirvi. 

202. Veruno, niuno, nessuno, no one, nobody, noperson, no, 

none. When these pronouns precede the verb, they require no 

negative, but when placed after, the verb must be preceded by 

nan. Ex. 

Non v'è nessuno in casa. 

Ninna (jloria è ad aquila aver vinta 

una colomba, B. 

Nessuno è profeta nel lìroprìo paese, 

There is no one at home. 

It is no triumph for an eagle to 

vanquish a dove. 

No one is a prophet in his own 

country. 

203. Niente, nulla, nothing. A verb followed by these 

words must be preceded by non, but when they come before the 

verb, the nee:ative is omitted. Ex. 

Non ne so nulla, 

Nulla mi disse. 

Purea che nulla si potesse far di 

meglio, 

Clii non azzarda nulla, niente gua- 

I know nothing of it. 

He said nothing to me. 

It seemed that nothing could be 

better done. 

Those who risk nothing, gain nothing. 

204. Niente and nidla are often used with the signification of 

something, anything, when the verb, which in this case they 

always /oZ/ow, is not preceded by non. Ex. 

you want anything from me ? 

i Volete nulla or niente da me ? 

Se io 2}Osso far niiWa per voi, coman- 

Do 

If I can do anything for you, let me 

datemi, I know. 

205. Nothing may also be rendered by che or cosa, accom- 

panied by non, which precedes the verb. Ex. 

I pigìi non lianno mai che fare, Idle people have never anything to 

do. 

Non w'è cosa peggiore che un falso There is nothing worse than a false 

amico, 

friend.


206. Nulla and niente sometimes take an article. Ex. 

Egli è rientrato noi nulla donde è 

sortito, 

Solo Iddio piCò dal niente creare 

qualcosa, 

EXERCISE XLVI. 

He lias returned to the insignificance 

from whicli he rose. 

There is only God who can creato 

something out of nothing. 

An artist who was criticising a painting wliicli repreartisla 

* criticare ind. 2 quadro (177) 

sented Marriage, remarked, " Nothing is more difficult to make 

matrimonio (203) [a farsi) 

than a good marriage, even in a picture."—The best society is 

(103) inire 

that in which no one seeks to shine, and all are pleased.— 

(202) cercare brillare (188) contento. 

The Eomans placed the temple of honour beside the temple 

(posero) tempio accanto a 

of virtue, because, said they, no one ever arrives at the first 

ind. 2. (202) 'mai 

' 

without passing through the second.—Nothing is more dangerous 

inf. per (203) pericoloso 

than constant adulation ; no one can escape its corrupting 

(202) può sfuggire corrompente 

influence.—God created the earth from nothing.—Nothing 

ind, 3. (206) 

dries more quickly than tears.—Those who never 

asciugare prontamente lagrima. (165) ^noìi ^mai 

observe anything, learn nothing.—Do you wish anything 

'ôsservare (204) imparare (203) desiderare (204) 

from town? — "We may have arms against arrogance, 

di (Possiamo) arme contro (25) arroganza 

against calumny, against insult, but none against ridicule, from 

calunnia insulto (202) ridicolo 

which no virtue is safe. 

(177) (202) sicuro. 

Qualche, alcuno, some, any. (8ee § 43.)

94 ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 

207. Alcuno, alcuni, qualcuno, qualcheduno, are 

substantively in the sense of some one, some persons. Ex. 

Qualcuno hussa alia porta, 

Se qualcheduno verrà a cercarmi, 

ditegli d'attendermi, 

Alcuni sopportano più pazientemente 

grandi sventure, che insignificanti 

cure, 

Non conosco alcuno in Irlanda, 

Some one knocks at the door. 

If some one calls for me, tell him to 

wait. 

Some bear more patiently great misfortunes 

than trifling cares. 

I know nobody in Ireland. 

208. TVlien some., any., are not followed by the noun to which 

they refer, they are translated by the relative pronoun ne. Ex. 

are some dates, take some. I 

1 Here Ecco dei datteri prendetene. Ne ho 

presi, grazie, have taken some, thank you. 

Non ho spille, bisogna che ne compri, I have no pins, I must buy some. 

\ 

209. Ambo, entrambi, ambidue, l'uno e l'altro, hoth. 

These pronouns are followed by the definite article when they 

precede a noun ; before a verb, it is omitted. Ex. 

Ambo le mani per dolor mi morsi, D. 1 I bit for gi-ief both my hands. 

Furono entrambi condannati a morte, They were both condemned to death. 

Ambidue le mie sorelle sono maritate, \ Both of my sisters are married. 

210. Neither of them, ne l'uno ne l'altro, when preceded by 

a verb, the verb must, in Italian, be accompanied by the negation. 

Ex. 

Non vidi né l'uno nò l'altro, i I saw neither of them. 

Non perdoneranno né all'uno né They will forgive neither of them, 

all'altro, I 

211. Qualunque,* chiunque, and chicchessia, whoever, 

whatever, whatsoever, are indeclinable ; the first may refer to 

persons or things, the two last can only relate to persons. Chiun- 

que is used sulstantively, and qualunque adjedwely. Ex. 

Chiunque lo ha udito, ha dovuto 

ammirare la sua eloquenza. 

Qualunque siano i vostri talenti, voi 

non ne fate uso. 

Egli accetterà un impiego qualunque. 

Whoever has heard him must have 

admired his eloquence. 

Whatever your talents may be, you 

do not employ them. 

He will accept any employment 

whatever. 

212. Per quanto, or simply per, is used to render however, 

* Qualsisia and qualsivoglia may be used instead of qualunque, and in 

tUe plural become qualsisiano, qvalsloofjliano.

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. VJ 

whatever ; before an adjective, jser quanto is indeclinable, but it 

agrees with the noun it precedes. Per can only be used before 

an adjective; the verb which follows Qiihev per ox per quanto 

must be in the subjunctive, and is preceded by che when jjer is 

used. Ex. 

Per quanto vantaggiose siano le 

vostre offerte, or, per vantaggiose 

che siano, 

Ogni sistema perquanto/«Zso, or, per 

falso che sia, troverà dei difensori. 

Per quanti sforzi facessimo, 

In ogni cuore, per quanto corrotto, 

or, per corrotto che sia, vi sono 

alcuni germi di virtù, 

EXERCISE XLVir. 

However advantageous your proposals 

may be. 

Every system, however false, Mill 

find defenders. 

AVhatever efforts we made. 

In every heart, however corrupt, 

there are some srerms of virtue. 

Love and vanity are both equally blind.—The superstivam'tà 

(209) (51) cieco 

tious believed that any crime whatever was expiated by giving 

ind. 2 [2\\) [venisse) espiare * doìiare 

largely to monasteries and churches.—The law will punish 

monastero punire 

them both.—The object of every education whatever should 

(209) oggetto (211) {dovrebbe) 

be the perfection of the intellect and of the body.—Some persons, 

(207) 

however prosperous they may be, are always dissatisfied. 

(212) scontento 

Some laws are suitable in some places and unsuitable in 

opportuno luogo disconveniente 

others.— Some one wishes to see you.— By the laws of 

(207) desiderare {\2A:) Secondo 

Draco, whoever was convicted of wilful poverty was 

Bracone (211) convinto volontaria 

punished with death.—True goodness carries on its face a 

di portare in (150) 

stamp which a hypocrite, however clever he may be, cannot 

impronta ipocrita (212) abile [non imo) 

imitate.—Whatever experiments we made, we did not succeed. 

imitare (212) sperimento sub. 2 ina. ^riuscire. 

—

96 ON THE PARTICLE SI. 

ON THE PARTICLE SI. 

213. Si, when used as an indefinite pronoun^ corresponds to 

the French on, and in English io people, one, they, we, some, &c., 

employed with an indeterminate signiflcation. Ex. 

Non si diventa maestro senza essere 

stato prima scolare, 

Insegnando n'impara, 

Nei paesi caldi si vive quasi sempre 

all'aria aperta, 

Si dice che le canzoni 2')opolari rivelino 

il carattere di un pojwlo, 

Olio does not become a master without 

first having been a pupil. 

We learn by teaching. 

In hot countries, people live almost 

always in the open air. 

People say, or it is said, that popular 

songs reveal the character of a 

people. 

214. The particle si is used in Italian instead of the auxiliary 

essere to form a passive verb ; and in this case the verb which 

accompanies si must be in the same tense and person as that in 

which the auxilianj woidd be were it employed. Ex. 

Un nomo onesto si rispetta, or è rispettato, 

anche dai poco onesti, 

Il grano si vende, or è venduto a 

buon mercato. 

In età avanzata non si cambiano con 

facilita le abitudini, 

Le glorie dei nostri antenati si ricordano 

con piacere. 

An honest man is respected even by 

the dishonest. 

Wheat is sold cheap. 

Habits are not easily changed in old 

age. 

We remember the glories of our 

ancestors with pleasure. 

215. The co?rtpowji(7 passive tenses are formed as follows with 

si. Ex. 

Si è trovato un raro manoscritto, 1 A rare manuscript has been found. 

Si sou trovati rari manoscritti, \ Rare manuscripts have been found. 

216. When si is used as an indefinite pronoun, it is the nomi- 

native of the verb which must always be in the third person 

singular ; but when si is employed as impassive reflective pronoun, 

it always accompanies a verb in the third person singular or 

plural, according to the subject of the verb. Ex. 

/ benefizi si ricevono con doppio 

piacere quando si conferiscono 

dagli amici, 

Nella Ciana si comprano e si vendono 

i fanciulli. 

Si corre sempre alle piazze ed ai 

giardini quando comincia il terremoto, 

Benefits are received with double 

pleasure when friendsconfer them. 

In China, children are bought and 

sold. 

People run always to the squares 

and gardens when the earthquake 

begins.

ON THE PARTICLE SI. 

217. Whenever si would cause any ambiguity in the sense of 

the phrase, the passive verb must be formed with essere or venire; 

venire is only used in the simple tenses. Ex. 

Vengono or sono iêrsuasì ; not si They are persuaded. 

2Krsuadono, which might mean, 

they persuade themselves. 

Gil uomini vengono or sono reputatifelici 

quando sono ricchi; not 

si reputano, which might mean, 

men think themselves happy, 

Sono stati venduti; not si sono venduti, 

they have sold themselves, 

EXERCISE XLVIII. 

97 

Men are considered happy when 

they are rich. 

They have been sold. 

Gold is tested by fire, men are tested by gold.— Beer 

(25) {21^) provare con (216) con birra 

is drunk by the peasants of Germany, wine is drunk by those 

(214) 

contadino 

of Italy.—Perfect happiness is never attained in this 

2(214) ^non ^mai ^raggiungere 

life.—The arts are cultivated in peace.—One becomes conspi- 

(214) (213) {diviene) rimar- 

cuous, and even ridiculous, by not following the fashions of the 

chevole anche 

* 

day.—We admire talents, we praise 

ìnoda 

beauty, we honour virtue, 

(214) (216) talento 

but we love goodness.—The beautiful is the aim of the arts, 

bontà bello scopo 

which for this reason are called the fine arts.—They were 

(177) (214) bello (217) 

justly punished in presence of the whole army. —People live 

tranquilly in a free 

(187) armata. 

country.—The title of 

(213) 

laws was 

tranquillamente ^ i 

titolo 

i(214) 

formerly written with a kind of red wax, called rubrica, 

ânticamente " 

specie (72) cera 

from this (is derived) the expression rubric.—They have been 

(168) viene rubrica. (217) 

invited to spend a week with us. 

a passare

98 ON THE PARTICLE SI, 

218. When the pronouns /, thou, &c., are the subjects of a 

passive verb, which in Italian governs the dative of persons, as 

dire, comandare, promettere, &c., the personal nominative pro- 

noun must be translated in Italian by the dative. Ex. 

Vi si promise, òr vi fu promesso, vi 

venne promesso, 

Mi si comanda, or mi è comandato, 

mi vien comandalo, 

Gli si domanda, or gli è domandato, 

gli vien domandato, 

You were promised. 

I am ordered, 

lie is asked. 

219. When the indefinite pronouns one, we, then, are used as 

the nominative of a reflected verb, they are expr£ssed in Italian 

by uno, noi, l'uomo, altri, alcuni, la gente, &c., according to the 

sense of the phrase, to avoid the repetition of si. Ex. 

Uno si avvez~a facilmente alla vita One easily accustoms one's-self to an 

oziosa, idle life. 

Alcuni si persuadono, Some persuade themselves. 

La gente si lusinga, People flatter themselves. 

L'uomo si dimentica spesso, Man forgets often. 

220. Si may follow the verb and be joined to it, and, when 

there is a negation in the phrase, non always precedes si. Ex. 

Non temesi la morte, 

Credesi che la marina da licggio a 

Gaeta sia quasi la più dilettevole 

parte d'Italia, B. 

Death is not feared. 

The coast from Eeggio to Gaeta is 

thought about the most delightful 

part of Italy. 

221. The adverbs vi, ci, and the conjunctive pronouns, always 

precede si; the relative pronoun ne follows si, which then becomes 

se. Ex. 

Vi ni parla principalmente la lingua 

Francese, 

Non mi si dice, 

Troppo se ne è parlato, 

Non se ne parla più, 

The French language is principally 

spoken there. 

I am not told. 

Too much has been said about it. 

People do not speak more of it- 

222. When the particle si is used, the pronoun nominative of 

the passive or active verb, and the accusatives, him, her, them, 

it, of the active verb, are not translated in Italian ; the verb 

agrees with the pronouns as if they were expressed. Ex.

Si educano con molta cura, 

Si ammirano per la loro serìiplicità, 

La tirannìa è il flagello della società, 

e si vede sempre congiunta 

air ipocrisia, alla superstizione, e 

all'ignoranza, 

Si è veduto a corte, 

ON THE PARTICLE SI. 99 

EXEPX'ISE XLIX. 

We educate tliem with great care. 

They are admired for their simplicity. 

Tyranny is the scourge of society, 

and we always see it joined with 

hypocrisy, superstition, and ignorance. 

We have seen him at court. 

The twelfth century, in which is presented to us the noble 

secolo (177) (214) (221) 

spectacle of human intelligence struggling with superstition and 

[che lotta) 

tyranny.—It has been said that tyrants produce liberty, and 

(215) 

producono 

that mobs produce tvrants.—They speak ' 

of it everywhere in 

canaglia 

town.—The tribes of the 

(213) (221) (193) 

desert deny that the religion of 

tribii (48) 

negare 

Mahomet was made for them ; for how (they say), can one 

iI/aome//o (214) sub. 2 poiché ^ i [possono) 

perform ablutions when one has no water? how can one give 

fare 

alms when one has no riches ? or what occasion can there 

elemosina ricchezza può 

be to fast during the month of Ramazan, when one fasts all 

* digiunare durante 

the year ?—We see them seldom. — They were allowed to 

(222) raramente. (218) [permise) 

return to their country.—It has never been known what 

\2lb)'^nonhnai 3 

(167) 

happened (to) them.—One lets one's-self easily be persuaded 

avvenisse (219) lasciare * inf. 

to do what (one likes.)—The barbarous sport of the bull 

a (167) piace divertimcìito toro [B) 

fight was introduced into Spain by tlie Arabs, amongst 

giostra[2U) (28) Aralo 

it was celebrated with great pomp, 

(7) (80)

100 ON THE PARTICLE SI. 

ADDITIONAL EXERCISE. 

(Merchants from all countries) (are seen there.)—One finds 

2 fi; 1 

there the beautiful united to the useful.—In nature, one 

(221) utile. cercare 

m vain the model of it.— Often one does not follow the path 

(221) (11) (220) Sfatare sentiero 

of virtue, because at the beginning it is found thorny and pain- 

(214) 

spinoso 

fui ; but one should reflect, that as the first rays of the 

dovrebbe riflettere (.57) raggio 

Bun produce a dazzling and unpleasant sensation until one 

abbagliante dispiacevole sintantoché (219) 

(not) (gets accustomed) to them, so the more one advances in 

abituarsi ?,\ih.\. (135) così (111) avanzarsi 

the path of virtue, the more pleasing and beneficial one finds it. 

— 

j222) 

They say that Italian is music spoken.—It was not permitted to 

[permise) 

them to land.—A man Avould do well, says Bacon, to carry a 

sbarcare. portare 

pencil in his pocket, to (write down) the thoughts of the moment; 

lapis appuntare 

those which come unsought are generally the best, and should 

spontaneo dovere 

be secured, because they seldom return.—Nothing worth 

[die valga la 

having can be gained without effort, and there is 

pena di possederlo) ^ ^(214) sforzo-^. 

no real enjoyment without labour.—The twilight in the 

(202) vera travaglio. crepuscolo 

south is much shorter than in northern countries ; the days 

mezzogiorno settentrionale 

in winter are longer, but in summer shorter.—The eagle attacks 

with its talons and wings, not witli its beak. 

{150) [57) artiglio (17)

CHAPTER IX. 

OX VERBS. 

lOX 

In' Italian there are three conjugations, known by the termi- 

nations ARE, ERE, IRE. 

The following table contains a model of those conjugations, 

which may serve for all the regular verbs. 

It will assist the pupil in learning the Italian verbs, to remark, 

that in all tenses of all verbs the first person plural ends in mo, 

the second person in te, and the third person, with few excep- 

tions, in no. 

The second person plural of the preterite of the indicative, 

and the imperfect of the subjunctive, are formed by the addition 

of an s to the second person plural of the present of the indica- 

tive, 

— 

amate, you love ; amaste, you loved ; che amaste, that you 

might love ; credete, credeste, che credeste ; sentite, sentiste, che 

sentiste. 

The first person plural of the conditional is formed from the 

future termination remo, by doubling the m, remmo ; and the 

second person by adding an s to the future rete, and changing it 

to reste ; verbs of the first conjugation change the a of the in- 

finitive are into e, in forming the future and conditional,— amerò, 

amerei, Szq. 

Remark.—The Italians have three ways of addressing per- 

sons : besides tu and voi, they employ, as a mark of respect to- 

wards those whom they address, the third person singular of the 

verb with the feminine pronoun ella. 

If the verb to he alone comes between the pronoun ella and 

an adjective, the latter must be feminine, and agree with ella ; 

but if any other verb instead of to le is employed, the adjective 

agrees with the person addressed ; that is, masculine for a gentle- 

man, and feminine for a lady.

102 REGULAR VERBS. 

1st Conjugation, 

TABLE OF CONJUGATIONS. 

REGULAR VERBS.

104 REGULAR VERBS. 

Do not thou bui/, 

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

REGULAR VERBS. lOi 

That I migiil have That I vi/'r/ht have That I might have 

bought, &c. sold, &c, united, &c. 

Che io avessi com- Che io avessi veu- Che io avessi imito 

prato tinto 

• To 

hnj, 

INFINITIVE MOOD,

106 REGULAR VERr.S. 

the indicative, in tlie imjoeralive, and the present of the subjunc- 

tive, as follows : 

PRESENT 

—

IRREGULAR VERES. 107 

IHEEGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN ABE. 

Andare, lo go; pres. io vado or vo, 

tu vai, egli va, noi andiamo, voi 

andate, eglino vanno ; imp. io andava, 

tu aìidavi, &c. prct. io 

; 

andai, tu andasti, egli andò, &c. ; 

past indef. io sono andato, noi 

siamo andati; pluperf. io era andato, 

noi eravamo andati; fut. io 

andrò, tu andrai, &c. ; imper. va 

tu, vada egli, andiamo, andate, 

vadano; pres. subj. che io vada, 

che tu vada, ch'egli vada, che noi 

andiamo, che voi andiate, che coloro 

vadano ; imp. subj. che io andassi, 

che tu andassi, &c. ; cond. io andrei, 

tu andresti, &o. ger. an- 

; 

dando ; part, past, andcdo, andata, 

andati, andate. 

Dare, to give pres. io ; do, tu dai, 

egli dà, noi diamo, voi date, eglino 

danno ; imp. io dava, noi davamo ; 

jiret. io diedi or detti, tu desti, egli 

diede or dette or p. die, noi demmo, 

voi deste, eglino diedero or dettero 

or p. dierono ; past indef. io ho 

dato, noi abbiamo dato; pluperf. io 

aveva dato; noi avevamo dato; 

iut. io darò, noi daremo; imper. 

dà tu, dia egli, diamo noi, date 

voi, diano eglino; pres. subj. che 

io dia, che noi diamo, ch'eglino 

diano or p. dieno; imp. subj. che 

io dessi, che tu dessi, ch'egli desse, 

che noi dessimo, che voi deste, 

ch'eglino dessero; cond. io darei, 

noi daremmo; ger. dando; part, 

past, dato, data, dati, date. 

N.B.—Ridare is conjugated in tlie 

same way ; but circondare and 

ricordare, &c., are regular. 

Fare, to do ; pres. io fo or faccio, 

tu, fai, egli fa, noi facciamo, voi 

fate, eglino fanno; imp. io faceva, 

noi facevamo ; pret. io feci, tu 

facesti, egli fece, noifacemmo, voi 

faceste, eglino fecero; past indefinite, 

io ho fatto, noi abbiamo 

fatto; fut. io fari), noi faremo; 

imper. fa tu, faccio egli, facciamo 

noi, fate voi, facciano eglino ; pres. 

Bubj. che io faccia, che noi facciamo 

; imp. subj. che io facessi, 

che noi facessimo; cond. io farei, 

noi faremmo ; gerund, facendo ; 

part, past, fatto, fatta, fatti, fatte. 

The derivatives are conjugated in 

the same way. 

Stare, to remain ; pres. io sto, tu 

stai, egli sta, noi stiamo, voi state, 

eglino stanno; imp. io stava, noi 

stavamo; pret. io stetti, tu stesti, 

egli stette, noi stemmo, voi steste, 

eglino stettero; past indefinite, io 

sono stato, noi siamo stati; future, 

io stari), noi staremo; imper. sta 

tu, stia colui, stiamo noi, state voi, 

stiano or stieno coloro; pres. subj. 

che io stia, che noi stiamo ; impcrf. 

subj. che io stessi, che tu stessi, che 

egli stesse, che noi stessimo, che voi 

steste, che eglino stessero or stessono; 

cond. io starei, eglino starebbero 

or starebbono ; ger. stando; 

part, past, stato, stata, stati, state, 

N.B.— Contrastare and other derivatives, 

are regular.

108 lURDGULAR VEIIBS. 

IRR.KGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN ERE.* 

The following are denominated verbs in ere sJiort, on account 

of the stress of the accent falling on the antepenultimate syllable, 

instead of the penultimate. 

In the following table of verbs, the irregular tenses only are 

given ; the other tenses, being regular, arc understood to have 

the same inflections as those of the regular verbs given in the 

Table of Conjugations, p. 102. 

Accendere, to kindle ; prct. accesi, 

accendesti, accese, accendemmo, accendeste, 

accesero; ger. accendendo; 

part, past, acceso, -i, -a, -e. 

Accingersi, or accignersi, to prepare 

one's-self, ref. ; v. cingere.f 

Accogliere, or accorre, to welcome, v. 

cogliere.^ 

Accorgersi, to perceive, ref. pret. 

; 

mi accorsi, ti accorgesti, &c. part, 

; 

past, accortosi. 

Accorrere, to hasten, v. correre. 

Accrescere, to augment, v. crescere. 

Addurre, or adducere, to bring 

forth, to allege ; pres. adduco, 

adduci, adduce, adduciamo, adducete, 

adducono; imp. adduceva, 

&c. pret. addussi, adducesti, ad- 

; 

dusse, adducemmo, adduceste, addussero 

; future, addurrò, &c. ; 

imper. adduci, adduca, adduciamo, 

adducete, adducano; prcs. subj. 

che io adduca, adduca, adduca, 

adduciamo, adduciate, adducano ; 

imp. subj. adducessi, &c. ; cond. 

addurrei, &c. ; ger. adducendo ; 

])art. past, addotto. 

Affiggere, to post up, v. prefiggire. 

Affliggere, to afflict ; pret. afflissi, 

affliggesti, &c. ; part, past, afflitto. 

Aggiungere, or aggiugncre, to add, v. 

giungere. 

AÌgere, to freeze, p. ; has only the 

preterite ahi, &c. 

Alludere, to allude, v. deludere. 

Ammettere, to admit, v. mettere. 

Ancidere, to kill, p. ; v. recidere. 

Angere, to afflict, p. ; has only 3d 

person singular of the present, 

ange. 

Anteporre, to prefer, v. porre. 

Ajìjjendere, to hang up preterite, 

; 

appese, appendesti, &c. part, past, 

; 

appeso. 

Apporre, to add, v. porre. 

Apprendere, to learn, v. prendere. 

Ardere, to burn pret. arsi, ardesti, 

; 

&c. part, past, arso. 

; 

Arrendersi, 

rendere. 

to surrender, ref. ; v. 

Arridere, to smile, v. ridere. 

Arrogere, to adjust, to add, hns 

only the sing, of the third person 

present, arroge. 

Ascendere, to ascend, v. scendere. 

Ascondere, to hide ; pret. ascosi, 

ascondesti, &c. part, ascosto, ; or 

ascoso. 

Ascrivere, to inscribe, v. scrivere. 

Aspergere, to sprinkle, v. spergere. 

* Observe that the verbs ending in rrc, as addurre, trarre, belong to this conjugation. 

t The reflected verbs are marked thus: ref.; the poetical, p. The v. means vedi, see. 

Accingersi being conjugated like cingere, the student is referred to this verb for its irre- 

gularity.

Assistere, to assist ; 

tito. 

IRREGULAR VERBS, 109 

part, past, assis- 

Assolvere, to absolve ; pret. assolvei 

or assolsi, assolvesti, &c. ; part, 

past, assoluto or assolto. 

Assorhere, to absorb ; part, past, as- 

sorto. 

Assumere, to undertake ; pret. assumi, 

assumesti, &c. ; part, past, 

assuiito. 

Astergere, to clean, p. ; v. tergere. 

Astrarre, or astraere, to abstract, v. 

trarre. 

Astringere, or astrignere, to constrain, 

V. stringere. 

Attendere, to wait, v. tendere. 

Attenere, to keep one's word, v. tenere. 

Attingere, or attignere, to reach, v. 

tingere. 

Attorcere, to twist, v. torcere. 

Attrarre or attraere, to attract, v. 

trarre. 

Avvincere, to bind, v. vincere. 

Avvolgere, to envelop, v. volgere. 

Cagqere, to fall, an ancient verb, of 

which only caggia and caggendo are 

used by the poets. 

Chiedere, to ask ; pres. cJiiedo, and 

in poetry chieggo, or chieggio ; pret. 

chiesi, chiedesti, &c. ; part, past, 

chiesto. 

Chiudere, to shut ; 

pret. chiusi, chiur- 

part, past, chiuso. 

desti, &c. ; 

Cingere, or cignere, to gird pret. 

; 

cinsi, cingesti, &c. ; part, cinto. 

Circoncidere, to circumcise, v. re- 

cidere. 

Circonscrivere, to circumscribe, v. 

scrivere. 

Cocere, to cook, v. cuocere. 

Cogliere, or corre, to gather, v. scio- 

gliere. 

Commettere, to commit, v. metterà. 

Commovere, to affect, v. movere. 

Compiangere, to pity, v. piangere. 

Comporre, to compose, v. porre. 

Comprendere, to comprehend, v. 

prendere. 

Comirrinìcre, to compress, v. ojypri- 

Compromettere, to compromise, v. 

mettere. 

Compungere, ovcompugnere, to grieve, 

v. pungere. 

Conchiudere, to conclude, v. chiudere. 

Concludere, to conclude, v. deludere. 

Concorrere, to concur, v. correre. 

Concuocere, to digest, v. cuocere. 

Condescendere, condiscendere, to condescend, 

V. scendere. 

Condurre, or conducere, to conduct, 

V. addurre. 

Configgere, to nail, v. affliggere. 

Confondere, to confound, \. fondere. 

Congiungere, or congiugnere, to unite, 

V. giungere. 

Connettere, to unite ; pret. connessi, 

connettesti, &c. ; 

Conoscere, to know pret. ; conobbi, 

part, connesso. 

conoscesti, &c. part, conosciuto. 

; 

Conquidere, to afflict, to cast down, 

V. recidere. 

Consistere, to consist, v. assistere. 

Conspergere, or cospergere, to besprinkle, 

V. spergere. 

Consumere, to consume, v. assumere. 

Contendere, to dispute, v. tendere. 

Contorcere, to distort, v. torcere. 

Contrapporre, to oppose, v. porre. 

Contrarre, or contraere, to contract, 

V. trarre. 

Convincere, to convince, v. vincere. 

Corre, to gather, v. cogliere. 

Correggere, to correct, v. reggere. 

Correre, to run pret. corsi, corresti, 

; 

&c. part, corso. 

; 

Corrispondere, to correspond, v. rispondere. 

Corrodere, to corrode, v. rodere. 

Corrompere, to corrupt, v. rompere. 

Cospargere, to strew, v. spargere. 

Cospergere, to water, v. spergere. 

Costringere, or costrignere, to constrain, 

V. stringere. 

Crescere, to grow pret. crebbi, cres- 

; 

cesti, &c. part, past, cresciuto. 

; 

Crocifiggere, to crucify ; pret. croci- 

fissi, crocifiggesti, &c. ; part, past, 

crocifisso.

TIO IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Cuocere, to cook pret. cossi, cuocesti, 

; 

cosse, cuocemmo, cuoceste, cossero; 

part, past, cotto. 

Decidere, to decide, v. recidere. 

Decrescere, to decrease, v. crescere. 

Dedurre, to deduce, v. addurre. 

Deludere, to delude pret. delusi, de- 

; 

part, past, deluso. 

ludesti, &c. ; 

Dej)orre, to depose, v. porre. 

Deprimere, to depress, v. opprimere. 

Deridere, to deride, v. ridere. 

Descrivere, to describe, v. scrivere. 

Desistere, to desist, v. assistere. 

Detrarre, to deduct, v. trarre. 

Difendere, to defend ; pret. difesi, 

difendesti, &c. part, past, difeso. 

; 

Diffondere, to pour out, v. fondere. 

Dimettere, to forgive, pardon, v. met- 

tere. 

Dijnngere, dipignere, to depict, v. 

pingere. 

Dirigere, to direct, v. erigere. 

Disapprendere, to unlearn, or forget, 

V. prendere. 

Discendere, to descend, v. scendere. 

Disciorre, and disciogliere, to untie, 

V. sciorre. 

Discorrere, to discourse, v. correre. 

Discutere, to discuss ; pret. discussi, 

discutesti, &c. part, past, discusso. 

; 

Disgiungere, and disgiugnere, to separate, 

V. giungere. 

Dismettere, to dismiss, v. mettere. 

Dismovere, or dismuovere, to avert, 

V. movere. 

Dispergere, to disperse; pret. dispersi; 

part, past, disperso. 

Disporre, to dispose, v. porre. 

Distendere, to extend, v. stendere. 

Distinguere, to distinguish, v. estingnere. 

Distogliere, or distorre, to divert 

from, V. togliere. 

Distrarre, or distraere, to distract, v. 

trarre. 

Distruggere, to destroy, v. struggere. 

Disvellere, divellere, or disverre, to 

pluck up, V. svellere. 

Dividere, to divide, v. recidere. 

Eleggere, to elect, to choose, v. leggere. 

Elidere, to retrench, v. recidere. 

Eludere, to elude, v. deludere. 

Ergere, to erect; p. pret. ersi, ergesti, 

&c. part, past, erto. 

; 

Erigere, to raise pret. eressi ; ; part. 

past, eretto. 

Escludere, to exclude, v. deludere. 

Esigere, to exact part, esatto. 

; 

Esistere, to exist, v. assistere. 

Espellere, to expel pret. espulsi, es- 

; 

part, espulso. 

pellesti, &c. ; 

Esporre, to expose, v. porre. 

Esprimere, to express, v. opprimere. 

Estendere, to extend, v. tendere. 

Estinguere, to extinguish pret. es- 

; 

tinsi, estinguesti, &c- part, estinto. 

; 

Estrarre, to extract, v. trarre. 

Fendere, to si)lit t^vqì. ; fendei, fendesti 

; part. \ìast, fenduto or fesso. 

Figgere, to affix, v. affìggere. 

Fingere, to teign, v. pingere. 

Fondere, to melt ; Tpret. fusi, fondesti, 

&c. ; Y>ATt.fuso. 

Frammettere, to interpose, v. mettere. 

Frangere, to break pret. fransi, 

; 

frangesti, &c. ; Tpart. franto. 

Frapporre, to intermeddle, v. porre. 

Friggere, to fry, v. affliggere. 

Genuflettere, to kneel pret. genu- 

; 

flessi, genuflettesli, &c. part, genu- 

; 

flesso. 

Giungere, or giugnere, to join, or 

arrive; pret. giunsi, giungesti, &c.; 

part, giunto. 

Illudere, to deceive, v. deludere. 

Immergere, to plunge, v. mergere. 

Impellere, to impel, v. espellere. 

Imporre, to order, v. porre 

Imprimere, to impress, v. opprimere. 

IncJdudere, to enclose, v. chiudere. 

Incidere, to engrave, v. recidere. 

Includere, to include, v. deludere. 

Incorrere, to incur, v. correre. 

Increscere, to be sorry, v. crescere. 

Indurre, or inducere, to induce, r. 

addurre. 

Infingere, to dissemble, \. fingere. 

Infondere, to infuse, \. fondere.

Infraiif/ere, to break, v. frangere. 

Inframettere, or intramettere, to interfere, 

V. mettere. 

Ingiungere, or ingiugnere, to enjoiu, 

V. giungere. 

lììscrivere, to inscribe, v. scrivere. 

Insistere, to insist, v. assistere. 

Insorgere, to rebel, v. sorgere. 

Intendere, to understand, v. tendere. 

Intermettere, to discontinue, v. met- 

tere. 

Interporre, or inlraporre, to interpose, 

V. porre. 

Interrompere, to interrupt, v. romjKre. 

Intingere, or intignere, to steep, v. 

/««//ere. 

Intraprendere, to undertake, v. ^^reu- 

f?ere. 

Intridere, to dilute, v. recidere. 

hitrodurre, to introduce, v. addurre. 

Intromettere, to introduce, v. mettere. 

Intrudere, to intrude ; pret. intrusi, 

IKKEGULAK VEKBS. Ill 

Offendere, to oflend ; pret. offesi, 

offendesti, &c. ; part, offeso. 

Ommettere, to omit, v. mettere. 

Opporre, to oppose, v. porre. 

Opprimere, to oppress pret. oppressi, 

; 

opprimesti, &c. part, ojyprcs.so. 

; 

Pascere, to feed pret. pascei, pas- 

; 

cesti, &c. part. ^;asci«ô. 

; 

Percorrere, to run over, v. correre. 

Percuotere, to strike ; pret. percossi, 

percotesti, &c. ; 

part, percosso. 

Perdere, to lose ; pret. 2^^''^

112 IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Proforìdere, to dissipate, v. fondere. 

Promettere, to promise, v. mettere. 

Promovere, or 2)romuovere, to promote, 

V. movere- 

Proporre, or froponere, to propose, 

V. porre. 

Prorompere, tobreak fortli,v. rompere. 

Prosciogliere, or prosciorre, to ab- 

solve, deliver, v. sciogliere. 

Proscrivere, to proscribe, v. scrivere. 

Prostendenti, to prostrate one's-self, 

V. tendere. 

Proteggere, to protect ; 

proteggesti, &c. ; 

pret. protessi, 

part, protetto. 

Protrarre, or profraere, to protract, 

V. trarre. 

Pungere, or piugnere, to sting, to 

smart ; 

pret. punsi, pungesti, &c. ; 

part, punto. 

Rabbattere, to diminish, v. battere, 

lìaccendere, to light again, v. accendere, 

lìacchiudere, to enclose, shut up, v. 

chiudere, 

lìaccogliere, or raccorre, to collect, v. 

cogliere, 

liadere, to shave, &c. prot. rasi, 

; 

radesti, &c. part. rasa. 

; 

Eaggiungere, raggiugnere, to rejoin, 

V. giungere. 

Eavvolgere, to envelop, v. volgere. 

Ecassumere, or riassumere, to reassume, 

V. assumere. 

Eccidere, to cut pret. i-ecisi, re- 

; 

cidesti, &c. part, reciso. 

; 

Eedimere, to redeem pret. redensi, 

; 

redimesti, &c. part, redento. 

; 

Eeggere, to rule pret. ressi, reggesti, 

; 

&c. part, retto. 

; 

Eendere, to render, restore pret. 

; 

resi, rendesti, &c. ; part. reso. 

Some conjugate this verb lik

Biporre, to replace, v. iJorre. 

lUprenJere, to reprove, to retake, v. 

in'cndere. 

Jiiprodiirre, to reproduce, v. ijrodurre. 

Eipromettcre, to promise again, v. 

oiiettcre. 

Riscrivere, to write again, v. scrivere. 

lìiscuotere, to recover, redeem, v. 

scuotere. 

Hisolvere, to resolve, v. assolvere. 

Risorgere, to rise again, v. sorgere. 

Bisospingere, to repulse, v. spingere. 

Eiapingere, or rispignere, to reject, 

V. spingere. 

Rispondere, to answer ; 

rispondesti, &c. ; 

inUEGULAR VEKES. 113 

pret. risposi, 

part, risposto. 

Ristringere, or ristrignere, to restrain, 

v. stringere. 

Ritingere, or ritignere, to dye again, 

V. tingere. 

Ritogliere, or ritorre, to take again, 

V. togliere. 

Ritorcere, to twist, or wring again, v. 

torcere. 

Ritrarre, to describe or draw, v. 

trarre. 

Rivivere, to revive, v. vivere. 

Rivolgere, to turn over, or change, v. 

volgere. 

Rodere, to gnaw ; 

part. roso. 

&.C. ; 

Rompere, to break ; 

ptesti, &c. part, rotto. 

; 

pret. rosi, rodesti, 

pret. ruppi, rùm- 

Scegliere, or scerre, to choose ; pros. 

scelgo, scegli, sceglie, scegliamo, 

scegliete, scelgono ; pret. scelsi, sce- 

gliesti, &c. ; imper. scegli, scelga, 

scegliamo, scegliete, scelgano; pres. 

sub]', che io scelga, &c. ; part, scelto. 

Scendere, to descend ; pret. scesi, 

scendesti, &c. ; 

part, sceso. 

Schiudere, to open, to exclude, v. 

chiudere. 

Sciogliere, or sciorre, to untie, or 

loosen ; pres. sciolgo, sciogli, scio- 

glie, sciogliamo, sciogliete, sciolgono; 

pret. sciolsi, sciogliesti, &c. ; future, 

scioglierò or sciorro; imper. sciogli, 

sciolga, sciogliamo, sciogliete, sciol- 

gano ; pres. subj. che io sciolga, 

&.C. ; cond. scioglierei, or sciorrei; 

part, sciolto. 

Scommettere, to bet, v. mettere. 

Scomporre, to derange, v. porre. 

Sconfiggere, to conquer, defeat, v. 

affliggere. 

Scontorcere, to wrest, to wreath, v. 

torcere. 

Sconvolgere, to overturn, v. volgere. 

Scorgere, to see, perceive, v. accor- 

gere. 

Scorrere, to run in haste, slide, v. 

correre. 

Scrivere, to write pret. scrissi, scri- 

; 

vesti, &c. ; 

part, scritto. 

Scuotere, to shake, v. percuotere. 

Sedurre, to seduce, v. addurre. 

Smungere, or smugnere, to dry up, v. 

mungere. 

Smuovere, to stir, v. movere. 

Socchiudere, to half-shut, v. chiudere. 

Soccorrere, to succour, v. correre. 

Soggiungere, or soggiugnere, to add, 

V. giungere. 

Sommergere, to submerge, v. mergere. 

Sommettere, to submit, v. mettere. 

Sopporre, to subject, v. porre. 

Sopraggiungere, or sopraggiugnere, 

to come unexpectedly, v. giungere. 

Soprappore, to place above, v. porre. 

Soprascrivere, to superscribe, v. scrivere. 

Sopravvivere, to survive', v. vivere. 

Sopprimere, to suppress, v. opprimere. 

Sorgere, to rise ; 

&c. ; 

part, sorto. 

pret. soi'si, sorgesti, 

Sorprendere, to surprise, v. prendere. 

Sorreggere, to support, v. reggere. 

Sorridere, to smile, v. ridere. 

Soscrivere, to subscribe, v. scrivere. 

Sospendere, to suspend ; 

sospendesti, &c. ; 

pret. sospesi, 

part, sospeso. 

Sospingere, or sospignere, to push, v. 

spingere. 

Sottintendere, to be understood, v. 

tendere. 

Sottomettere, sommettere, to submit, 

V. mettere. 

Sottoporre, to subdue, y. porre.

114 IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Sottoscrivere, to subscribe, v. scrivere. 

Sottrarre, to subtract, v. trarre. 

Sovragiungere, to happen unexpectedly, 

V. giungere. 

Spargere, to spread, scatter pret. 

; 

sparsi, spargesti, &c. part, sparso. 

; 

Spegnere, or spengere, to extinguish ; 

pret. spensi, spegnesti, &c. part. 

; 

spento. 

Spìendere, to spend pret. spesi, spen- 

; 

desti, &c. part, speso. 

; 

Spergere, to disperse pret. spersi, 

; 

spergesti, &c. part, sperso. 

; 

Spingere, or spignere, to push pret. 

; 

spinsi, sjnngesti, &c. part, spinto. 

; 

Sporgere, to project, jut out, \. porgere. 

Stendere, to extend, v. tendere. 

Storcere, to twist, v. torcere. 

Straccocere, to cook too much, v. 

cocere. 

Stravolgere, to turn, to wrest, v. volgere. 

Stringere, or strignere, to squeeze, to 

press pret. strinsi, stringesti, &c. ; 

; 

part, stretto. 

Struggere, to melt, to dissolve ; 

pret. 

strussi, struggesti, &c. ; part, strutto. 

Subdividere, to subdivide, v. recidere. 

Svellere, or sverre, to pluck up pret. 

; 

svelsi, svellesti, &c. part, svelto. 

; 

Svolgere, to unfold, v. volgere. 

Supporre, to suppose, v. porre. 

Sussistere, to subsist, v. assistere. 

Tacere, to be silent, to hold one's 

tongue pres. taccio, taci, tace, 

; 

tacciamo, tacete, tacciono ; pret. 

tacqui, tacesti, &c. ; imper. taci, 

taccia, tacciamo, tacete, tacciano ; 

pres. subj. che io taccia, taccia, 

taccia, tacciamo, tacciate, tacciano; 

part, taciuto. 

Tendere, to tend ; 

&c. part. teso. 

; 

pret. tesi, tendesti, 

Tergere, to wipe, to clean ; p. pret. 

tersi, tergesti, &c. ; part, terso. 

Tingere, or tignere, to dye, v. pingere. 

Togliere, or torre, to take away, v. 

sciogliere. 

Torcere, to bend, to twist ; pret. 

torsi, torcesti, &c. ; part, torto. 

Tradurre, to translate, v. addurre. 

Trafiggere, to pierce, v. affliggere. 

Tramettere, to put between, v. 

mettere. 

Trarre, or traere, to draw ; pres. 

traggo, traggi or trai, trae, tragghiamo 

or traiamo, traete, traggono 

; imp. traeva, &c. ; pret. 

trassi, traesti, trasse, traemmo, 

traeste, trassero ; fut. trarrò, &c. ; 

imper. traggi, tragga, traiamo, 

traete, traggano; pres. subj. che io 

tragga, tragga, tragga, traiamo, 

tragghiate, traggano; imp. subj. 

che io traessi, &c. ; cond. trarrei, 

&c. ; 

gerund, traendo; part, tratto. 

Trascegliere, and trascerre, to choose, 

V. scegliere. 

Trascendere, to surmount, v. scendere. 

Trascorrere, to transgress, to run 

over, V. correre. 

Trascrivere, to transcribe, v. scrivere. 

Trasfondere, to transfuse, v. fondere. 

Trasmettere, to transmit, v. mettere. 

Trasporre, to transpose, v. porre. 

Travolgere, to invert, v. volgere. 

Uccidere, to kill, v. recidere. 

Ungere, or ugnere, to anoint, v. pungere. 

Vilipendere, to despise, v. sospendere. 

Vincere, to vanquish ; pret. vinsi, 

vincesti, &c. ; part, vinto. 

Vivere, to live pret. vissi, vivesti, 

; 

&c. ; fut. vivrò ; cond. vivrei, &c. ; 

part, vivuto or vissuto. 

Volgere, to turn pret. volsi, volgesti, 

; 

&c. part, volto. 

; 

The following verbs are termed iu ere long, because the force 

of the accent falls on the penultimate syllable, as in antivedére, 

dovére, S:c., instead of the antepenultimate, as iu pèrdere,

IRREGULAR VERD8. 115 

créscere^ lèggere, fóndere, fingere, &c. ; but tlie pupil will ob- 

serve, that ciltbough tbe accent falls on the e of ére\ it is not a 

broad accent, to be pronounced like aire.ij, but an acute accent, 

to have the kind of intermediate sound of error in English, as 

errnj. Without this remark, the pupil might suppose that tbe e, 

from having an accent, should be pronounced broad. 

IREEGULAE VEEBS IN ERE LONG. 

Antivedere, to foresee, v. vedere. Dissuadere, to dissuade, v. per- 

Assidersi, to sit down, ref. pret. mi 

; 

suadere. 

assisi, ti assidesti, &c. ; 

assiso.* 

jiart. past, Dolere and dolersi, to complain, ref, ; 

pres. mi dolgo or doglio,^ ti duoli, si 

Astenere, to abstain, v. tenere. 

duole, ci dogliamo, vi dolete, si 

Avvedersi, to perceive, ref., v. vedt-re. dolgono; pret. mi dolsi, ti dolesti, 

Bere, to drink, p. pres. beo, bei, bee, 

; &c. ; fut. mi dorrò, &c. ; imper. 

beiamo, beete, heono; imp. beeva, duoliti, dolgasi, dogliamoci, dole- 

&c. ; pret. bevvi, beesti, bevve, tevi, dolgansi ; pres. subj. che mi 

beemmo, beestc, bevvero; fut. bero, dolga, ti dolga, si dolga, ci do- 

&c. ; iraper. bei, bea, beiamo, beete, 

beano ; pres. subj. che io bea, bea, 

bea, beiamo, beiate, beano; imp. 

subj. che io beessi, &c. ; cond. berei, 

gliamo, vi dogliate, si dolgano ; 

cond. mi dorrei, &c. ; imp. subj. 

che mi dolessi, &c. ger. dolendosi; 

; 

part, past, dolutosi; comp. mi sono 

&c. ger. beendo ; ; part., past, 

bevuto. Bevere is regular, and 

doluto, ci siamo doluti, &c. 

Dovere, to owe ; devo, devi, deve, 

generally used in prose. 

devono, delibo or deggio, debbi, 

Cadere, to fall pret. caddi, cadesti, 

; debhe, dobbiamo, dovete, (debbono, 

&c. ; fut. cadrò, &c. ; cond. cadrei, deggiono or deano ; pret. dovetti, 

&c. part, past, caduto. 

; 

dovesti, &c. ; fut. dovrò, &c. ; no 

Calere, to care, to be concerned for, imperative ; pres. subj. che io 

p.; has only: pres. ?iit cafe; imp. debba, debba, debba or deggia, 

mi caleva; pret. mi calse; pres. deggia, deggia, dobbiamo, dobbiate, 

subj. che mi caglia. 

debbano or dcggiano; cond. dovrei; 

Compiacere, to comply with, to please, part, past, dovuto. 

ref., V. piacere. 

Equivalere, 

valere. 

to be equivalent, v. 

Giacere, to lie down, v. tacere. 

Tntertenere, or intrattenere, to enter- 

Condolersi, to condole witli, ref., v. 

dolere. 

Contenere, to contain, v. tenere. 

Decadere, to decay, v. cadere. 

Detenere, to arrest, v. tenere. 

Discadere, to decline, v. cadere. 

Dispiacere, to displease, v. piacere. 

tain, V. tenere. 

Lecere and licere, to be permitted or 

licensed. These verbs have only 

the third j)ersou singular of the 

* Except in the preterito aud parliciple, assidei il is uut useil, but iakre.

116 IRBEGULAB VERDS. 

present tense of tlio indicative, 

lece and lice, and are merely employed 

in poetry. 

Mantenere, to maintain, v. tenere. 

Ottenere, to obtain, v. tenere. 

Parere, to appear ; pres. pajo, pari, 

pare, pajamo, parete, pajono; pret. 

parvi, paresti, &c. ; fut. parrò, 

&c. ; pres. snbj. che io paja, &c. ; 

cond. parrei ; part, paruto and 

parso. 

Persuadere, to persuade ; pret. persuasi, 

persuadesti, &c. ; part, persuaso. 

Piacere, to please, v. tacere. 

Possedere, to possess, v. sedere. 

Potere, to be able pres. posso, puoi, 

; 

può or puote, possiamo, potete, 

possono ; fut. potrò, &c. ; no 

imper. pres. subj. che io j)0ssa, 

; 

possa, p)ossa, possiamo, possiate, 

possano; cond. potrei; part, past, 

potuto. 

Presedere, to preside, v, sedere. 

Prevalere, to prevail, v. valere. 

Prevedere, to foresee, v. vedere. 

Provvedere, to provide, v. vedere. 

Pattenere, to arrest, v. tenere. 

Pavvedersi, to correct one'sself, ref., 

v. vedere. 

Riavere, to have again, v. avere. 

Ricadere, to fall aâin, v. cadere. 

Rimanere, to remain pres. rimango, 

; 

rimani, rimane, rimaniamo, rima- 

nete, rimangono ; pret. rimasi, rimanesti, 

&c. ; fut. rimarrò; imper. 

rimani, rimanga, rimaniamo, rimanete, 

rimangano; pres. subj. che 

io rimanga, rimaniamo, rimaniate, 

rimangano ; cond. rimarrei; part, 

past, rimasto or rimaso. 

Risapere, to know by hearsay, v. 

sapere. 

Risedere, to reside, v. sedere. 

Ritenere, to retain, v. tenere- 

Rivedere, to see again, v. vedere. 

Rivolere, to will again, v. volere. 

Sapere, to know; pres. so, sai, sa, 

sappiamo, sapete, sanno ; pret, 

seppi, sapesti, &c. ; fut. saprò, &c. ; 

imper. sappi, sappia, sappiamo, 

sappiate, sappiano: pres. subj. che 

io sappia, &.C. ; cov\à. sapirei ; part, 

past, sapido. 

Scadere, to decay, to fall off, v. cadere. 

Sedere, to sit down; pres. seggo, siedi, 

siede, sediamo, sedete, seggono ; 

imper. siedi, segga, sediamo, sedete, 

seggano; pres. subj. che io segga, 

segga, segga, sediamo, sediate, seggano 

; part, past, seduto. 

Soggiacere, to be subject, v. giacere. 

Solere, to be accustomed pres. soglio, 

; 

suoli, suole, sogliamo, solete, sogliono 

; imp. soleva ; pres. subj. che io 

soglia, sogli, soglia, sogliamo, so- 

gliate, sogliano; part, past, solito. 

In the tenses not noticed here, the 

verb essere is used with the parti- 

ciple ; as, io fui solito, I was accustomed, 

&c. 

Soprassedere, to supersede, v. sedere. 

Sostenere, to sustain, v. tenere. 

Spiacere, to displease, v. piacere. 

Sprovvedere, to leave destitute, v. 

vedere. 

Tenere, to liold ; pres. tengo, tieni, 

tiene, teniamo, tenete, tengono; pret. 

tenni, tenesti, &c. ; fut. terrò, &c. ; 

imper. tieni, tenga, teniamo, tenete, 

tengano; pres. subj. che io tenga, 

tenga, tenga, teniamo, leniate, tengano; 

cond. terrei, &c. part, past, 

; 

tenuto. 

Trattenere, to entertain, v. tenere. 

Travedere, to see double, v. vedere. 

Valere, to be worth ; pres. vaglio or 

valgo, vali, vale, vagliamo, valete, 

vagliono; pret. valsi, valesti, &c. ; 

fut. varrò, &c. ; imper. vali, vaglia, 

vagliamo, valete, vagliano ; pres. 

subj. che io valga or vaglia, &c. ; 

cond. varrei ; part, past, valuto. 

Vedere, to see pres. vedo, veggo, or 

; 

veggio, vedi, vede, vediamo or veggiamo, 

vedete, vedono or veggono; 

pret. vidi, vedesti, &c. ; fut. vedrò, 

&c. ; imper. vedi, veda or vegga, 

vediamo or veggiamo, vedete, vedano

or veggano; pres. siibj. che io veda 

or ìJcgga ; comi, vedrei, &c. ; part, 

past, veduto or visto. 

Volere, to be willing; pres. voglio or 

VÌI, vuoi, vuole, vogliamo, volete. 

IRREGULAR VERBS. 117 

vogliono; prof, volli, volesti, &c. ; 

fut. vorrò, &c. ; no imperative ; 

pres. siibj. che io voglia, &c. ; cond. 

vorrei; ger. volendo; part. past. 

voluto. 

IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION 

IN IBE. 

Apparire, to appear ; pret. apparii 

or apparvi; part, past, apparito 

or apparso. It is the same with 

comparire. 

Aprire, to open, like servire ; but in 

the pret. aprii or apersi, apristi, 

&c. ; part, past, aperto. 

Assalire, to assail, v. salire. 

Assorbire, to absorb ; part, past, assorbito 

or assorto. 

Avvenire, to arrive, v. venire. 

Benedire, to bless, v. dire. 

Circonvenire, to circumvent, v. ue?izVe. 

Comparire, to appear before, v. ap- 

XHirire. 

Construire or costruire, to construct, 

V. instruire. 

Contraddire, to contradict, v. dire. 

Contravvenire, to contravene, v. ve- 

nire. 

Convenire, to agree, v. venire. 

Coprire, to cover, v. aprire. 

Cucire, to sew pres. cucio, cuci, &c. .; 

; 

imper. citci, cucia, cuciamo, cucite, 

cuciano; pres. subj. che io cucia, 

&c. 

Dire, to tell, to say pres. dico, dici 

; 

or dì, dice, diciamo, dite, dicono ; 

imp. diceva, &.C.; pret. dissi, dicesti, 

disse, dicemmo, diceste, dissero; 

imper. dì, dica, diciamo, dite, dicano; 

pres. subj. che io dica, &c. ; 

ger. dicendo; part, past, detto. 

Discopìrire, to discover, v. aprire. 

Disconvenire, to disagree, v. venire. 

Discucire, to un sew, v. cucire. 

Disdire, to deny, v. dire. 

Divenire, to become, v. venire. 

Empire, to fill ; pres. empio, empi, 

empie, empiamo, empite, emjnono ; 

imper. empi, empia, empiamo, em- 

piite, empiano; pres. subj. che io 

empia, &c. 

Escire, to go out, v. uscire. 

Gire, to go, p., has only the following 

tenses : gite, you go ; imp. giva or 

gia, givamo, givano or giano ; jiret. 

gisti, gì orgia, gimmo, giste, girono ; 

imper. gite, go ; che gissi, &c., that 

I might go gito, gone. 

; 

Instruire, to instruct pret. instrvssi, 

; 

instruisii, &c., or regular, instruii 

&c. part, past, instruito and in- 

; 

strutto. 

Interdire, to prohibit, v. dii-e. 

Intervenire, to intervene, v. venire. 

Ire, to go, p., has only ite, go ; iva, 

ho went ; ivano, they went ; iremo, 

we shall go ; irete, you will go ; 

iranno, they will go ; ito, gone.* 

3Ialedire, to curse, v. dire. 

Morire, to die pres. muojo or moro 

; 

ìli poetry muori, ; muore or more, 

muojamo or moriamo, morite, mvojono; 

fut. morirò or morrò, &c. ; 

imper. muori or mori, muoja or 

mora, muojamo or moriamo, ino- 

rile, muojano or morano ; 

jircs. 

Bubj. che io ìnuoja, mvoja, muoja 

or mora, muojamo or moriamo, mo- 

* Ire and (]ire are the same verb ; the letter g being added in some instances for the sake 

of a better aound. The prosaic verb for to go is andare. Ancient writers have made use ol 

gire and ire in their prose writings also.

Ili IRREGULAR VERBS. 

riate, muojano or muorano; cond. 

morirei or morrei, &c. ; part, morto. 

Offrire, to offer, v. aprire. 

Olire, to smell, p., has only imp. 

oliva, olivi, oliva, olivano. 

Pervenire, to attain, v. venire. 

Predire, to predict, v. dire. 

Prevenire, to prevent, v. venire. 

Provenire, to proceed from, v. venire. 

Bedire or riedere, to return. This 

verh, introduced in poetry, has 

only riedi, thou returnest; riede, 

he returns. 

Riapparire, to reappear, v. apparire. 

Riaprire, to open again, v. aprire. 

Ribenedire, to bless again, v. dire. 

Ricoprire, to cover again, v. co- 

2)rire. 

Ridire, to say again, v. dire. 

Riescire, to succeed, v. riuscire. 

Rinvenire, to find again, v. venire. 

Risalire, to ascend again, v. salire. 

Risovvenire, to recollect, v. venire. 

Rivenire, to return, v. venire. 

Riuscire, to succeed, v. uscire. 

Salire, to ascend ; pres. salgo, sali, 

sale, saliamo or sagliamo, salite 

salgono ; imper. sali, salga, saliamo 

or sagliamo, salite, salgano ; pres 

subj. che io salga, salga, salga, 

saliamo or .sof/liamo, saliate or 

sagliate, salgano. This verb, as 

well as its compounds risalire, 

assalire, soprassalire, may be con 

jugated also like unire. 

Scomparire, to disappear, v. coin 

parire. 

Sconvenire, to be unbecoming, v 

venire. 

Scoprire, to discover, v. coprire. 

Scucire, to unscw, v. cucire. 

Sdrucire, to rip up, v. cucire. 

Seguire, to iollow ; pres. sieguo, 

siegui, siegue, seguiamo, seguite, 

siegiiono ; imper. siegui, siegua, 

seguiamo, seguite, sieguxino ; pres. 

subj. che io siegua, siegua, siegua, 

seguiamo, seguite, sieguano. This 

verb is also conjugated regularly. 

Seirpellire, to bury ; part, past, 

seppellito or sepolto. 

Soffrire, to suffer, like servire, but in 

the pret. soffrii or soffersi; part. 

past, sofferto. 

Sopravvenire, to happen, to come 

unexpectedly, v. venire. 

Sovvenire, to succour, v. venire. 

Sovvenirsi, to remember, ref., v. 

tênire. 

Svenire, to faint away, v. venire. 

Udire, to boar ; pres. odo, odi, ode, 

udiamo, udite, odono; imper. odi, 

oda, udiamo, udite, odano; pres. 

subj. che io oda, oda, oda, udiamo, 

udiate, odano. 

Venire, to come ; pi'cs. vengo, vieni, 

viene, veniamo, venite, vengono; 

pret. venni, venisti, &c. ; fut. verro; 

imper. vieni, venga, veniamo, 

venite, vengano ; pres. subj. che io 

venga, venga, venga, veniamo, 

veniate, vengano; cond. verrei; 

part, past, venuto. 

Uscire or escire, to go out ; pres. 

esco, esci, esce, usciamo, uscite, 

escono; imp. usciva, &c. ; pret. 

uscii, uscisti, uscì, &c. ; imper. 

esci, esca, usciamo, uscite, escano; 

pres. subj. che io esca, esca, esca, 

usciamo, usciate, escano; imp. 

subj. che io uscissi, &c. ; cond. 

uscirei, &c. ; gcr. uscendo ; part. 

past, uscito.

TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERPS. 119 

TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 

Verbs are divided into two classes—namely, transitive and 

intransitive. 

223. When the verb expresses an action passing from an actor 

to an object, it is transitive, and forms its compound tenses with 

the auxiliary avere, to have. Ex. 

judge has condemned the mur- 

II giudice lia condannato alla viarie \ The 

il reo dômicidio 

Il cacciatore ha ucc 

un cervo, 

derer to death. 

The huntsman has killed a stajr. 

224. The passive form, which expresses an action suffered by 

the subject, is formed, as in English, by conjugating the auxi- 

liary essere with the past participle of a transitive verb. Ex. 

Sono stati accusati di viltà, 

La vostra costanza è alfine pre- 

They have 

ai-dice. 

been accused of cowmiata. 

Your constancy is at last rewaj-ded. 

Il monarca die 

mente amato, 

è temuto è rara- The monarch who is feared is seldom 

beloved. 

225. When the verb expresses an action confined to the actor, 

it is intransitive, and forms its compound tenses with the auxi- 

liarv essere. Ex. 

E venuto a jâssare il mese della 

vendemmia alla campagna, 

Quando le foglie sono cadute, 

Sono partiti senza venire a dirci 

addio. 

Sono arrivati col battello a vapore, 

He has come to spend the vintage 

month in the country. 

When the leaves have fallen. 

They have gone away without taking 

leave of us. 

They have come by the steamer. 

226. The following verbs, although intransitive, form their 

compound tenses, like transitive verbs, with avere, as in Italian 

there is an object understood, without, however, any passage of 

the action from the subject taking place : 

Camminare 

Passeggiai 

Cenare, 

Desinare, 

Pranzare. 

Dormire, 

Gridare, 

Peccare, 

Piangere, 

1} 

to walk. 

to sup. 

[-to dine. 

to sleep, 

to cry. 

to sin. 

to weep. 

— 

Regnare, 

Ridere, 

Riposare, 

Sbadigliare, 

Sorridere, 

Stranutire, 

Tossire, 

Vegliare, 

Viaggiare, 

to reign. 

to laugh, 

to rest, 

to yawn, 

to smile, 

to sneeze, 

to cough, 

to watch, 

to travel.

120 TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 

227. The following verbs may form their compound tenses 

with the auxiliary essere or orere ; with essere when a state of 

being is denoted, with avere when an action is expressed : 

Avendo corso dietro aU'amico tuo, B. Sentendo Arriguccio esser corso dietro 

lìoberto, T>. 

Having run after thy friend. 

La febbre ha cessato di esser pericolosa. 

The fever has ceased to be dangerous. 

Abbiamo dimorato nella stessa casa, 

Wo have lived in the same house. 

Questo accidente ha cresciuto il male, 

This accident has increased the malady. 

Io ho fuggito i miei nemici, 

1 have fled my enemies. 

Abbiamo passato il teatro, 

We bave passed the theatre. 

liJgli ha salito or montato le scale, 

He has gone up stairs. 

Abbiamo sceso il monte, 

We have descended the mountain. 

Abbiamo vissuto giorni felici, 

We have lived happy days. 

Abbiamo seduto all'ombra di un platano, 

We bave sat under the shade of a 

plane-tree. 

EXERCISE L. 

— 

Hearing tluat Arriguccio had run 

after Eobert. 

La febbre è cessata sid far del giorno, 

Tlie fever lias ceased towards daybreak. 

NclVisola di Circe essendo alcun 

tempo dimorato, 

Having lived some time in the island 

of Circe. 

II male è molto cresciuto, 

The disease has much increased. 

Io son fuggito dalla jìrigione, 

I have fled from prison. 

Siamo passati dalla posta, 

We have cnlled at the post-office. 

Egli Ò salito or montato sulla col- 

lina, 

He lias ascended the hill 

Sono sceso da cavallo, 

I have dismounted from horseback. 

Son vissuti insieme felicemente, 

They have lived together happily. 

Eravate seduti sulVerlia, 

You were seated on the grass. 

Aristophanes having died in battle, it was ordered that 

Aristofane (225) 

Athenian poets should not go to war.—Wc have ascended 

Ateniese {72) {dovessero) (227) 

the highest mountains of Scotland.—We have lived in America 

(227) 

three years, and have received much kindness from the Anieri- 

gentilezza p. 

cans.—They have grown so much (that) they were not recog- 

crescere (74) ind. 3

TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 121 

nised.—Marat was killed by Charlotte Corday, who had 

uccidere irr. 

come to Paris from Caen for the 

Carlotta (225) 

purpose.—We have all arrived 

safe and 

(a questo fine.) 

sound.—Adrian had sculptured 

(225) 

on his tomb, " He 

-salvo '^sano. Adirano fare inf. 

has died on account of the number of his physicians." 

(225) irr. a cagione medico. 

From Greece poetry has passed into Italy.—Eepublics have " 

(27) Grecia (225) in (28) Repubblica 

almost always fallen from liberty into slavery.—Since the founquasi 

(225) schiavila. Da 

dation of Constantinople, the glory of the Eoman empire has 

Costantinopoli 

day by day decreased.— I have slept while you have 

(di giorno in giorno) declinare. (226) mentre 

watched.—We venerate the dead, because their virtues alone 

(226) (222) p. solo 

survive (to) them ; the vices which were once blended with 

sopravvivere ind. 2 (96) misto a 

their virtues have died with themselves. 

(225) 

loro. 

REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL VERBS. 

228. Reflected verbs are conjugated in all their tenses with 

the conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, si in the singular, and ci, vi, si 

in the plural. The compound tenses of these verbs are formed 

in Italian with essere. Ex. 

INFINITIVE. 

Divertirsi^ to amuse one's-self. 

Divertendosi, amusing one's-self. 

Essersi divertito, to have amused one's-self. 

Essendosi divertito, having amused one's-self. 

I 

—

122 REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL VERBS. 

Mi diverto, 

Ti diverti, 

Si diverte, 

Ci divertiamo, 

Vi divertite. 

Si divertono. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PAST INDEFINITE. 

I amuse myself, 

thou amusest thyself, 

he amuses himself, 

we amuse ourselves, 

you amuse yourselves, 

they amuse themselves. 

j\Ii sono divertito, &c., I have amused myself. 

Non ti divertire, 

Divertiti, 

Si diverta, 

Divertiamoci, 

Divertitevi, 

Si divertano, &c., 

IMPERATIVE. 

do not thou amuse thyself, 

amuse thyself. 

let him amuse himself. 

let us amuse ourselves. 

amuse yourselves. 

let them amuse themselves. 

229. When the verb in the reflective form is used reciprocally, 

it is conjugated with the pronouns ci, vi, si, and forms the com- 

pound tenses with essere. Ex. 

Noi ci vediamo, I Wo see one another. 

Voi vi vedete, You see one another. 

They see one another. 

Eglino si vedono, &c., | 

230. The English reciprocal pronouns, one another, each other, 

may be expressed in Italian by Vun l'altro, or scamhievohnente, 

mutually ; reciprocamente, reciprocally. Ex. 

Noi ci siamo aiutati l'un l'altro, | 

Voi vi siete amati scambievolmente, 

Eglino si sono offesi reciprocamente, 

EXERCISE LI. 

We have helped one another. 

You have loved one another. 

They have offended one another. 

The demigods of the ancients were men who had distinguished 

(semidei) (228) distinto 

themselves by extraordinary courage and virtue.—The Athii- 

2)cr straordinario

REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL VERES. 123 

nians prided themselves on their wit and learning.—He 

gloriare di spirito sapere 

reproached hiroself with having neglected to perform his 

rimproverare di inf. trascurare adempiere 

promise.—One has a right to enjoy one's-self after having done 

* 

inf. 

one's duty.—She sang Spanish songs, accompanying herself 

(156) dovere Spagnuolo accompagnare 

on the guitar.—They have fought a duel, and they have 

con chitarra (228) battersi in duello (229) 

wounded one another.—Men should love and help each other. 

ferire (230) {dovrebbero) (230) 

—Those who possess much are not so rich as those who content 

(165) irr. (Ill) 

themselves with little.—Dress yourself as quickly as possible. 

di 

We should accustom ourselves 

[il più. presto possibile) 

to everything.—When we 

{Dovremmo) avvezzare a 

blame ourselves, people believe more than we say, but when 

biasimare gente s. 

we praise ourselves, people believe 

(107) 

less than 

(110) 

we say.—They 

have fatigued themselves too much. 

(228) stancare (74) 

231. Many intransitive verbs in Italian are reflected, which 

are not so in English, as the following : 

Addormentarsi, to fall asleep 

to hasten. 

' 

iSpici 

Alza 

Levarsi, y''^''- 

Ammoqliarsi, ) . . -, 

Maritarsi, '} to get marned. 

Annoiarsi, to get tired. 

rsi, to lean. 

— 

Ajìprossiìnarsi, ) 

Accostarsi, 

ô approach. 

Y 

Avvicinarsi, 

Arrendersi, to sun-ender. 

Astenersi, to abstain. 

Attristarsi, to get sad. 

Avanzarsi, to advance. 

Avviarsi, to go forward. 

Bagnarsi, to bathe, to get wet. 

Compiacersi, to take pleasure. 

Contentarsi, to be satisfied. 

"ì 

Crucciarsi, 

Adirarsi, > to get angry. 

Arrabbiarsi, I 

—

124 REFLECTED AKD RECIPROCAL VERBS. 

Dilettarsi, to delight. 

Dimenticarsi, Ì .„ p.. . 

^° ^^'êt. 

Scordarsi, \ | 

Dolersi, to grieve. 

Fidarsi, to trust. 

Imbarcarsi, to embark. 

Impadronirsi, to get possession of. 

IiifaMidirsi, to get weary. 

Ingegnarsi, to endeavour. 

Innamorarsi, to fall in love. 

Lamentarsi, to complain. 

Maravigliarsi, to wonder. 

'jrst, to take offence. 

Opporsi, to 

Pentirsi, to repent. 

««"*•"•. {;:rpi;'.r 

Rallegrarsi, to rejoice. 

Ricordarsi, to remember. 

Riposarsi, to rest. 

Rompersi, to break. 

Sentirsi bene, male to feel well, 

unwell. 

Svegliarsi, to awake. 

Vantarsi, to boast. 

Vergognarsi, to be ashamed. 

EXERCISE LII. 

Epic poets delight in depicting battles.—Since you 

«iescr/yere inf. Poiché 

e/;»/co (231) (34) 

have sincerely repented, I forgive you.—We should often be 

— 

(228) (231) 

ashamed of our finest actions, if the world saw the motives which 

(231) bello sub. 2 

produced them.—Narcissus fell in love with his own beauty. 

Narciso (231) di (156) 

I awoke in the midst of the night.—When we are old, 

(231) 

we remember with pleasure (of) the days of our 

(57) vecchio 

youth.—Do not 

(231) 

(jioventit 

forget to come to-morrow early. —Eepenting of his project, 

(231) {di buon ora) (231) 

he did not carry it into effect.—A servant ran to tell (to) 

porre irr. in esecuzione irr. 

Peter Cornelius that the house was on fire : Speak about it 

Pietro {in fiamme) (138) 

to ray wife, answered the poet, without rising from his desk, 

irr. (231) inf. scritloio 

or awakening from the meditation in which he was absorbed. 

inf. irr. 

Although laden with favours he always complains, and seems 

ricolm.0 di (231) 

to take pleasure in boasting of his own ingratitude towards for- 

(231) (231) verso

IMPERSONAL VERBS. 125 

tunc.—A Roman who bad separated from bis wife, said to bis 

(228) separarsi 

friends wbo were astonished at it : You see my shoe ; is it not 

sorjjreso (138) scarpa 

well made ? does it not fit well ? But do you perceive where 

irr. stare (231) 

it hurts me ?—Frederick the First, called Eed beard, 

* far male Federico idi) nominare (72) barba 

and Alexander the Great died after having bathed in a small 

Alessandro 

river of Armenia. 

(228) inf. (231) 

fiume Armenia. 

IMPEESONAL VERBS. 

232. Impersonal verbs are, properly speaking, only conjugated 

in the third person singular ; but in Italian, when followed by a 

noun in the plural^ they are used in the third person plural. In 

this case they lose their characteristic of impersonal, as the noun 

that follows them becomes their subject. The following are 

some of the most in use in Italian : 

Piove, it rains. 

Pioviggina, it drizzles. 

Basta, it is sufficient, enough. 

Albeggia, it dawns. 

Annotta, it grows dark. 

Balena, { -.^^^^^^^^.^ 

— 

Accade, 

Avviene, ^ it happens. 

Interviene, 

Pare, it appears. 

Si addice, it becomes. 

Fa di mestiere, "| 

Conviene, ît is necessary. 

Nevica, it snows. è d'uopo. 

Grandina, it hails. Bisogna, it is needful. 

Tuona, it thunders. Disdice, it is unbecoming. 

Gela, it freezes. Sembra, it seems. 

Digela, it thaws. 

233. The compound tenses of impersonal verbs are furmed 

with essere, and the pronoun it is generally not translated. Ex. 

E piovuto tutta la notte, 1 It 

È accaduto ; è nevicato, It \ 

has rained all night. 

has happened ; it has snowed. 

234. The English expressions one must, we must, are rendered 

in Italian by the impersonal verbs conviene, bisogna, with the 

following verb in the infinitive. 

Ex.

12 fi IMPERSONAL VRRHS. 

Jjisogaa. perdonare le offese, 

Adesso dieci siamo divertiti, convien 

lavorare, 

One must forgive offeucea. 

Now that we have played, wc must 

work. 

235. But when the subject, instead of one, we, is any other 

word, the verb which follows conviene or bisogna must be in the 

subjunctive, preceded by che, Ex. 

Bisogna ch'io vi dica la mia opinione, 

Conviene che il malato segua i consigli 

del medico, 

Quando il contadino ha arato il 

campo, bisogna che lo semini se 

vuol raccogliere. 

I must teli you my opinion. 

A patient must follow the doctor's 

advice. 

When the husbandman has ploughed 

his field, he must sow his grain if 

he wishes to reap. 

236. Some verbs are conjugated impersonali^/ with the conjunctive 

pronouns in the dative case. Ex. 

Mi dispiace che, I am sorry that. Ci dispiace, we are sorry, 

Ti dispiace, thou art sorry. Vi dispiace, you are sorry. 

Gli dispiace, he is sorry. 

Dispiace loro, they are sorry. 

Le dispiace, she is sorry. 

Mi piacciono lepersone istruite, 

he piace molto la lettura dei classici 

Italiani, 

Non gli è riuscito di persuadermi, 

Ci è paruto troppo caro, 

Ahhisofjnano loro dei guanti. 

Mi abbisogna un paio di stivali. 

EXERCISE LIII. 

I like well-informed persons. 

She likes very much to read the 

Italian classics. 

He has not succeeded in persuading 

me. 

We thought it too dear. 

They want gloves. 

I want a pair of boots. 

It is not enough to speak correctly, one must also speak pru- 

(232) (•234) anche 

dently.—How do you like this town ?—It rains, thunders, and 

(236) (232) 

lightens, all at once.—This dress becomes you very well. 

{al tempo stesso.) vestito (232) 

Do you think (that) it freezes now?— It is necessary to study 

{22,&) parere sub. 1 (232) 

mythology in order to understand the classics. — It is not 

mitologia classico. 

sufficient to love virtue ; one must also practise it.—You must 

(232) f234^ (235) 

—

IMPERSONAL VERBS. 127 

buy note-paper, pens, and ink.—Despots abhor progress, and it 

(15) 

suffices for a man to be the friend of truth and science, to 

(232) che sub. 1 per 

(draw down) the persecution of those enemies of humanity. 

attirarsi 

What has happened to you ?—Michelet's style is perhaps more 

(182) (233) stile 

florid than is becoming (to) the severe character of historical 

fiorito (107) (232) sub. 1 storico 

composition.—It happens often that we only wish for a thing 

(232) 

because it appears difficult to be obtained.—In the life of a man 

a (214) 

there are two cardinal points which insure his happiness or 

cardinale^ ' (177) assicurare 

his unhappiness : his birth and his marriage ; it is not enough 

* * matrimonio (232) 

for birth to be happy, marriage must be so too.—They have not 

che sub, 1 (235) la pure. 

succeeded in freeing their country from a foreign yoke. 

(236) di inf. '^straniero ^giogo. 

OBSEEVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE. 

237. The compound form, so much used in English, / am 

speaking^ I was speaking^ is not admissible in Italian, and must 

be expressed with the simple tenses of the verb in the present 

participle, io parlo, I speak ; io parlava, I spoke. Ex. 

Ella scrive al suo avvocato, I 

To ricamava un fazzoletto, I 

She 

is writing to her lawyer. 

— 

I was embroidering a handkerchief. 

238. When the English compound form expresses progression 

or continuation, and represents an action as still iiicomplete, the 

auxiliary to be may be expressed in Italian by the verbs andare, 

venire^ and stare. Andare and venire are used with verbs that

128 OBSERVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE. 

express motion and progression, but stare can only be used to 

describe a progressive action denoting repose, rest. Ex. 

Andava errando tutta la notte per He was wandering all night in the 

la foresta, 

forest. 

Ella stava disegnando, 

She was drawing. 

Il fior che intatto io mi venia ser- The flower that I was preserving 

bando, Ariosto. 

untouched for myself. 

239. Venire* and andare may be used instead of essere in the 

simple tenses of passive verbs, but in tbe compound tenses essere 

must be used. Ex. 

Egli vien lodato. 

Egli è stato lodato, not Egli è venuto 

lodato, 

Il vero merito va congiunto colla 

modestia, 

240. Idioms formed with Essere 

Essere in grado di, 

u uuono 

lo di, '\ 

Essere a mal termine, 

Essere all'ordine. 

Essere un poco di buono. 

' 

Essere in procinto di, 

Essere per, 

Esseìê sul punto di, ) 

Essere in buon concetto, \ 

Essere in cattivo concetto, j" 

Essere a grado, 

Essere d'accordo. 

Non sono in grado di oiìporre lunga 

e seria resistenza. 

Se vi e a grado, i^rendetelo, 

EXERCISE LIV. 

He is praised. 

He has been praised. 

True worth is accompanied by modesty. 

To bave it in one's power, or 

to be able. 

To be in a critical position. 

To be in readiness. 

To be good for nothing. 

To be on the point of. 

To have a good or bad cha- 

racter. 

To like, to feel inclined. 

To agree. 

They are not able to oppose a long 

and serious resistance. 

If you like it, take it 

It is not always in our power to extinguish our passions, but 

(240) 

estinguere 

* In Italian, the verb venire is used to translate to go, in speaking of 

going where another person is, or of accompanying those to whom we speak. 

Verrò da voi questa sera, I will go to see you this evening ; 

lid Continente, We will go with you to the Continent. 

Verremo con voi

OBSERVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE. 129 

we can (at least) govern and regulate them.—The enemy M-as 

irr. almeno (128) (238) 

examining our fortress.—He was on the point of publishing a 

(240) 

work.—The interest that we receive is 

pubblicare 

doubling our capital. 

opera (238) raddoppiare 

—History proves that philosophers have always been preceded 

filosofo (239) precedere 

by poets and painters.—Mediocrity is always punished with 

mediocrità (238) 

oblivion.—Some were gathering flowers in the meadows, 

dimenticanza. (176) (237) cogliere prato 

others were making wreaths and nosegays for the approaching 

(237) ghirlanda mazzetto vicino 

ball all were looking busy and happy.—I will go with 

; ' 

(237) sembrare attivo 

(239*) 

von to the end of the avenue.—I was listening with great plea- 

viale (238) 

sure to an amusing discussion while you were dancing.—It is 

* dilettevole mentre 

not in my power to do you this favour.— All nations and re- 

(240) (187) 

ligions agree in giving (to) music and poetry a place in Para- 

(240) art. inf. posto 

dise. 

— 

lands. 

Ossian has always been reputed the Homer of the High- 

Omero 

241. When the preposition to precedes an infinitive, which 

depends on the verbs to have or to be, it is expressed by a or 

da. Ex. 

Ho a. fare qualche visita, 

Ho (la parlarvi di affari, 

Non è uomo da seguire il cattivo 

esempio, 

.VoH c'è tempo da perdere, 

ì, à-A presumersi, 

I bave to pay some visits. 

I have to speak to you on business. 

He is not a man to follow bad esample. 

Tbcre is no time to lose. 

It is to be supposed.

130 ODSERVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE. 

242. When the infinitive depending on essere is preceded by 

an adjective^ alone, or accompanied by a noun, to is expressed by 

a. Ex. 

Èfacile a credersi, 

Questi fiori son belli a vedere, 

Quest'uva non è buona a mangiare, 

It is easy to be believed. 

These flowers are beautiful to look at. 

These grapes are not good to eat. 

243. When the auxiliaries to have and to be convey an idea of 

obligation, they are often expressed by dovere. Ex. 

Devo vedere il medico oggi, 

I 

Dobbiamo scrivere delle lettere avanti 

pranzo, 

Doveva andare in città, 

Dovete pagare i vostri debiti, 

244. Idioms formed with Avere :- 

Avere a mente, a memoria, 

Avere a mano, or in pronto, 

Aver caro, 

Averla con uno, 

Aver caldo, freddo. 

Aver cervello, giudizio, 

Aver fretta, 

Aver fame, sete, sonno, 

Aver fama, voce di, 

Aver luogo. 

Aver l'intenzione, 

Aver male. 

Aver paura. 

Avere piacere. 

Aversela per, or a male, 

Abbiatemi per iscusato, 

Aver ragione. 

Aver torto. 

Aver voglia. 

Aver buona cera, 

Aver cattiva cera, 

I bave to see the doctor to-day. 

We have to write letters before 

dinner. 

I was to go to town. 

You are to pay your debts. 

To remember. 

To have a thing at hand, or in 

readiness. 

To be happy. 

To be angry with a person. 

To be warm, cold. 

To act prudently, to be sen- 

sible. 

To be in a hurry. 

To be hungry, thirsty, sleepy. 

To have the reputation of. 

To take place. 

To have a mind, to intend. 

To feel pain. 

To be afraid. 

To be glad. 

To take offence at. 

Pray excuse me. 

To be right. 

To be wrong. 

To wish. 

To look healthy. 

To look unhealthy.

ORSERVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE. 131 

EXERCISE LV. 

There are many diseases difficult to cure, because their origin 

is not known 

malattia (242) 

(of them).—It is not to be 

* 

denied that 

(214) co7ioscere (138) (241) (214) 

tlie inhabitants of a rich and fertile soil are (not) often inpaese 

sub. 1 

dolent.—You have nothing to fear from these men.—Modera- 

(203) (241) (164) 

tion is to be desired in all things, and extremes are to be 

(241) (214) estremo 

blamed.—It is to be deplored that genius has not always been 

sub. 1 

devoted to the service of truth.—Those who think they are 

consacrare (173) 

always right are sure to be often in the wrong.—I 

(244) 

advise you 

(244) 

consigliare 

(as a) friend to be more prudent in future.—Do not be afraid 

da (244) (244) 

to censure at all times the profane scoffer, even although he 

should take offence at your 

beffardo anche quando 

reproof. —I have a mind to 

dovere sub. 2 (244) di rimprovero (244) 

go to Switzerland this year, and I would be very happy if you 

in Svizzera (244) 

accompanied me thither.—Our Italian friends are always cold, 

sub. 2 

even when we are very warm.—Some of us are hungry, some 

(176) (244) 

are thirsty, some are sleepy ; we are all in want of refreshment 

ristoro 

and rest.—What cause had you to be angry with me ?—Excuse 

motivo (244) 

me if I leave you, but I have to post those letters before 

(243) impostare 

noon, and I am in a great hurry.— Satirists and 

mezzo giorno (244) scrittore di satire 

historians have to tell the truth. 

(243) 

dire

132 ON MOODS AND TENSES. 

ON MOODS AND TENSES. 

The Infinitive Mood expresses an action in an indefinito 

manner, without any reference to time or person, and is often 

used substantively in Italian. Ex. 

Parlare, cantare, | 

To speak, to sing. 

II biscazzare è fonte di grandi sven- Gambling is a source of great misfor- 

tu7'e, ' 

tune. 

The Indicative Mood simply expresses or affirms an action. 

Ex. 

JSôi lavoriamo, we work. | N'oi studiamo, we study. 

The distinction made in using the imperfect and the preterite 

tenses requires particular attention. 

245. 1st, The Imperfect is used to express an action which 

remained still unfinished when another took place. Ex. 

1 Io vi scriveva quando voi entraste, 

E(fifa coronato quando era ancora 

I 

He was crowned when he was yet a 

fanciullo, I cliild. 

was writing to you when you entered. 

2d, To denote that the action of which we speak was habitual 

ox frequently repeated. Ex. 

Metastasio soleva dire, "mi costa 

meno di credere che di dubitare," 

Comparava Cicerone gli amici finti 

alle le rondini 

Metastasio used to say, " It costs me 

less to believe than to doubt." 

Cicero used to compare false friends 

to swallows. 

3d, To describe the qualities of persons or things ; 

the state or 

place in which they were in a time past, without defining the 

period of its duration. Ex. 

Francesco primo, lie di Francia, 

amava la r/loria, ed era di uno spirito 

cavalleresco. 

La Regina Elisabetta era vana e 

crudele, ma possedeva pure delle 

grandi qualità, 

Francis the First, King of France, 

loved glory, and had a chivalrous 

spirit. 

Queen Elizabeth was vain and cruel, 

but she also possessed great qua- 

lities. 

246. The Preterite is used in speaking of a past action, com- 

pleted at a period quite past, and of which no part remains unex- 

pired, so that this tense cannot be used in speaking of to-darj^ 

this week, this year. Ex.

Perdettero nella loro gioventù i geni- 

tori, 

Romolo fondò Roma, e uccise suo 

fratello, 

Licurgo fece uno stato che amo pia 

di ottocento anni, 

ON MOODS AND TENSES. 133 

Thcy lost their parents in tlieir 

youth. 

Romulus founded Eome, and killed 

his brother. 

Lycurgus established a state which 

lasted more than 800 years. 

247. The Past or Preterite Indefinite is used in speaking 

of & past action, without determining the time in which it hap- 

pened. Ex. 

Abbiamo dimorato un anno in 

Boemia, 

Mi ha mostrato una rara collezione 

di farfalle, 

We have resided a year in Bohemia. 

He showed me a rare collection of 

butterflies. 

It is also used when the action has taken place in a period of 

time not coriipletely elapsed. Ex. 

Io ho avuto un abboccamento questa 

mattina col console. 

Abbiamo pranzato oggi prima del 

solito. 

— 

I had an interview this morning v.-ith 

the consul. 

We dined to-day earlier than usual. 

EXERCISE LVI. 

When we lived near the sea, we bathed every day.— Ferdi- 

(245) (231) 

nand and Isabella reigned in Spain at the time that Co- 

(245) (28) Ispagna 

lumbus discovered America.—The Jews left Egypt under 

scoprire (246) (27) Ebreo Egitto 

the guidance of Moses.—I visited the tomb of Virgil last year 

condotta Mosè 

whilst I was at Naples.—The Greeks, in perception of the 

mentre (51) sensibilità 

beautiful, not only equalled but excelled all the nations of 

solo eguagliare sorpassare 

antiquity. Newton was born the same day that Galileo died, 

antichità nascere irr. 

as if nature did not wish to have any interval between these 

come sub. 2 framezzo 

two great minds.—To censure is easy, the difficulty lies in doing 

(34) stare inf.


better.— I read to-day Plato's remark, that hope is our dream 

(247) Platone osservazione sogno 

when we are awake.—Louis xv. was entering his carriage in 

sveglio (245) in carrozza 

the court of the palace of Versailles when Damiens at- 

corte (246) 

tempted to assassinate him.—War is like a law-suit, which 

tentare processo 

ruins even those who win. —The court of Louis 

rovinare pure (173) (175) guadagnare 

the Fourteenth was most brilliant, and in accordance with the 

(91) (115) brillante armonia 

taste of that monarch, who loved glory and magnificence in all 

gusto 

things, and surrounded himself with the greatest men of the 

circondare di (H^) 

age. 

tempo 

The Future represents an action as yet to come. Ex, 

Io passerò da voi domani, 

Noi andremo alla caccia delle heccacce 

verso la fine del mese, 

I will call on you to-morrow. 

We ai-e going to shoot woodcock at 

the end of the month. 

248. In English, ihe present of the indicative, when preceded 

by such words as when, quando ; if, se ; as soon as, tosto che, is 

used to express ti future action ; but in Italian the future must 

be employed. Ex. 

Quando verrete, sarete il hen venuto, 

Se tu crederai al mio consiglio, tu non 

uscirai oggi, 

Tosto che la posta arriverà, andremo 

a domandare se vi son lettere per 

noi. 

When you come, you shall be welcome. 

If you take my advice, you will not 

go out to-day. 

As soon as the post arrives, we will 

go and ask if there are letters for 

The Conditional expresses an action subject to a condition. 

Ex. 

Vi scriverei pia spesso se non fossi \ I would write to you oftcncr if I were 

tanto occupato, | not so busy.

ON MOODS A.ND TENSES. 135 

249. The future and the conditional are also employed in 

Italian to express douht^ uncertainty^ surprise. Ex. 

E sarà vero ? 

A\rk forse le sue ragioni, 

Can it be true ? 

He has perbaps bis reasons. 

Sarebbe il medico tornato ? 

Has tbe doctor returned ? 

250. The Imperative Mood commands, exhorts, entreats, and 

permits; the imperative has no first person singular, and when 

the second person singular is accompanied by a negative, it is 

rendered in Italian by the present of the infinitive. Ex. 

Non ini seccare, i 

Insegna alla tua sorellina Valfaheto, \ 

Do not tboii trouble me. 

Teach thy little sister the alphabet. 

EXERCISE LVII. 

I will send you some partridge and some woodcock if I 

pernice p. (55) beccaccia]). 

kill any.—When I have finished this drawing, I will go to 

(248) (138) (248) disegno 

the (post-ofiice).—Do not (thou) awake me before seven o'clock. 

posta (250) (95) 

—As soon as they arrive let me know (it).—If you come 

(248) fare (127) sapere (248) 

to-morrow to breakfast with us, I will show you a picture that 

my cousin has sent 

noi 

me from Italy.—Perhaps he 

quadro 

fears to disdi 

" 

Forse (249) 

please (to) his brother.—He has perhaps resolved to leave this 

country on account of his health.— If I had time, I would go 

a cagione sub. 2 

with you.— I will let you know as soon as we have decided to 

irr. 

fare sapere (248) irr. 

do it.—All that you undertake to do, do it well. 

intraprendere 

The Subjunctive is the mood of uncertainty, and is always 

preceded by another verb, expressed or understood, to which it 

is subordinate.


251. The subjunctive is used after any verb exj)ressiiig doubt, 

fear, wonder, wish, hope, surprise, admiration, command, or consent. 

Ex. 

Sembra che non siate contento, 

Comandò che attaccassero il nemico, 

Egli si maraviglia che gli uomini 

possano seguire il vizio, che sempre 

porta seco danno e sventura, 

Spero che ora siano convinti ? 

Benché lo scellerato qualche volta 

prosperi, non «'immaginate pero 

che sia felice. 

Permetto che voi andiate, 

Desiderate che io vada ? 

It appears you are not satisfied. 

He ordered that they should attack 

the enemy. 

He wonders that men can follow 

vice, which always brings misfortune 

and suffering. 

I hope they are convinced now ? 

Because the wicked man sometimes 

prospers, do not imagine that he 

is happy. 

I allow you to go. 

Do you desire me to go ? 

252. After an action in the superlative relative ; also after il 

solo, the only ; il primo, the first ; l'ultimo, the last ; chiunque, 

whoever ; qualunque, whatever. Ex. 

Edimiurgo è la più bella citta ch'io 

abbia mai veduta, 

L'esempio di una vita esemplare, è 

la miglior lezione che si posaa dare 

ai nostri simili, 

La verità è la sola cosa che non si 

alteri col tempo, 

Parlate, chiunque voi siate, 

Qualunque sia il vostro dolore, il 

tempo lo guarirà, 

Edinburgh is the most beautiful 

town I bave ever seen. 

The example of an exemplary life is 

the best lesson we can give to our 

fellow-men. 

Truth is the only thing which does 

not change with time. 

Speak, whoever you are. 

Whatever may be your grief, time 

will cure it. 

253. After the conjunction se, if, whether, the imperfect of 

the subjunctive must be used, when the sentence implies doubt, 

condition. Ex. 

Oh, se io avessi la mia penna in 

bocca ! esclamo un poeta il quale 

tartagliava. 

Se Vira non vi accecasse, 

Egli parlo come se dubitasse della 

vostra sincerità. 

Oh, if I had my pen in my mouth ! 

exclaimed a poet who stammered. 

If passion did not blind you. 

He spoke as if he doubted your sincerity. 

254. The subjunctive is required after quando, ove, dove, when 

these words are used instead of se. Ex. 

Quando non vi dispiaccia, io mi varrì) 

del vostro nome. 

Ove 27 vogliate, 

If you do not object, I will make use 

of your name. 

If you wish it.


255. When the relative pronoun refers to a noun having a 

negative before it, the verb following must be in the subjunctive. 

Ex. 

Non conosco alcuno che sia più or- I know nobody who is more proud 

goglioso di lui, than he. 

Non c'è donna che sia piU cortese There is not a woman more kind 

di lei, than she. 

256. The subjunctive is used after various corijunctions and 

adverbs, which imply condition or uncertainty ; such as quan- 

tunque., benché., although ; purché., provided that ; finche., until ; 

accioche, in order that ; quand'anche, even although, and several 

others. Quantunque and benché also govern the indicative when 

the idea expressed is positive, and in no way doubtful. Ex. 

Benché ella sia la più potente regina 

della terra, 

Quantunque io abbia sperimentata 

molte volte la sua generosità, 

Purclìè non vi scordiate, 

Finché non abbiate jrrove più certe, 

Quand'anche no7i riusciste, 

Benché non furto è il mio. Tasso. 

EXERCISE LVIII. 

Although she is the most powerful 

queen in the world. 

Although I have many times experienced 

his generosity. 

Provided you do not forget. 

Until you have surer proofs. 

Even if you did not succeed. 

iVlthough the theft is nut mine. 

The first who discovered the circulation of the blood was 

(252) 

Cesalpino, a Tuscan, although Harvey, an Englishman, was 

(38) Toscano (256) 

the first who proclaimed the discovery (of it).—If Italy were 

(252) proclamare (138) (253) 

united and free, what a powerful state she would be.—It appears 

(183) (251) 

that all nations like to boast of a glorious origin, and even if 

amare (231) a«c7;e(254) 

history does not confirm their pretensions, they boldly invoke 

fable.—Biante said, " we should 

arditamente 

live with our friends as if 

favola. {dovremmo) come{25'ò) 

they were to become our enemies ;" but Aristotle says, " we 

dovere * divenire Aristotele 

K


should treat our enemies as if they were to become our friends." 

—Aspire to perfection, whatever may be the position in which 

Aspirare (252) 

fate has placed you.—The only power which can support o, 

fato irr. (252) potere 

monarch is the love of his subjects.—The last person who could 

suddito (252) 

influence my decision.—Constantinople, seen from the sea, pre- 

sents the most enchanting view that I have ever seen. 

incantevole [colpo d'occhio) (252) mai 

—Forgive in order that you may be forgiven.—If men were 

(256) potere irr. (253) 

all good, they would all be happy.—I have found nobody who 

can teach me Chinese. 

(255) irr. Chinese. 

(202) 

257. According to the idea conveyed by the first or governing 

verb, the subordinate verb may be used either in the indicative 

or the subjunctive. When certainty is expressed, the indicative 

may be employed ; on the contrary, the subjunctive is required 

when uncertainty or doult is denoted. Ex. 

Credo che Vanima è immortale, 

Credo che sia ancora a Parigi, 

So che è giunto in città, 

I believe that the soul is immortal. 

T think he is still in Paris. 

I know he is come to town. 

Non so se sia in /scozia, I do not know if ho is in Scotland. 

258. The future and the conditional, when preceded by an 

expression denoting uncertainty, may be replaced, the first by 

the present, and the second by the imperfect of the subjunctive. 

Ex. 

Temo che non venga or verrà jtrima 

della fine del mese. 

Noi sjyeravumo che ritornaste or ritornereste, 

I fear he will not come till the end 

of the month. 

We hoped that you would return. 

259. In Italian, the subjunctive is often employed in place of 

the infinitive. Ex.

Dite al cameriere che mi svegli or 

di svegliarmi di buon ora, 

E inutile che lo preghiate, or di pregarlo, 


Tell the servant to awake me earlj. 

It is useless to entreat him. 

260. The English expressions, were I to, had /, &c., are ren- 

dered in Italian, the first by se, with the following verb in the 

imperfect of the subjunctive, the second by se avessi, &c. Ex. 

Se noi vi pregassimo, 

Se eglino studiassero, 

Se egli avesse avuto ])rudenza, 

Se voi ne aveste parlato, la 

Were we to entreat you. 

Were they to study. 

Had he had prudence. 

Had you spoken of it. 

261. The tense in which the subjunctive should be used, is 

determined by the preceding verb on which it depends. After 

the present and future of the indicative, the jyresent of the subjunctive 

is generally used. Ex. 

Voglio che me lo diate, 

Vi loderò purché lo meritiate. 

I wish you to give it to me. 

I will praise you, provided you deserve 

it. 

After the imperfect, preterite, or conditional, we use the im- 

perfect of the subjunctive to express a present or future action ; 

but we use the pluperfect to denote the past. Ex. 

Voleva cKio gli dicessi, 

Sperava che voi riusciste, 

Avrei voluto che voi foste venuto la 

settimana, scorsa, 

EXERCISE LIX. 

He wished I would tell him. 

I hoped you would have succeeded. 

I would have liked you had come 

last week. 

It is supposed that the city of Venice owes its origin to the 

(214) irr. Venezia irr. 

incursions of the barbarians, which forced the inhabitants of Padua, 

barbaro Padova 

and of the neighbouring towns, to take refuge amongst some 

circonvicino {a refugiarsi) fra 

rocks and islands of the Adriatic, where they might live in 

scoglio Adriatico potere 

safety. —I believe that virtue is preferable to wealth, 

sicurezza (257) ricchezza 

although men do not act as if they thought so.— He ordered 

(256) agire (253) così (261)

140 OM MOODS AND TENSES. 

US not to leave the house.—I would not hesitate to write if I 

(259) esitare (253) 

knew their address.—You would forget the offence if you really 

sapere indirizzo 

forgave him.—The Indians who worship no God believe that 

Indiano adorare (202) (257) 

he exists.—Were you less rash, you would commit fewer 

(260) 

precipitoso 

blunders.—Had I not known you, I would not have intrusted 

(57) sbaglio (260) confidare 

to you this secret. 

The Present Participle ends in undo for the first conjuga- 

tion, and in endo for the other two, and is invariable. Ex. 

Cantando, singing. I Credendo, believing. I Udendo, hearing. 

Cominciando, beginning. ( Cadendo, felling. | Sentendo, feeling. 

262. When the English present participle is preceded by a 

preposition^ it is translated in Italian by the infinitive^ and by the 

compound of the infinitive if preceded by the prepositions dopo^ 

after ; per* for. Ex. 

II giudicare senza conoscere è presunzione, 

Dopo aver passeggiato per due ore, 

ci riposammo. 

Furono promossi per avere agito 

cosi valorosamente. 

To judge without knowing is presumption. 

After walking two bours, we rested. 

They were promoted for acting so 

bravely. 

263. After the prepositions m, o?i, or hy, the present participle 

may either be translated literally, the preposition being omitted, 

or be expressed by the infinitive^ preceded by the prepositions 

in, C071, a, more commonly accompanied by the article nel, col, 

al. Ex. 

* The participle whicb follows êr is translated by the compound of the 

infinitive, only when a past action is expressed, and the compound participle 

may be used in English : Era lodato per averlo fatto, he was praised for 

iloJug, or for having done so.


Quavio tempo si perde facendo or How much time one loses in paying 

nel far visite, visits ! 

All'udire il canto delVusignolo, On hearing the nightingale's song. 

Vi e più piacere nel donare che nel There is more pleasure in giving 

ricevere, than in receiving. 

Omero parlando or nel parlar del In speaking of the sea, Homer calls 

mare, lo chiama un fiume, it a river. 

264. The present participle, when used as a noun in English, 

is expressed in Italian by the infinitive with the definite article, 

or by a noun. Ex. 

La stampa yi< inventata nel dècimoquinto 

secolo, 

Il sorgere ed il tramontar del sole, 

Il suo cantare or canto è dolce, 

Printing was invented in the fifteenth 

century. 

The rising and setting of the sun. 

Her singing is sweet. 

265. When, in English, a present participle is governed in the 

accusative by another verb, it is translated in Italian by the infinitive. 

Ex. 

Sento cantare nelValtra stanza, 

Li vedo venire, 

Vedemmo i cacciatori galoppare nei 

camjn, 

I hear singing in the other room. 

I see them coming. 

We saw the huntsmen galloping in 

the fields. 

266. When the English present particijAe can also be ex- 

pressed by the indicative or subjunctive mood with or without the 

pronoun that, who, which, in Italian this second manner is preferable. 

Ex. 

II cane che abhaia è mio, 

La signora che siede presso alla 

finestra e ricama, è la fidanzata 

di mio cugino, 

The dog harking, or which barics, is 

mine. 

The lady sitting, or wJio sits, at the 

window embroidering, or who 

embroiders, is my cousin's hotrothed. 

267. The present participle, preceded in English by a. posses- 

sive pronoun, is rendered in Italian by the infinitive preceded by 

the article, and the English possessive pronoun is changed into 

s. personal pronoun in the nominative, which is placed after the 

infinitive. Ex. 

II non aver egli parlato dispiacque 

alVassemblea, 

Lo scriverci ella così spesso ci fa 

molto piacere, 

L'andar voi ogni sera al teatro cifa 

dispiacere, 

His not having spoken displeased 

the meeting. 

Her writing so often gives us much 

pleasure. 

Tour going every evening to the 

theatre displeases us.


268. When ì\ìq participle present is used as an adjective, the 

termination do is changed into te, and it is generally placed after 

the noun to which it relates. Ex. 

11 viso ridente, 

I Negri hanno occJd brillanti, 

Ho le mani tremanti, 

Una stella cadente, 

La luna sorgente, 

EXERCISE LX. 

The laughing face. 

Negroes have sparkling eyes. 

My hands are trembling. 

A falling star. 

The rising moon. 

— 

The sailors, foreseeing the squall, returned to the harbour. 

prevedere burrasca in * porto 

" Are there no children in Athens?" said a Spartan, on seeing 

fanciullo (263) 

an Athenian caressing a dog.—The Druids chose the misletoe 

Ateniese (265) Druido irr. vischio 

of the oak, (on account of) misletoe growing so rarely on that 

appunto perchè (266) 

tree.—In teaching, one learns.—Apelles painted a cluster of 

(263) Apelle grappolo 

grapes so naturally, that birds, on seeing it, flew round it, 

pecking at the painted fruit. 

(263) volare attorno (135) 

— Formerly tlie Doge of Venice 

beccare * 

granello p. 

used to perform the ceremony of espousing the Adriatic, by 

con 

solere (262) ^ 

throwing a ring into it.—Your coming so often displeases him. 

(263) (135) (267) 

Aristotle teaches, that the more an animated being is perfect, the 

(111) 

essere 

more he is capable of feeling pleasure and pain.— Before men 

(262) 

• Avanti che 

possessed the art of writing, all deeds worthy of being preserved 

sub. 2 (264) (604) 

were transmitted to posterity in verse.—A weeping willow.—He 

tramandare (268) salcio. 

was dismissed for disobeying (to) his master's orders.—My having 

licenziare (262*) padrone (267)


rewarded bim, is a proof of my being satisfied witb bis conduct. 

(267) contento di 

269. Tbe Past Participle, used adjectively witbout any 

auxiliary, agrees in gender and number witb tbe word to wbicb 

it relates. Ex. 

L'iiiverno passato in Grecia, 

Jfiori appassiti, 

Le battaglie vinte dai Turchi nella 

passata guerra, 

Vedemmo due signore vestite a lidio, 

Tbe winter spent in Greece. 

The withered flowers. 

The battles gained by the Turks in 

the past war. 

We saw two ladies dressed in mourn- 

270. The past participle^ preceded by tbe verb essere, agrees 

in gender and number witb tbe nominative of tbe auxiliary. Ex. 

Ugli era rispettato, ma gli altri 

erano disprezzati, 

Una signora fu leggermente ferita, 

e due altre furono uccise, 

He was respected, but the others 

were despised. 

One lady was slightly wounded, and 

two others were killed. 

271. Wben i\xQ past participle follows tbe verb avere, it may 

agree witb tbe object of tbe pbrase, or remain invariable ; it 

usually agrees wben it comes after tbe object, and is invariable 

wben placed before. Ex. 

Le lettere che avete impostate, I The 

letters you have posted. 

Io ho impostato le lettere che mi avete 1 have posted the letters you have 

given me. 

date, I 

272. Wben tbe past participle is preceded by any of tbe pro- 

nouns lo, la, li, le, mi, ti, ci, vi, employed as tbe objective of tbe 

pbrase, it must agree witb tbem, to avoid ambiguity. Ex. 

Llio trovato a casa, 

Ella disse : Mi avete conosciuta fin 

doli infanzia. 

Li ho veduti, or le ho vedute passeggiare 

insieme, 

Che belle trote; dove le avete pescate? 

I found him at home. 

She said : You have known mo from 

childhood. 

I saw them walking together. 

What fine trout; where have you 

caught them ? 

273. Tbe past participle of intransitive verbs, conjugated 

witb avere, never varies its termination, as tbis class of verbs 

have no object. Ex.

114 ON MOODS AM) TI'-NSES. 

or she has walked. 

Egli or ella lia passeggiato, I 

ErjUno or elleno hanno dormito, 

He 

They have slept. 

Égli or ella ha tossito, He or she has coughed. 

| 

274. The present participle of the auxiliaries avere and 

essere, may sometimes be omitted in Italian before the past participle, 

in locutions introduced as incidental propositions. Ex. 

Gli alleati, sconfitti i lìrissi all'Alma, 

andarono ad assediare Sebastopoli, 

E così detto, appressatolo alla bocca, 

lo bacio, B. 

Scritta la lettera, se ne parti. 

The allies having defeated the Eussians 

at the Alma, went to besiege 

Sebastopol. 

Ilaving said so, and having raised it 

to her lips, she kissed it. 

The letter being written, he went 

away. 

275. The past participle is used before the word che, having, 

in such case, the meaning of when, after, or as soon as, preced- 

ing a compound tense. Ex. 

Inteso che n'ebbe il motivo, egli ci 

Doma che fa la potenza de' nobili, 

e finita che fa la guerra cól- 

VArcivescovo, Uav. S. 

Pervenuto che/w il re ai confini della 

%, Day. S. 

EXERCISE LXI. 

When he had heard the motive, ho 

forgave us. 

As soon as the power of the nobles 

was overcome, and the war with 

the archbishop was finished. 

After the king had arrived at the 

confines of Spain. 

Having exposed himself to the enemy's fire, he was wounded 

(274) 

in both arms.—The Greeks were persuaded that the soul is 

(209) 

immortal.—Cicero was assassinated by Popilius Lena, whose life 

Popilio (180) 

he had formerly saved when the latter was accused of having 

altra volta (163) (262) 

killed his own father.—Demetrius, on being informed that 

uccidere irr. Demetrio (274) 

the Athenians had overturned his statues, remarked, " They 

atterrare osservare 

have not overturned the virtues which have erected them to 

irr. 

erigere irr.

ON MOODS AND TENSES, 145 

me,"—Socrates said, on hearing that the Athenians had con- 

(127) irr. (263) 

demned him to death, " Nature has condemned them also to 

(272) (122) 

death,"—How much attention and civility fine clothes have 

(74) 

vestito 

(not) often gained us !—We have often laughed at that story. 

procurare (273) irr, 

—She has slept since the doctor has seen her.—Our friends, 

dache dottore (272) 

having seen the town, left with the night train.—The postilion 

(274) partire sera treno 

having made us a polite bow, declined accompanying us, as it 

(274) civile inchino ricusare (265) 

was a holiday, 

giorno di festa. 

WILL, SHALL, CAN, MAY. 

276. When will, woidd, shall, shoidd, can, could, may, might, 

are used in English as auxiliaries, they are not translated in 

Italian ; but when they are used as separate verbs, they are ex- 

pressed by 

Volere, I 

will, to be willing. 

I 

Dovere, 

Potere, 

To 

To be obliged, must,* ought, to owe. 

To be able, to have the jiower, can. 

Voi dovreste pagare i vostri debiti, 

Egli mi deve ancora una bagattella, 

Non possiamo sempre procurarci il 

jnacere, e non possiamo sempre 

evitare il dolore, 

Posso sperare che voi lo raccomanderete 

? 

Vi dobbiamo cento lire, 

You should pay your debts. 

He owes me still a trifle. 

We cannot always obtain pL 

and we cannot always avoid 

May I hope you will recommend 

him? 

"We owe you a hundred pounds. 

277, Dovere is frequently used in a sense signifying likelihood 

or prohahility. Ex. 

* Must, when used in the sense of to have need of, is rendered by aver 

bisogno di; as, Abbiamo bisogno di libri per studiare, we must have books 

to study

146 WILL, SHALL, CAN, MAY. 

Egli deve venire oggi, He is expected to come to-tlay. 

Fu giudicato dal Re dover essere He was judged by the king lilcely to 

eccellente ministro, Dav. S. he an excellent minister. 

La Regina Caterina, che chiara^ Queen Catherine, who clearly knew 

mente conosceva tanta animosità so much animosity to he likely one 

AoxBTt un giornoprodurre qualche day to produce some great evil. 

gran male, Dav. S. 

278. Whenever, in English, the verb will^ followed by the 

auxiliary have, is used with the signification of to like, to wish, 

to choose, and may be replaced by these verbs, the simple verb 

volere is used in Italian ; 

but when the sense of the phrase does 

not admit of this construction in English, the auxiliary have 

must be translated in Italian. 

Volete una pera ? 

Volete un higlietto per il concerto ? 

Non wogVio frutta oggi, 

Volete avere la hotità di 

gnarla a casa ? 

Ex. 

Will you have, or d Wee, 

pear ? 

Will you have, or do you wish, a 

ticket for the concert ? 

I will not have, or I do not wish for, 

any fruit to-day. 

Will you have the kindness to see 

her home ? 

In the last example, toill have cannot be replaced by the verbs 

to wish, to like, and the auxiliary have is translated. 

279. The English form will have, would have, is often followed 

by another verb in the infinitive, preceded by a noun in the objective, 

but in Italian it is rendered by volere, and the verb which 

follows volere must be in the subjunctive, preceded by che, and 

the noun in the objective becomes the nominative of the second 

verb. Ex. 

Volete ch'io vada solo ? 

Che volete ch'io dica ? 

Vorrebbe che lavorassero tutto il 

. giorno, 

280. Volere, dovere, potere, as well as fare, to make or 

cause, to let ; lasciare, to let or allow ; intendere, to hear ; 

sapere, to know ; sentire, to feel or hear ; solere, to be in the 

habit ; udire, to hear ; when followed by an infinitive, do not 

require any preposition after them. Ex. 

Vollero visitare le principali città 1 

dÊuropa, 

I 

Will you have me go alone ? 

"\\'Tiat will you have me say ? 

He would have them work all day. 

They wished to visit the chief towns 

of Europe.

Dohlì'amo moderare i nostri desidera, 

Potete venire quando vifarà comodo, 

WILL, SHALL, CAN, MAY. 147 

We must restrain our wislies. 

You may come when it is convenient 

to 3'ou. 

EXERCISE LXII. 

We should encourage the Beautiful, as the Useful en- 

(276) Bello poiché Utile 

courages itself.— Sentiments join man to man, opinions 

ref. {da se stesso) (25) unire 

divide them ; 

the friendships of youth are founded on sentiment, 

the dissensions of age spring from opinions : if we could 

risultare (253) 

reflect on this when we are young, we might, in 

a (168) {mentre siamo ancor giovani) potere 

forming our own opinions, acquire a liberal view of those of 

(263) acquistare ^ ^ 

others, and we would endeavour to unite by sentiment, 

cercare per mezzo di 

what opinion has divided and embittered.—Many things (that) 

(167) 

amareggiare 

we cannot do alone, may be easily achieved with the assist- 

eva noi (276) (214) effettuare 

ance of others.—A soldier must accustom himself to obey blindly 

(201) (276) a 

(to) his superiors.—I must have money to pay what I owe. 

(276*) danaro irr. 

Will you have a pen or a pencil ?—I will have neither.—Would 

(278) lapis (210) (279) 

you have me blame him unjustly ?—Will you have the 

biasimare (251) (278) 

kindness to read these verses aloud ?— The Queen is expected 

{ad alta voce) (277) 

to arrive in Scotland this week.—Those who cannot break 

(280) (173) (175) rompere 

the bonds of vice at a blow, will probably bear them for 

(57) laccio tratto portare 

ever. 

—

Id8 IDIOMS AND KEMAllKS ON VERBS. 

IDIOMS AND REMAEKS ON VERBS. 

FIRST CONJUGATION. 

281. Verbs ending in care and gare take the letter h before 

the vowels e or z. Ex. 

Peccare, pecco, pecchi, pecca, pecchiamo, &c. 

To sin, I sin, thou sinnest, he sins, we sin. 

Pagare, pago, paghi, paga, paghiamo, &c. 

To pay, I pay, thou payest, he pays, we pay. 

282. Idioms formed with the verb Andare :— 

Andare a piede, 

Andare in legno, in carrozza. 

Andare a cavallo. 

Andare a vele gonfie. 

Andar dietro a, 

Andare a male, 

Andare a marito. 

Andare a vuoto, 

Andare in estasi. 

Andare in collera, 

Andare in mal ora, 

Andare alla lunga, 

Andare alle corte. 

Andare altiero. 

Andare a genio. 

Andare a fondo. 

Andar per la mente. 

Andar di male in peggio. 

Andar di bene in meglio, 

A lungo andare, 

exercise lxiii. 

To walk, to go on foot. 

To drive. 

To ride. 

To prosper. 

To follow. 

To decay, to decline in health. 

To get a husband. 

To fail. 

To fall into ecstasies. 

To get into a passion. 

To go to ruin. 

To last a long time, to go on 

slowly. 

To end quickly, to come to a 

decision. 

To be proud, haughty. 

To like. 

To sink. 

To cross one's mind. 

To get worse and worse. 

To get better and better. 

In the long-run, in the end. 

(Old people) like what is useful, (young people) follow 

(57) vecchio (167) giovane (282)

IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS. 149 

all that glitters, and think little of the end.—These flowers 

(169) risplendere a fine. 

are decaying for want of light and air.—The state of Naples 

(282) mancanza luce 

gets worse and worse every day, while Sardinia steadily 

(282) mentre che Sardegna 

improves, and may well be proud of the position (that) she now 

occupies.—In the long-run, liars are to be pitied, 

hugiardo (241) (214) compiangere 

as they (are not believed) even when they tell the truth.—The 

meritar fede anche 

Indians got into ecstasies when the sailors offered them some 

beads and spangles.—Law-suits last so long, (that) they often 

perla processo 

ruin (the gainer as well as the loser.)—From the shore we saw 

chi vince e chi perde 

the vessel sink.—People who get easily into a passion should 

(173) 

never argue, as passion blinds reason, and so deprives us of 

disputare accecare 

* 

togliere 

the first weapon requisite for an argument.—I do not like 

principale (61) necessario 

to ask favours from strangers.—Our affairs are going on prospcra 

ously.—All their plans have failed, and their position is get- 

prorjetto 

ting worse and worse.—Every crime begins with a criminal 

^delittuoso 

thought, which at first crosses stealthily the mind, and often 

^ da prima alia sfuggita 

returns to tempt its victim, who in the end follows its promptings, 

and blindly goes to ruin. 

ciecamente 

instigazione

150 IDIOMS AND REMARKS 

Dare, to give. 

283. Addarsi^ to perceive, to addict one's-self to, and ridare^ 

to give again, are conjugated like dare. 

Dare means also to strike. Ex. 

Fercliè date a cotesto ragazzo f che I Why do you strike the boy ? what 

vha egli fatto ? has hb done to you ? 

I 

284. Idioms formed avith Dare :— 

Darsela a gambe, 

Dare addosso ad uno, 

Dar nella rete, 

Dare il cuore, or Vanimo a, 

Mi da Vanimo di fare, 

Dar fede a. 

Dare ad intendere a. 

Dar del tu a, 

Dar del lei a, 

Dar del voi a, 

Dare alla luce, 

Darsi a fare. 

Dar nel rosso, &c., 

Darsi pensiero di, 

Dar del furfante a. 

Dar -parola. 

To run away, to take flight. 

To fall foul of one. 

To fall into a snare. 

To have the heart. 

I do not fear to do. 

To believe. 

To make believe. 

To address one in the 2d person 

singular. 


feminine singular. 


plural. 

To bring forth, to publish. 

To begin to do somethin*. 

To border on red. 

To take to heart. 

To call one a rascal. 

To promi 

Dar la burla, la baia, la quadra To make game of one. 

ad uno. 

Dar in prestito. 

Dar fuoco, 

Dar la caccia a, 

Dar principio, ox fine a, 

Dar conto. 

Darsi allo studio. 

Dar di naso da per tutto, 

Darsi bel tempo. 

Darsi pace di, 

Darsi briga. 

Dar la colpa ad uno. 

To lend. 

To set on fire. 

To give chase to. 

To begin, or to finish. 

To account for. 

To apply one's-self to study. 

To meddle in everything. 

To enjoy one's-self. 

To console, reconcile one's-self. 

To give one's-self much trouble. 

To throw the blame on one.


Dar retta a, To mind, to listen, to lieed. 

Dar mano a. To begin to do. 

Dar una mano a, To help. 

Dar luogo a, To occasion, to give rise to. 

EXERCISE LXIV. 

The first person who was addressed in the 2d person plura. 

(214) (284) 

was Julius Cassar.—The custom of addressing one in the od 

Giulio Cesare (61) costume. 

person feminine singular, was introduced into Italy by the 

irr. in 

Spaniards.—War gives rise to strange laws and customs.—When 

Spagnuolo (284) strano 

our cavalry advanced, the Russians took flight,—They have 

cavalleria (284) 

promised us to change the furniture of our parlour.— From 

(284) (123) mobilia salotto {Fin da) 

the time of our first parents, every criminal is ready to throw 

delinquente j^ronto (284) 

the blame on his neighbour.— The Epicureans lived to enjoy 

vicino Epicureo per (284) 

themselves, and never took anything to heart.—The hair of 

(284) 

capello p. 

Titian's beauties often borders more on red than on fair. 

Tiziano hello L (284) (105) biondo 

Erostratus set fire to the Temple of Diana, in order to im- 

Erostrato (284) Tempio (18G) 

mortalize his name.—Do not heed those who (speak ill) of 

(284) (165) sparlare 

every one, and do not believe those who always speak well of 

(194) (284) 

themselves.—I have not the heart to tell him that he has lost 

(284) 

his law-suit.— "To sell glow-worms for lamps," is a pretty 

lite lucciola lanterna 

Italian proverb, of which the meaning is, that people try 

(72) (178) significazione (213) volere 

—

152 IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS. 

to make us believe something whicli has not happened, 

(280) (284) (233) 

Fare, to make, to do. 

285, The derivatives, as assuefare, to accustom ; confare, to 

suit ; disfare, to undo ; soddisfare, to satisfy ; contraffare, to 

imitate, to forge, are conjugated in the same manner asfare. 

286. Idioms formed with Fare:— 

Farsi animo, 

Far animo. 

Far capolino, 

Far all'amore con. 

Far alto. 

Far pompa, 

Fare il grugno. 

Sul far del giorno, 

Sul far della notte, 

Far di mestieri. 

Farsi innanzi, 

Farsi in qua, 

Farsi in là, indietro, 

Far brindisi. 

Fare la spia. 

Fare il sarto, il calzolaio, &c. 

Fare una visita. 

Fare una passeggiata, 

Fare ini bagno, 

Far bel tempo. 

Far cattivo tempo. 

Far freddo, caldo, umido, 

Far colazione, 

Far merenda, 

Far vista di, 

Far mostra dì. 

Far piacere a. 

Far le veci di, 

Far naufragio^ 

Far vela. 

To take courage. 

To give courage, encourage. 

To peep in. 

To make love to. 

To halt. 

To boast. 

To sulk. 

At the break of day. 

At the close of evening. 

To be necessary. 

To advance. 

To draw near. 

To draw back. 

To drink a toast. 

To be a spy. 

To be a tailor, shoemaker. 

To pay a visit. 

To take a walk. 

To take a bath. 

To be fine. 

To bo bad weather. 

To be cold, warm, damp. 

To breakfast. 

To lunch. 

To pretend. 

To display. 

To please. 

To replace, to represent. 

To be wrecked. 

To set sail.


Far V orecchio da mercante, To turn a deaf ear. 

Fare accoglienza, To give a reception. 

Farsi beffe di, To ridicule, to jeer. 

Fare attenzione, To pay attention, to be careful. 

Far vedere, To show. 

Far inale a, To hurt. 

Far parola di. To mention. 

Far prova di coraggio, To give proof of courage. 

EXERCISE LXV. 

Alexander killed his friend Clitus, for ridiculing the title 

Alessandro Kccidereirr. (286) 

of Son of Jupiter, which he assumed.—Never turn a deaf ear to 

Giove (286) 

good advice.—We are often more inclined to ridicule misfortunes 

consiglio disposto a (286) disgrazia 

than to pity them.—At Naples, a nobleman (would rather) 

(105) averjnetcl (138) nobile preferire 

die of hunger than be a merchant ; at Venice, Florence, 

[anziché] (286) 

and Genoa, on the contrary, commerce can boast of many names 

a incontro mercatura (286) 

of the noblest lineage.—Philosophy could never take the place 

lignaggio filosofia (286) 

of Christianity.—We were ordered to halt at the close of the 

(218) (286) (286) 

evening, and to (set out again) at break of day.—Be careful or 

ripartire (286) (286) 

they will cheat you.—Do not mention (of) it to any one. 

ingannare 

On the Continent, friends 

(286) 

paid us often visits 

(286) 

chicchesia 

after dinner.—In 

the reign of Louis XII., people dined when we breakfast, and 

(91) (213) (286) 

supped almost when we lunch.—Why do you hurt him ?—Take 

cenare quasi (286) (286) (286) 

courage, my friend, despair is unworthy of a Christian.—The 

disperazione 

L 

—

154 IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS 

greatest part of the Spanish Armada was wrecked on the Irish 

naviglio (286) 

coast.—Queen Henrietta at first pretended to be very favourably 

(33) (286) 

disposed towards Protestants, and misled every one, by 

ingannare (194) 

displaying great moderation in her religious views. 

(286) 

opinione 

Stare, to remain. 

287. The following verbs are conjugated like stare:— Distare, 

to be distant ; restare, to stop, to discontinue ; soprastare or so- 

vrastare employed with the signification to delay, to temporize, 

and contrastare in the sense of to be against, are conjugated like 

stare ; but when sovrastare means to threaten, to sway, and con- 

trastare means to contest either by word or action, both of these 

verbs follow the regular conjugation. 

288. Idioms formed with Stare :— 

Stare in piedi, To stand. 

Star bene, or male, To be well, or unwell, to be well 

Sta lene. 

Star su, 

Stare a sentire, 

Stare a sedere, 

Star per. 

Star bene a cavallo. 

Star di casa. 

Come state di salute f 

Non mi state a dire. 

Questo vestito non vi sta bene, 

Ciò non sta bene. 

Stare alt erta, \ 

Star colV occhio alla penna, j 

Star colle mani alla cintola. 

Stare a vedere^ 

off. 

He is well. 

To get up. 

To listen. 

To be seated. 

To be on the point of. 

To ride well. 

To reside. 

How are you ? 

Do not tell me. 

This dress does not become you. 

That is not right. 

To be on one's guard. 

To remain idle, with arms 

crossed. 

To wait, to do nothing.


Star in dubbio, or in forse, fra To be in doubt, wavering. 

il si e il no, 

Star saldo, To bold firm. 

Stare in pace, d'accordo, To agree together. 

Star fermo, quieto, To be quiet. 

Stare zitto, cheto, To be silent. 

Star allegro, di buon animo, To cheer up. 

Lasciare stare, To let alone, not to touch. 

Sta a me, a voi, &c., It is my turn, your turn, it is 

EXERCISE LXVI. 

for me, for you. 

Tasso was on the point of being crowned at Rome, but on 

(288) inf. coronare a 

the eve of the day on which the solemnity was to take place he 

vigilia in (243) (244) 

died.—We remained standing all the time that we were in tlie 

(288) 

a 

Queen's presence.—That child cannot be quiet half an hour. 

— 

(288) (77) 

The inhabitants were in doubt whether they should open the 

(288) (253) 

gates of the city to the victorious army of their enemies. 

porta vittorioso 

Reason and imagination, says Pope, are like two relations who 

parente 

never agree, although intended to live together and to help one 

(288) quantunque fatto per 

another.—I shall not stay to hear the end of the concert, as I 

(230) a siccome 

am not well.— Are you better now ?—Let me alone, and I will 

(288) (288) 

soon feel well.—That Arab rides with grace and ease. — The 

Arabo ('288) grazia disinvoltura 

Turks remain all day with their arms crossed, smoking and 

(288) fumare 

dreaming.—People who want firmness are perpetually in 

sognare mancare di


doubt.—Misers live always poorly to-day to be well off toavaro 

stentatamente per 

morrow.—Those who listen to what their friends are saying, do 

* 

(237) 

not always hear themselves praised.—In Dresden we lived oppoinf. 

Dresda dirim- 

site the English ambassador's residence.—A great misfortune 

petto a ambasciatore palazzo sventura 

threatens us.—You have heard my reasons, it is for you to 

(287) (288) 

decide.—Caisar was in doubt if he should cross 

dovere sub. 2 attraversare 

the Rubicon. 

Rubicone 

SECOND CONJUGATION. 

289. All words that have the diphthong mo, drop the u when 

the tonic accent falls on the syllable that follows the diphthong. 

To cook, I cooked, I will cook, Cuòcere, Cocèva, cocerò. 

To move, I moved, I will move, Muòvere, Moveva, moverò. 

290. Verbs ending in the infinitive in lere, as volere, dolere, 

solere, valere, &c., take a g before the letter l in the first person 

singular, and the first and third persons plural of the present of 

the indicative, and in all the persons of the present of the subjunctive. 

Ex. 

Voglio, vogliamo, vogliono, I wish, we wish, they wish. 

Che voglia, voglia, voglia, vogliamo, That I, thou, he, we, you, they may 

vogliate, vogliano, wish. 

Soglio, sogliamo, sogliono, I, we, they are in the habit. 

Che soglia, soglia, soglia, sogliamo, That I, thou, he, we, you, they may 

sogliate, sogliano, he accustomed. 

Vaglio, vagliamo, vagliono, I am worth, we, they are worth. 

Che valga, valga, valga, vagliamo. That I, thou, he, we, you, they may 

vagliate, vagliano, be worth. 

291. Verbs ending in the infinitive in nere, as rimanere, 

tenere, take a ^ in the first person singular and third person 

plural of the present of the indicative, and in all the three per-


sons singular and third person plural of the present of the subjunctive. 

Ex. 

Rimango, rimangono, I remain, they remain. 

Che rimanga, rimanga, rimanga, That I, thou, he, they may remain. 

rimangano, 

Tengo, tengono, I hold, they hold. 

Che tenga, tenga, tenga, tengano, That I, thou, he, they may hold. 

292. All verbs ending in lere and nere double the consonant 

r in the future and conditional. Ex. 

Valere, varrò, varrei. To be worth, I shall be worth, 

I would be worth. 

Tenere, terrò, terrei, To hold, I shall hold, I would 

hold. 

293. Let the pupil observe that the preterite of irregular verbs 

is only irregular in i\iQ first and third persons singular, and third 

person plural; the first person, which always ends in i, is changed 

into e for the third person singular, and into ero for the third 

person plural. Ex. 

Scrissi, Scrisse, Scrissero, 

I wrote. he wrote. they wrote. 

Presi, Prese, Presero, 

I took. he took. they took. 

Lessi, Lesse, Lessero, 

I read. he read. they read. 

EXERCISE LXVII.* 

In the captivity of Babylon, the virgins of Judah hung 

schiavitù Babilonia Giuda appendere 

their harps on willow-trees and wept. 

— 

Benvenuto Cellini wrote 

(150) arpa a salice (293) 

his biography at 60 years of age.—The reasons that they adduced 

biografia addurre 

are not convincing enough.—He (brought forward) six 

convincere (268) 

witnesses.—He preferred an obscure 

produrre 

and tranquil life to the 

testimone anteporre (73) 

* Irregular verba are no longer marked.

158 IDIOMS AND HKMARKS ON VKRliS. 

splendour of a throne.—We will remain in town until the bearono 

(292) fino a 

ginning of spring.—They are in the habit of going every year 

(290) (280) (262) 

for two months to the sea-shore.—Whilst Galileo was tortured 

presso Mentre torturare 

by the Inquisition for his theory, that the earth moves round 

teoria (289) ref. intorno 

the sun, he calmly said: "nevertheless, it does move."—The next 

pure 

number of the Edinburgh Review will contain an article on the 

Rivista 

fine arts.—Some pretend that the Celtic and Etruscan kn- 

(290) volere Celtico Etrusco 

guages are both derived from the Phenician, and are very like 

(251) (209) Fenice simile 

one another, but of the Etruscan language there only remains 

[fra loro) (232) (291) 

inscriptions that nobody can read. 

294. To KNOW is rendered in Italian by sapere and conoscere. 

Sapere implies to know through the mind, and is used in 

cing of things that may be learned by heart. Ex. 

Sapere la lezione, | To 

know the lesson. 

Conoscere implies to know through the senses. Ex. 

Io conosco vostro zio, but not io so I 

vostro zio, I 

Focili sanno godere della felicita 1 Few 

che posseggono, \ ness 

I know your uncle. 

295. To KNOW how is simply rendered by sapere. Ex. 

know how to enjoy the happi- 

they possess. 

296. Idioms formed with Sapere :— 

Sapere a mente, a memoria, To know by heart. 

Saper viale. To displease. 

Saper trovare il pelo nell'uovo, To be clever, cunning. 

Vi so dire, I can toll you.

of. 

IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERES. 159 

Sapere is also used in the signification of to taste of^ to smell 

Ex. 

Saper di cattivo, di buono, To smell, to taste badly, well. 

| 

Saper di poco, di niente. To have little, no smell, taste. 

To smell of mask, to taste of salt» 

Saper di muschio, di sale, &c. | 

EXERCISE LXVIII. 

" How mucli woiild you give to know all I know ?" said a 

(74) (169) 

conceited pedant to a lady. " I would give much more to know 

all you do not know," was the witty answer.—Petrarch, in 

spiritoso Petrarca 

presenting some valuable ancient medals to the Emperor 

(263) prezioso medaglia 

Charles iv., said : " Prince, I know all these great men, I know 

how much they have done ; it is for you to imitate them." 

— 

(74) operare (288) 

Camellias are beautiful flowers, but they have no smell.— This 

Camelia (79) (296) 

dish has very little taste.—These oranges smell badly. 

vivanda (296) (57) arancio (296) 

Those who are not able to bridle their own passions are not 

(173) capace frenare (156) 

able to command others.— Dolabella said to Cicero, " Do you 

Cicerone 

know that I am only thirty years of age?" " I ought to know 

(89) 

it," answered Cicero, " for it is now more than ten years that 

dachi (7) 

you (have been) telling it to me."—Many wish to know 

andare (127) 

everything without studying anything.—No one knew mankind 

(189) (262) (202) {gli uomini) 

better than La Bruyère.—It displeases him that you were not 

(296)


able either to write or send.—It is said that cooks (of old) 

ne ne (214) {51) cuoco antico 

kuew how to dress vegetables in such a way that they 

(295) cucinare (57) erbaggio (185*) guisa 

had the taste of fish or fowl.—The gondoliers of Venice know 

polio gondoliere (296) 

by heart whole stanzas of Tasso, which they sing with a 

intiero ottava (31) 

peculiar melody. 

particolar melodia. 

297. Idioms formed with Tenere:— 

Tenere da uno, 

To side with one, to back one. 

Tenere a bada, 

To trifle with. 

Tenere in contrario, 

To be of different opinions. 

Tenere uno per galantuomo To believe one an honest man. 

Tenere le lagrime, 

To restrain one's tears. 

Tener le risa, 

To keep from laughing. 

Tener conto di, 

To esteem, to value. 

Tenere a battesimo. 

To be godfather, godmother to. 

Tener mano. 

To be an accomplice. 

298. Idioms formed with Volere and Mettere :— 

Voler bene a. 

Voler male a. 

Ci vuole. 

Si vuole. 

Voler dire. 

Mettersi a, 

Mettersi a dormire, 

Mettersi a tavola. 

Mettersi a sedere, 

Mettersi in testa. 

Mettersi all'ombra. 

Mettersi in via, in viaggio, 

To love, to like. 

To hate, to dislike. 

One must have. 

It is said, they pretend, they 

believe. 

To mean. 

To set about, to begin. 

To go to sleep. 

To go to table. 

To sit down. 

To take into one's head. 

To go in the shade. 

To set out on a journey. 

exercise lxix. 

Dante used, during the summer evenings, to 

solere 

himself on

— 


a stone opposite the Cathedral, which is still prepietra 

dirimpetto Duomo ^(214) âncora ^con- 

served in Florence. Salvator Eosa worked so quickly, that 

servare presto 

when he began to paint a landscape in the morning, he could 

(298) dipingere paesaggio 

finish it before evening.—In setting out on our journey, the 

(263) 

carriage overturned, and as we were not hurt, we could not keep 

vettura rovesciarsi 

from laughing.—He took it into 

(286) 

his head to ascend Vesuvius 

(298) 

alone.—We recommended him to you, as we 

Vesuvio 

thought him an 

(297) 

honest man.—He trifles with all his creditors, and pays none.— 

(297) (202) 

It is said that the language of a people is but the type 

(298) 2 \nQn \he tipo 

of their national character.—To be an accomplice in a crime 

carattere (297) a delitto 

is the same as to commit it.—It is easier to begin to dislike a 

che a (298) 

friend than to like an enemy.—I mean that one must have 

(105) (298) (298) 

inspiration (as well as) precepts to be a good poet.—The 

ispirazione come pure precetto per 

Queen was godmother to the princess.—In order to speak or to 

(297) (66) 

write well, one must have ideas and words present to the mind. 

(298) 

—We should only value the approbation of the good.—He had 

(276) (297) approvazione p. 

the good fortune to back the horse which won.—Queen Eliza- 

(297) vìncere (33) 

beth never ceased to hate a French ambassador, for having 

(298) (228) 

ridiculed her French pronunciation. 

(286) (154) pronunzia.

162 IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERR3. 

THIRD CONJUGATION. 

299. Idioms formed with Venire :— 

Veiiir meno, venir manco, To faint, to fail. 

Venire stimato, To be esteemed. 

Venir biasimato, lodato, &c. To be blamed, praised. 

Venire alle inani, alle strette, To come to blows, to a conclu- 

sion. 

Venir voglia, desiderio. To take a fancy, to wish. 

Gli venne voglia di viaggiare, He wished to travel. 

Mi viene in mente, I remember. 

Mi vengono le lagrime agli The tears come to my eyes. 

occhi. 

Venire alla luce, To come to light, to appear. 

DIFFERENT SIGNIFICATIONS OF CONVENIRE. 

300. This verb, when employed with the signification of being 

compelled, or of being convenient, must, to be necessary, is imper- 

sonal, and takes no preposition after it if followed by another 

verb. Ex. 

was obliged to escape in disguise 

He Gli convenne, fuggire travestito, per 1 

campar la vita, to save liis life. 

Cio non può convenirgli, I That cannot be convenient to him. 

Convenire may also mean, to agree on some point with a 

person. Ex. 

Convengo esser egli uomo dabbene, | I agree in his being an honest man. 

Convenire is used in the sense of to meet by appointment, to 

assemble. Ex. 

Convennero sullapiazza del mercato, \ They 

met in the market-place. 

Udire, to hear.—Sentire, to feel. 

301. Both these verbs are employed in Italian to render the 

verb to hear ; Sentire likewise means to feel. To hear from a 

person, is rendered by ricever lettere, or notizie. Ex. 

heard a report. 

Udirono, or sentirono una voce, I They 

Io mi sento male, 

Abbiamo ricevuto lettere d'Italia, 1 

I feel ill. 

We have heard from Italy


EXERCISE LSX. 

I agree with him who has said, that to be a good poet, one 

(300) (173) per 

must be a good man.—They met in a friend's house, but 

(300) (300)_ 

separated without agreeing (on anything), having nearly come 

separarsi (300) di nulla quasi (225) 

to blows.—Cato, at eighty, fancied for the first time to learn 

(299) Catone (299) 

Greek.—In viewing the Gothic ruins on the banks of 

(263) contemplare (50) Gotico rovina riva 

the Rhine, we remembered the famous robbers of the thirteenth 

Reno (299) 

century, against whom the merchants of more than a hundred 

secolo (41) 

towns agreed to form a league,—The first printed books that 

(300) lega stampare 

appeared were only printed on one side of the leaf.—We hear 

(299) da parte foglio. (301) 

from our friends in Ceylon every three months. Tasso was once 

reduced to such poverty, that he was obliged to cease writing at 

(300) 

night, having no candles ; and Eacine beheld Corneille faint 

(299) 

from hunger.—Xenophon is blamed for writing history 

Senofonte (299) (262*) 

with a novelist's pen.— To govern men, it is necessary to 

romanziere Per (300) 

make them fit to be governed, by dissipating the darkness 

rendere capace tenebra 

of ignorance and superstition.—The ambassadors assembled in 

(300) 

Paris to settle the dispute between Switzerland and Prussia. 

per comporre fra Svizzera 

—Newspapers first appeared under the aristocratic government 

gazzetta (299) aristocratico 

of the Republic of Venice. 

—

1G4 IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS. 

To Play. 

302. The English verb to play, which is used with so many 

different significations, must be rendered in Italian by a parti- 

cular verb, according to its various significations. Ex, 

To play a game, Giuocare a. 

To play upon an instrument. Suonare il. 

To play a part, Faiê, rappresentare la parte. 

To play on one, Prendersi giuoco di. 

To play false, Ingannare. 

To play, in the sense of to") • 

r>- t- ^ •" , Tf. y Divertirsi, ruzzare. 

amuse one s-self, 

) 

To play, speaking of a fountain. Gettare, zampillare. 

To play a trick. Fare una celia, burla. 

303. To TAKE, prendere, is rendered by portare, when used 

in the sense of to carry, to bring, to wear ; by condurre, menare, 

to signify to conduct, to lead ; by levare, portar via, to take off, 

take away. Ex. 

"""' ''''''^^' 

'^ 

^^'sMla 

""'' 

} T'"^' ^y ^'""''^ ^'^ *^' ^^''^^'- 

Portate la sella al sellaio. Take the saddle to the saddler. 

Mi condusse a fare una visita, He took me to pay a visit. 

Prendete questo libro. Take this book. 

/ Turchi portano il turbante, Turks wear turbans. 

Levate la tovaglia, Take away the table-cloth. 

304. To UNDERSTAND, TO LEARN, TO BE TOLD, OR TO BE IN- 

FORMED, can be translated in the following ways : 

Ho sapulo, 

Mi è stato detto, 

Mi vien riferito, 

Sento che, 

— 

I have been told. 

I am informed. 

I am given to understand. 

I hear or learn that. 

305. It is said, it is reported, may be rendered by correr 

la voce, correr fama. Ex, 

Corre la voce che il Parlamento i 

It is reported that Parliament will 

verrà i)resto disciolto, soon be dissolved.

— 

IDIOMS AND REMARKS OX VERBS. 165 

EXERCISE LXXI. 

The Swiss, on hearing their national air, the Bans des Vaches, 

Svizzero ^(263) nazionale aria 

played, long (so much) to (see again) their own country, that 

-inf. bramare talmente rivedere * 

it was forbidden to play it in the Swiss regiments in the French 

proibire a 

service.—Henry iv. of France used to plav with his children, 

(280) 

carrying them on his back.—David played on the harp to 

(303) {150) spalla p. per 

soothe Saul's fury.—The fountains played all day at Potscalmare 

Saidle smania p. (302) 

dam.—A Spanish nobleman was banished from the Court for 

Spagnuolo esiliare 

having won several games of chess which he played with the 

parecchio partita scacco-^. (302) 

king. Molière died whilst he was playing the part of the 

Imaginary 

mentre 

Invalid^ the last comedy that he wrote. — The 

immaginario ^malato commedia 

favourites of James the First played on their royal master's im- 

Giacomo im- 

becility, but the king, in his turn, played them shamefully 

becillità (a sua volta) vergognosamente 

false, expressing to them the greatest affection when he had reesprimere 

solved to ruin them.—Louis xiv. created a subject an ambasperdere 

suddito (38) 

sador, because he played billiards skilfully.—Do not play the 

bigliardo abilmente. (302) 

fool.—It is reported that a revolution has (broken out) in Sicily. 

sciocco. (305) scoppiare Sicilia. 

—The Spaniards brought chocolate from Mexico, and the 

Messico 

Dutch and English claim the honour of having carried the 

Olandese attribuirsi

166 IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VEUHS. 

first cargo of tea to Europe.—Take these hyacinths to your sister. 

carico in (303) giacinto 

—Socrates was not ashamed to phiy with children.—In Louis 

Socrate (231) (302) 

the Fourteenth's reign, courtiers rode to dinner, and wore at 

cortigiano (282) (303) 

table their boots and spurs.—Mazarin, before his death, took 

{\bO) stivale sjìrone. Mazzarini 

Colbert to Court, and introduced him as his successor to the 

kinsf. 

VERBS WHICH GOVERN, IN ITALIAN, A DIFFERENT 

PREPOSITION FROM THE ENGLISH, 

306. Verbs which require to be followed by the preposition 

A bbisognare dl danaro, 

Abbondare di provvisioni, 

Accorgersi di uno sbaglio, 

Adornarsi di gemme, 

Affliggersi delle sventure altrui, 

Appagarsi di poco, 

Ardere di sdegno, 

Arrossire di vergogna, 

Aver pietà degli infelici, 

Avvedersi àelVinganno, 

Caricare di grano una nave. 

Colmare di gentilezze, 

Contentarsi del necessario. 

Coprire di un velo. 

Decidere della vittoria. 

Diffidarsi àeWadulazione. 

Dimenticarsi del passato, 

Empire di confusione, 

Guarnire di velluto, 

Innamorarsi di una persona, 

Intendersi di belle arti, 

Ingombrare la tavola di libri, 

Languire dì fame, 

fiancare di buon senso. 

To want money. 

To abound in provisions. 

To perceive a mistake. 

To adorn one's-self with jewels. 

To grieve for the misfortuneB of 

others. 

To be satisfied with little. 

To burn with indignation. 

To blush for shame. 

To pity the unfortunate. 

To perceive the deceit. 

To ridicule or laugh at a fool. 

To load a vessel with corn. 

To load with kindness. 

To be satisfied with what is necessary. 

To cover with a veil. 

To decide the victory. 

To distrust flattery. 

To forget the past. 

To fill with confusion. 

To trim with velvet. 

To fall in love with a person. 

To understand the fine arts. 

To crowd the table with books. 

To languish with hunger. 

To want cood sense.

IlaraviÛarsi dei fenomeni, 

Minacciare di morte, 

Ojìprimere di tasse, 

Piangere di gioia, 

Ballegrarsi della huoìia notizia, 

Cagionare di politica, 

Rammentarsi ) i n 

^^^^^^ Promessa, 

incordarsi \ 

Ridersi delle censure. 

Ringraziare àei favore. 

Risentirsi di un'ingiuria, 

Satollarsi di dbo. 

Scemare di jjopolarità. 

Vendicarsi di wn tradimento. 


To wonder at the phenomena. 

To threaten with death. 

To oppress with taxes. 

To weep for joy. 

To rejoice at the good news. 

To argue or to speak on politics. 

To remember the promise. 

To laugh at censure. 

To return thanks for the favour. 

To resent an injury. 

To surfeit with food. 

To decrease in popularity. 

To revenge a betrayal. 

EXERCISE LXXII. 

We laugh at the miser who (starves himself) in order to 

(306) avaro lasciarsi morir difame 

enrich his heir.—They were threatened with torture, and even 

erede. (306) tortura 

with death, if they refused to reveal the names of the conspira- 

svelarecospira- tovi.—In his painting representing the sacrifice of Iphigenia, 

tore. (268) Ifigenia 

Timante having exhausted in the faces of the spectators every 

esaurito volto spettatore 

conception of grief, and distrusting the farther power of art, hid 

(306) ulteriore (306) 

with a veil the features of the miserable father.—Regal robes 

sembianza misero veste 

are trimmed with ermine.—Those who possess much are not so 

(306) ermellino (165) 

rich as those who content themselves with little,—To laugh at 

(306) (306) 

the censure of the world is a sign of great fully.—In Italy, it is 

not even allowed to speak on politics.—The best way to forget 

(306) (120) mocôc?/ (306) ref. 

the past, is to live actively in the present, and to remember often 

(306) 

the future.— Count Ug'olino languished nine days with hunger 

(34) Conte (306)

168 IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS, 

and thirst before he died.—The island abounded in game and 

inf. (306) cacciagione 

provisions, but the natives lived on fruit and on roots. 

— 

(306) 

Simonides perceived such a connexion between painting and 

Simonide (306) fra 

poetrv, that he called painting mute poetry, and poetry speaking 

painting. 

(268) 

307. Verbs which require to be followed by the preposition A ; 

Adempire ai propri doveri, 

Affidarsi ad uno sconosciuto, 

Appigliarsi ad un partilo, 

Appoggiarsi al muro, 

ApprossimaTsi^^^^ 

Avvicinarsi } ' ' 

Badare alle conseguenze, 

Credere ad wn impostore, 

Dire al coccJiiere, 

Dispiacere ai genitori, 

Domandare ad un amico. 

Disubbidire alle leggi. 

Insegnare all' ignorante, 

Inspirare ad ognuno stima e rispetto, 

Nuocere al prossimo, 

Pensare ai lontani, 

Perdonare ai nemici, 

Permettere ai lavoranti di far festa, 

Pervenire agli onori, 

Piacere ai buoni. 

Proibire ai nostri figli distare oziosi, 

Bassomigliare ad una persona, 

Pesistere alle tentazioni, 

Ribellarsi aXVopressione, 

Piflettere all'avvenire. 

Rinunziare al mondo. 

Rispondere ad una lettera. 

Rubare ai viaggiatori. 

Sopravivere a&a. perdita della rejìutazione, 

Ubbidire ai genitori, 

To perform one's own duties. 

To trust a stranger. 

To take a decision. 

To lean against the wall. 

To draw near or approach the fii'o. 

To mind the consequences. 

To believe an impostor. 

To tell the coachman. 

To displease one's parents. 

To ask a friend. 

To disobey the laws. 

To teach the ignorant. 

To inspire every one with esteem and 

respect. 

To injure one's neighbour. 

To think of the absent. 

To pardon enemies. 

To allow the workmen a holiday. 

To attain honours. 

To please the good. 

To forbid our children to be idle. 

To resemble a person. 

To resist temptation. 

To rebel against oppression. 

To refuse charity to the poor. 

To reflect on the future. 

To renounce the world. 

To answer a letter. 

To rob travellers. 

To outlive the loss of one's reputa- 

tion. 

To obey one's parents.


EXERCISE LXXIII. 

Those who are not able to resist temptation ought to 

(173) (276) (280) (307) (276) (280) 

avoid it.—A Spartan chose for the device of his shield a 

evitare Spartano scegliere * divisa scudo 

fly of natural size, and being ridiculed by his friends, he 

mosca grandezza 

answered them, " I will approach the enemy so closely, that he 

(307) 

[da vicino) 

shall see clearly enough this mark."—Dante says, that it is a 

2 1 

great misery to think of past happiness in present misfortune. 

dolore (307) 

We gave them time to reflect on our offer 

miseria 

before taking a de- 

(307) di (307) ojerta (262) 

cision.—Bacchus was the first to teach men to cultivate the vine. 

Bacco 

—The inhabitants of Nola having refused Virgil 

vite 

a glass of 

(307) Virgilio 

water, as he was passing through their city, displeased the 

mentre (237) per (307) 

poet so much, that he (blotted out) the name of Nola from the 

cancellare 

second book of his Georgics.—Pythagoras believed in the trans- 

Georgica Pittagora tras- 

migration of souls, and forbade his disciples to slay animals or 

migrazione (307) discepolo uccidere 

to use (of) them for food.—The city of Syracuse attained a great 

servirsi (138) cibo Siracusa (307) cdto 

degree of splendour.—Vespasian, on becoming emperor, renounced 

grado Vespasiano (263) (307) 

the vices of his youth, and faithfully performed all the duties of 

his position.—Martial music inspires 

(307) 

troops with courage and 

'^marziale ^ (307) soldato 

confidence.—Christianity is the only religion which teaches men 

Cristianesimo (252) (307) 

M 

—


to ininre no one, and to forgive their enemies. 

(307) (202) (307) 

It has heen already given as a general rule, that the preposi- 

tion to, before infinitives, is rendered in Italian by dì. (See § 5.) 

And when the preposition to is governed by a verb expressing 

motion, by a. (See § 9.) 

308. The following verbs also require the infinitive by which 

they are followed to be preceded by the preposition a, although 

no motion is expressed. 

Abihiarsi 

Accostumarsi 

studiare, 

Assuefarsi '} 

Avvezzarsi 

Adattarsi a vivere senza lusso, 

Aspirare ad imitare, 

Attendere a cucire, 

Condannare a viver in esilio, 

Continuare^^^j 

' 

Seguitare J 

Cominciare ) , 

Principiare r'^''"'^'''''' 

Dilettarsi \ „ „„„„„, 

Divertirsi r^''''''^'' 

Dare a raccomodare, 

Esibirsi 

Froferird} «' '"


EXERCISE LXXIV. 

The Spartans placed the statue of death beside that of 

morte accanto a 

sleep, in order to accustom themselves to consider sleep and death 

sonno (308) 

as the same thing.—Domii'ian, a Eoman emperor, amused him- 

Domiziano (38) (308) 

self catching and killing flies in his imperial palace. 

acchiappare ammazzare palazzo 

Joan of Arc, who, under the walls of Orleans, defeated the 

Giovanna (60'') sconfiggere 

— 

English, and forced them to raise the siege of that town, 

(308) levare assedio 

having afterwards fiillen into the hands of her enemies, was 

(225) quindi 

condemned to be burned as a witch in the market-place of 

(308) (38) Strega (3) 

from Persius, 

Ora^20 (213) (308) (306) Persio 

Rouen.—From Horace one learns to laugh at vice ; 

to love virtue ; and Juvenal teaches us to detest vice.—Plato 

Giovenale detestare Platone 

was invited to give a code of laws to the town of Gyrenes, and 

(308) codice Cirene 

(on being asked) why he persevered in refusing, he answered, that 

domandatogli (308) 

the inhabitants were too opulent to begin to follow his laws. 

per (308) seguire 

Daring the siege of Constantinople, the inhabitants, instead of 

Durante assedio in vece 

thinking of the common danger, were occupied disputing 

(307) pericolo (308) contrastare 

bitterly about theological questions, and before (that) they 

accanitamente sopra 

were prepared to receive him, the Sultan arrived to put an end 

(308) Sultano giungere {por fine) 

to the controversy. 

controversia.

. 

172 

CHAPTER X. 

Advei'bs are invariable, aad are joined to a verb, an adjective, 

or another adverb, to express some circumstance of time, place, 

manner, &c. Ex. 

arrived late 

Ella parla Italiano molto bene, She speaks Italia Italian very well. 

... .„. j.^ 

live near the bridge. 

Giunsero tardi, They i 

Mia parla Italiano molto bene, She | _ 

Dimorano vicino al ponte, I They 

B09. Many adverbs are formed from adjectives by adding 

mente. Ex. 

Grande, grandemente, I Great, greatly. 

Diligente, diligentemente, ' Diligent, diligently. 

310. Wlien the adjective ends in o, that vowel is changed 

into a. Ex. 

Oscuro, oscuramente, I 

Bieco, riccamente, 

Obscure, obscurely. 

Eich, richly. 

Empio, empiamente, ' Impious, impiously. 

311. When the adjective ends in le or re, the e must be suppressed 

in forming the adverb. Ex. 

Amorevole, amorevolmente, i 

Particolare, particolarmente, \ 

Loving, lovingly. 

Particular, particularly. 

312. Adjectives are sometimes used adverbially. Ex. 

Vi parlo chiaro, I I speak plainly to you. 

Piangendo forte, ' Weeping bitterly. 

313. Mai, giammai, never, or ever, are generally accompanied 

by the negative non ; when employed negatively, non is usually 

placed before the verb and mai or giammai after. Ex. 

Non rideva mai, He never laughed. 

I 

La Previdenza tace talvolta, ma non Providence is sometimes silent, but 

dorms mai, | 

never 

sleeps. 

314. Mai, giammai, employed without the negation, have the 

signification of ever, or at any time ; we occasionally find they 

lire used without a negation in a negative sense. Ex.

ADVERr.S. 173 

Chi vi avrebbe mai pensato ? Who would ever have tliought it ? 

Fu il più contento uomo che giammai He was the most contented man that 

fosse, B. ever was. 

Alle sue femmine comandT), che ad He gave orders to the women, that 

alcuna persona mai manifestassero they were never to reveal to any 

chi fossero, B. one who they were. 

315, Mai often precedes or follows sempre, sJ, no, when it is 

used as an expletive, and gives more strength to these words. 

Ex. 

Una parte del mondo è che si giace, 1 

It is a part of the world that lies for 

Mai sempre in ghiaccio ed in gelate over entombed in ice and frost. 

hrine, P. I 

316. The negation not is expressed by non ; no is alike in 

both languages. Noi is tlie abbreviation of non lo. Yes is 

rendered by si ; but the following expressions are also used : di 

sì, yes ; di no, no. Ex. 

Noi vedesti tu ? No, 

Non lo conosco, 

Gli rispose di sì, quando avrebbe 

dovuto risponder di no, 

EXERCISE LXXV, 

Did you not see him ? No. 

I do not know him. 

He answered him yes, when 

should have answered no. 

Love without esteem is like a fire of straw, which 

stima {simile ad) paglia 

lights easily and goes out quickly. — No action can 

accendersi estinguersi pronto {ZIO) (202) 

properly be called virtuous unless it be fully 

proprio (310) (214) (a meno che) pieno (310) 

approved of by one's own conscience.—The best champion of 

* (156) (121) campione 

liberty is he who always obeys most scrupulously and most 

(165) (307) (110) scrupoloso 

devotedly the laws.—Then Calandrino said, " Wert thou ever 

devoto Allora (314) 

there ? " to which he answered, " No, never,"—Who would 

(171) (313) (172) 

ever have thought, that a man so lately poor himself would 

(314) {poco fa)

174 ADVERBS. 

have treated so cruelly others in poverty.—Friendship is never 

(313) 

felt by a corrupt heart.—The human mind is ever ready to 

(315) iironto 

welcome novelty.—The Cardinal to whom Ariosto dedicated 

accogliere novità 

his well-known poem, Orlando Furioso, asked the poet sarcasti- 

(624) (307) (622) ironico 

cally, " My good fellow, where did you ever find such nonsense?" 

(310) [caro mio) corbelleria p. 

—Physicians cure sometimes, relieve often, and generally 

guarire sollevare 

cheer their patients.—A Spanish king obstinately refused to 

rallegrare malato 

employ as secretary an excellent Catholic subject, simply beper 

'^Cattolico huddito 

cause his name was Martin Luther. 

Martino Lutero. 

317. The principal adverbs oi place are the following :- 

a, qui, qua, 

Vi, colà, là, ivi, cosù, costà, 

Quindi, 

Quinci, 

Dove, 

Onde, donde, di dove, 

Quassù, 

Lassù, 

Quaggiù, 

Su e giù, 

Here. 

There. 

From tLat place. 

From this place. 

Where. 

Whence. 

Up here. 

Up there. 

Down there. 

There below. 

Up and down. 

318. When the place is not mentioned, and no emphasis or 

no particular signification falls on the adverb of place, ci or vi 

is used ; in a contrary case, là or colà, qua or qui must be employed. 

Ex. 

Andate colà, dachè qui non Go there, as here there is no room. 

posto, 

Chi èia? 

Or die siete costà, vi consiglio di 

Who is there? 

Now that you are there, I advise you 

fvjstarvi tutto Vinvevno, to remain all the winter.

ADVERBS. 175 

319. Qui or qua is used to indicate the place in which the 

speaker is ; costì, costà, the place in which the person is to whom 

we are speaking or writing. Là, colà, ivi, quivi, mark a place 

distant alike from the speaker and the hearer. Ex. 

Scrivetemi come passate costà il 

vostro tempo, noi qui non facciamo 

die divertirci, 

Quando voi ritornerete colà da dove 

veniste, 

EXERCISE LXXVI. 

Let me know how you spend year 

time there ; we are enjoying ourselves 

here. 

When you return there from whence 

you came. 

Skins for the use of writing were first dressed at Perpelle 

da prima conciare Pergamus, 

in Asia, whence the name oi parchment is derived.—We 

gamo (317) pergamena derivare 

are in the habit of going there every year for three months. 

(280) (318) 

He alleged, as proof of his innocence, that he was not here 

addurre (318) 

when the crime was committed.—Do you intend to remain there 

(319) 

long ?—Here are the verses (that) you wrote at Vallombrosa, 

(132) 

and the flowers (that) you gathered there.—When we were in 

cogliere (318) 

Florence we lived near the cathedral ; and afterwards we 

dimorare presso duomo 

took a house between Florence and Fiesole.—Since you are 

Poiché 

there, you should visit the coal mines.—From thence 

(319) [carbon fossile) cava (317) 

we proceeded on foot as far as the neighbouring town, where we 

a vicino 

spent the night.—Men are always pursuing a mirage called 

passare correr dietro a fantasma 

happiness, which is never grasped here below.—The house 

raggiungere (317) 

you see there below is an hospital.— There lies my friend. 

(317) ospedale giacere 

—

176 

320. Ora, ìiow, is used in the formation of many expressions 

with various significations. Allora, composed of a quella ora, 

then, at that time. Ex. 

Finora, 

Qualora, 

Di buon'ora, 

Fin d'allora. 

D'ora in ora. 

In mal ora, 

Per ora. 

D'allora in poi. 

D'ora in poi, \ 

D'oggi in poi, 

Or ora, teste, poco fa, 

Till now. 

Whenever. 

Early. 

Since tben. 

From hour to hour. 

In an unlucky hour. 

For the present. 

From that time. 

Henceforth. 

Just now. 

321. Allora is used when tlien signifies at that time ; but when 

then is employed for consequently, dunque, and not allora, is the 

corresponding word in Italian. Ex. 

Era allora costume pranzare nella 

mattina, 

Slamo dunque allegri e grati nella 

prosperità, e rassegnati nell'avver- 

sità, 

Se do è vero, dunque mi avete ingannato. 

It was then the custom to dine in the 

morning. 

Let us, then, be cheerful and thankful 

in prosperity, and resigned in 

misfortune. 

If that be true, then you have deceived 

me. 

322. No longer is translated by non più ; no farther by non 

più lungi, non più oltre, non più innanzi. In both cases, non is 

placed before the verb, and più, più lungi, più oltre, più innanzi, 

after. Ex. 

Non voglio sopportare piii quest'umiliazione, 

Non andiamo più innanzi, 

Non voglio incoraggiare più oltre le 

vostre pretensioni, 

I will bear tbis humiliation no longer. 

Ij(it US go no farther. 

I will encourage no farther your pretensions. 

323. Quando, when, is used in forming several adverbial locii 

tions. Ex. 

Di quando in quando, ) -, , 

n-i .^ ' 

Ui tempo in tempo, 

Da quando in qua, 

^ now and then. 

) 

since when, how long is it since ? 

Fino a quando, how long. 

Quando... quando, now. ..now, sometimes. ..sometimes. 

,

ADVERB», 

Egli venne di quando in (quando a He carne now and then to see 

vederci, 

Fino a quando resteremo schiavi? 

Da quando in qua siete in Iscozia ? 

Proseguì il viaggio quando a piedi, 

quando a cavallo, 

EXERCISE LXSVII. 

17' 

How long shall we remain slaves ? 

How long have you heen in Scotland 

? 

He continued hia journey now on foot, 

now on horseback. 

Louis the Sixteenth then mounted the scaffold, and addressed 

(91) (321) palco, indirizzare 

the following words to the people :— " Frenchmen, I forgive my 

seguente (307) 

enemies ; I wish that my death"... The King could proceed no 

procedere 

farther, as General Santerre then ordered (the drums) (to be 

(322) (33) (321) 2 tamburo i (214) 

beaten,) in order that the people should hear no longer the King's 

(256) (322) 

voice.—We amuse ourselves sometimes shooting, sometimes fish- 

(323) 

ing.—How long is it since they have 

(265) 

let their house? 

(323) 

appigionare 

The Gauls were then husbandmen, and were easily subdued by 

Gallo agricoltore soggiogare 

the warlike Romans.—Her language, though unstudied, is now 

bellicoso semplice (323) 

and then highly dramatic.—I have just now seen the " Pilgrim's 

(320) 

Pellegrino 

Progress" translated into Chinese. — "When you hear from your 

tradurre (248) (301) 

family, let me know (it.)—The impressions which a child refare{\21) 

ceives early are never effaced from its mind.—We expected 

(320) (214) (313) cancellare aspettare 

you hourly. 

(320) 

324. Mercè, signifying by the grace or kindness of, is followed 

—

178 

by the genitive, and is sometimes preceded by the definite article. 

Ex. 

Qìù me ne venni, dove, merce d'Iddio 1 

I came here, where, by the £^xaq,q of 

e di questa gentildonna, scampato God and the kindness of this noble 

lady, I am in safety. 

sono, B. I 

— 

325. Come prima, and iion prima, as soon as, no sooner, are 

more used in an elevated style ; 

come, in familiar language. Ex. 

Vivi sicuro, che come prima addormentato 

ti fossi, saresti stato ammazzato, 

B. 

Come or appena lo videro tutti gli 

andarono incontro, 

subito che, tosto che, appena or 

Be sure, that as soon as you were 

asleep you would have been murdered. 

As soon as they saw him, they all 

went to meet him. 

326. The following are some of the adverbial locutions most 

commonly in use : 

Ad alta voce, aloud. 

A belVagio, 

J ^^ j^.;^^^^_ 

Con comodo, 

A buon mercato, cheap. 

A buon'ora, early. 

A caso, by chance. 

A destra, to the right. 

Ad onta, in spite of. 

A gara, in emulation. 

^gr-^';^^}now-a-days. 

AlVimprovviso, unexpectedly. 

AWincirca, Ì i i, i. 

A un di presso, r^'-'^^'"'^''''^- 

Almeno, at least. 

Al più al più, at the utmost. 

A jioco a poco, by degrees. 

A proposito, by the by, seasonably. 

A sinistra, to the left. 

^mquadro,^ ^^^ 

Alia rinfusa, 

' 

J 

A sufficienza, sufficiently. 

A tempo, in time. 

A un tratto, all at once. 

Cioè, vale a dire, that is to say. 

r>a banda, \ „„• i„ 

In disparte, i^''"^^f)a 

banda a banda, \ through and 

Da parte a parte, j through. 

Da capo, again. 

Da senno, seriously. 

Da solo a solo,_ |tgte.à-téte. 

A quattro occhi. 

Di buon grado, \ ,•„. , 

Di buona voglia, i'^^^'^'Sb- 

Di mala voglia, ) 

A malincore, > unwillingly. 

3Ial volentieri, ) 

Di mano in mano, gradually. 

Di nuovo, again. 

Di nascosto, ì , i„ ui 

Di soppiatto, r^'^'^^^'^- 

Di presente, presently 

Di rado, seldom. 

Dirottamente, heavily. 

A dirotte lagrime, bitterly. 

In avvenire, in future. 

{«•^"«> tin short. 

Jn somma, ) 

In fretta, in a hurry. 

In un batter d'occhio, ì • „ 

In un attimo, | marno 

In vece, instead. 

Niente affatto, not at all. 

Ogni qual volta, whenever. 

Per esempio, for instance. 

Per ischerzo, in jest. 

Per Vappunto, exactly. 

Per lo più, generally. 

Per tempo, in lime.

Su due piedi, at once. 

Tanto più, so much the more. 

Prima di voi, &c., before you. 

^^'''^°'.]-sooD, byandby, •' 

' Quanto prima, \ as soon as A momenti, ' 

j 

II più presto possibile, ) possible. Vie più or via più, much more. 

EXERCISE LXXVIII. 

179 

The language of the heart and of truth is seldom spoken in 

linguaggio 

^ 

(214) 

^ 

palaces.—Hail is rain crystallized by the cold before reaching 

cristallizzare 

arrivare 

the earth.— Taste is rather a gift of nature than an acquisition 

a gusto (326) dono 

of art.—One shovdd rather die than commit a dishonourable 

(213) (276) 

action.—Play that piece of music again.—The letter y was in- 

(302) (326) 

vented by Pythagoras, a native of Samos : the two branches are 

Pittagora Samo ramo 

emblematical of the two paths of virtue and vice, the former 

emblematico sentiero (163) 

stretching to the rigbt side, the latter to the left.—The gladia- 

(326) * gladiators 

died willingly amidst the applause of the Romans.—From 

tore (326) 

that time he has by degrees increased his savings, and now 

' 

(320) 

(326) 

shortly he will be rich enough to retire 

risparmio 

from commerce.—A word 

ritirarsi 

of advice given in season, may just be in time to save one 

consiglio (326) 

a life of repentance.—As soon as we opened cur trunks, the 

(custom-house officers) examined them with much more rigour 

doganiere 

than we expected.—It was raining heavily, when by chance we 

(107) attendersi. (326) (326)

180 PKFPOSITION8, 

met the servant with an umbrella.—She wept bitterly as soon as 

(326) (325) 

she heard the sentence.—To read aloud in a foreign language 

is a most useful exercise. 

(326) 

CHAPTER XL 

PREPOSITIONS. 

Straniero ^ 

We have already treated of the prepositions di, a, da^ em- 

ployed as segnacasi, in the first chapter ; 

but as prepositions are 

often used in Italian in a way differing altogether from the 

English application of them, we will in this lesson show how 

some of them may be employed. 

Di, of. 

327. In Italian, di is substituted for the English preposition 

to, after nouns which express relationship, inheritance, &c. Ex. 

Voi siete l'erede di ima gran fortuna, 

You are heir to a large fortune. 

TI Principe di Prussia è nipote del The Prince of Prussia is nephew to 

the king. 

328. When the nation or town of a person is mentioned, we 

use the preposition di; but if the town or place of birth is men- 

tioned, to signify a native of that country or town, da is used. 

Ex. 

Questo signore e di Dublino, 

La famiglia Medici di Firenze, 

Raffaello da Urbino, 

Leonardo da Vinci, 

This gentleman is from Dublin. 

The Medicis of Florence. 

Raphael a native of Urbino. 

Leonard a native of Vinci. 

329. When the words road, way, are followed in English by 

the preposition to, in Italian it must be translated by di. Ex. 

me the road to Leghorn. 

Additatemi la strada di Livorno, I Show 

Vho incontrato sulla via di Pisa, \ I met him on the way to Pisa.

PREPOSITIONS. 181 

330. Di is used in the following phrases :- 

Esser adorno di, 

carico di, 

contento di, 

dotato di, 

provveduto di, 

soddisfatto di, 

sorpreso di, 

stupefatto di. 

Viaggiar di giorno^ 

di ?2o«e. 

Vivere di radici e di eròe, 

To be adorned with. 

To be laden or loaded with. 

To be pleased with. 

To be endowed with. 

To be provided with. 

To be satisfied with. 

To be surprised at. 

To be astonished at. 

To travel by day. 

To travel by night. 

To live on roots and vegetables. 

A, to, at. 

331. The preposition a indicates the end or object to which 

the action of a verb, or an idea, is directed ; it expresses tend- 

ency towards, and for this reason, verbs of motion, which always 

imply movement directed towards some point or end, are fol- 

lowed by the preposition a. Ex. 

Eglino vennero a trovarmi, Tliey came to look for me. 

Io mi appoggiai al mziro, I leaned against the wall. 

Avvicinatevi 8l fuoco, Approach the fire. 

Stiamo di casa dirimpetto a voi. We live opposite you. 

332. In Italian, the preposition a is used in a great number 

of expressions and adverbial locutions : 

Andare a due a due, 

Andare al buio, sWoscuro, 

Andare alla volta di Roma. 

Cantare a maravialia, 

Cvcinare alla Francese, ko,.. 

Darsi a conoscere, 

Fare sW^ peggio, alla meglio. 

Giungere n\Y impensata, 

Morire a centinaia. 

Partire alla sfuggita, 

Spendere &\V impazzata, 

Stare a bocca aperta, a capo 

chino, a occhi bassi, &c., 

— 

To go two by two. 

To go in the dark. 

To go towards Eome. 

To sing wonderfully well. 

To cook, in the French fashion. 

To make one's-self known. 

To do one's worst, one's best. 

To arrive suddenly. 

To die by hundreds. 

To set oif by stealth. 

To spend foolishly. 

To remain open mouthed, with 

one's head hung down, with 

downcast eyes.


Stare alla larga^ To keep away from. 

Tagliare afetie^ 

To cut in slices. 

Trattare alla buona, To treat familiarly. 

Trovare le cose alla rinfusa, To find things topsy-turvy. 

Vestire àW Italiana, &c., To dress in the Italian fashion. 

Vivere &\Vantica, 

Un battello a vapore, 

Un bastimento a vela, 

Un mulino a vento, 

Un cannone carico a metraglia, 

To live after the ancient style. 

A steam-boat. 

A sailing-vessel. 

A wind-mill. 

A cannon loaded with grapeshot. 

Un fucile carico a palla, A gun loaded with balls, 

EXERCISE LXXIX. 

— 

Almost all European nations dress in the French fashion. 

Europeo (332) 

This macaroni is dressed in the Neapolitan fashion, with 

maccherone p. (332) 

Parmesan cheese. —One 

Napoletano 

who is endowed with prudence 

Parmigiano formaggio (173) (330) 

promotes his own happiness ; but one who is endowed with 

promuovere 

1 eneficence promotes that of others.—The Brahmins live on 

Bramino (330) 

vegetables.—The hills are covered with snow.—The heat was 

collina (330) neve 

so great that we slept by day and travelled bv night. 

(330) 

Although he was the king's son, and heir to the throne of Eng- 

(256) 

land, the judge reprimanded him.—The eagle, provided with 

giudice aquila (330) 

great wings, strong claws, and sharp beak, is clearly 

[51) artìglio tagliente 

intended to live on prey.—The shepherds who inhabited the 

destinare preda pastore 

plains of Babylon, and those of Egypt, seem to have been the 

pianura Babilonia Egitto (259)


first to devote themselves to the contemplation of the stars. 

consacrare 

Don Quixote mistook a -wind-mill for a giant.—The Swiss 

Chisciotte prendere (332) gigante Svizzero 

soldiers fired on the Neapolitans (with) cannons loaded with 

far fuoco (332) 

grape-shot.—In a short time there will be more steam-boats than 

(332) 

sailing-vessels.— The musical scale was invented by Guido, a 

(332) * scala 

native of Arezzo, called Aretino.—We are happy to hear that 

(328) (244) 

you are pleased with your new home.—The road to Portici 

(330) dimora (329) 

crosses charming hills, covered with vines, from which (the 

attraversare ameno (330) vite 

famous wine, called lagrima Cristi,) (is made). 

1(214) 

Da, from. 

333. The preposition da, from, is used to express the point 

from which a person or thing departs or comes ; it conveys an 

idea of physical or moral movement, separation, derivation, 

difference, and dependence. Ex. 

Non voglio allontanarmi AaW&patria, 

Vengo dalla mia villa, 

Essendo incalzati dal nemico, si 

difesero alla meglio, 

La noia nasce dai piaceri sfrenati. 

^ 

— 

I will not go away from my country. 

I come from my country-seat. 

Being pressed by the enemy, tliey 

defended themselves the best way 

they could. 

Satiety springs from pleasures. 

334. Da is employed with verbs of motion to express at, 

to, when the object towards which the motion is directed is a 

person. Ex. 

Udì seguente Giacomo andò da Teresa, 

Questa sera vi condurrò da lei. 

Ieri venni da voi per pregarvi di 

"gassare oggi da me, 

Next day James went to Teresa. 

I will take you this evening to her. 

Yesterday I called on you to beg of 

you to call on me to-day.

184 niEPOSITlONS. 

But if the object of the movement is tlie place or house of the 

person who is going, it is necessary to say a casa. Ex. 

Vado a casa, 

Voi andate a casa di vostro zio, or 

da vostro zio, 

I am going home. 

You are goiug to your uucle's liouse. 

335. We say partir di Napoli, di Firenze, dalla città being 

understood ; but we must say, partir da lui, partir da loro. 

Ex. 

Abbiamo ricevuto lettere di Londra, | 

We 

I 

have received letters from London. 

336. The employment of the preposition da is varied and extensive, 

as the following examples will show. Ex. 

Abbiamo da vivere, benehè non 

abbiamo molto da. fare, 

Combattè da leone, e si condusse 

sempre da galantuomo. 

Datemi da scrivere, da leggere, 

Dite da vero or davvero ì 

E uriazione da mariuolo, 

Eqli fa da dottore, da medico, 

Cfiulia dalle bianche braccia. 

Lo ha trattato da amico. 

L'ho fatto da me, 

Levarsi da dosso un peso, 

L'errare è da uomo, 

Non è cosa da ridere, 

Uomo da poco, da niente. 

Uomo da bene or dabbene, 

Vi parlo da padrone, e voi dovreste 

ubbidirmi da servo, 

Vi giuro da tiomo d'onore, 

Venite qua da me, 

EXERCISE LXXX. 

We have enough to live, although we 

have not much to do. 

He fouglit like a lion, and always 

acted like a good man. 

Give me something to write, to read. 

Do you speak seriously ? 

It is a knavish trick. 

He plays the doctor. 

Julia of the white arms. 

He has treated him as a friend. 

I have done it alone. 

To get rid of a burden. 

To err is human. 

It is no laughing matter. 

A good-for-nothing man. 

A good or worthy man. 

I speak to you as a master, and yen 

should obey me as a servant. 

I swear to you as an honest man. 

Come over "here near me. 

Sympathy is said to arise from an imaginary change of 

simpatia (214) nascere 

situation with those who excite our compassion.—I called 

eccitare passare 

on him to-day, but he was not at home.—Sublime and pas- 

(334)


sionate eloquence was introduced into Eome not many years 

before the birth of Cicero, by the two Gracchi, by Crassus, and 

nascita Crasso 

by Sulpitius.—The first pheasants came from the banks of the 

Sulpizio fagiano riva 

Phasis, a river of Colchis.—France is separated from Italy by 

Colchide 

the Alps, and from Spain by the Pyrenees.—He lived as a 

AÌ2)e Pireneo (336) 

hero, and died as a Christian.—He did it alone.— I went to 

(336) 

your house, and asked your servant to give me something to 

2 1 (336) 

eat and drink.—They have not treated us as friends.—The 

(336) 

Pyramids served as (burying-places) for the kings.- -Princes 

Piramide sepoltura 

should punish as Christian rulers, and not as executioners. 

(280) (336) carnefice 

From tyranny arises free government, and from the abuse of 

tirannia nascere 

liberty despotism returns. 

Con, with. 

337, The preposition con conveys an idea of company, and 

points out the means by which a thing is achieved. Ex. 

Venite a desinare con noi, 

Spaventare con minacce, 

Il pittore lavora col pennello, lo 

scultore collo scarpello, 

E meglio sdrucciolar coi piedi che 

colla lingua, 

— 

Come and dine with us. 

To terrify with threats. 

A painter works with a brush, and a 

sculptor with a chisel. 

It is better to slip with the feet than 

with the tonsue. 

This preposition is often contracted with the personal pro- 

nouns mi, ti, si ; 7neco, teco, seco, instead of con me, con te, con 

se. Ex. 

N


Se varrai meco, egli ritornerà teco, 1 

If thou comest with me, he will rcturn 

with thee. 

I 

In, into, in. 

338. This preposition indicates station, time, space, ézc. Ex. 

Dimorare in città, i To live in town. 

Eprofessore in quella Università, He is professor in that University. 

Imparo Vltaliaiw in due anni, He learned Italian in two years. 

| 

339. Tlie article is often joined with the preposition in, when 

we wish to convey the idea of anything being inside : in em- 

ployed alone, on the contrary, often implies something on the 

surface. Ex. 

I pesci vivono nel mare, 

L'uccello non è nella gabbia, 

II pranzo è in tavola. 

Aveva il cappello in testa, un amilo 

in dito. 

Fish live in the sea. 

The bird is not in the cage. 

Dinner is on the table. 

He had on his hat, and wore a ring 

on his finger. 

840. In speaking of going to a country, the English preposi- 

tion to is expressed by in. Ex. 

if he wished to go to France, or 

As 

volesse, B. 

Come se in Francia, o in Ispagna, I 

o in 

andar 

alcun altro luogo lontano, to Sixain, or any other distant 

place. 

| 

341. In Italian, the preposition in is often used without ren- 

dering the definite article which accompanies it in English, as 

may be seen from the following examples : 

Vivere in campagna, 

Essere in giardino, in cucina, in 

salotto, 

Avere in mano. 

EXERCISE LXXXI. 

— 

To live in the country. 

To be in the garden, in the kitchen, 

in the parlour. 

To have in the hand. 

Our propensity to sympathize with sorrow is very strong, and 

simpatizzare dolore 

our inclination to sympathize with joy very weak.—The taste 

gioia gusto 

for operas was introduced into France by Cardinal Mazarin. 

When wo Gnd no happiness in ourselves, it is useless to seek it 

inutile (34) 

—


elsewhere.—There is a grandeur in the works of nature which 

altrove. grandezza 

art cannot attain. —Amongst the Eomans, parricides v/ere 

raggiungere 

(tied up) in a sack, and thrown into the sea.—The Chinese have 

legare sacco gettare (339) 

made the first step in many branches of civilisation, but they 

jKisso ramo 

have never made the second.—Will you come with me to 

(337) (340) 

France next summer ?—Esculapius is represented with a 

Esculapio (238) 

snake in his hand.—The royal standard of France was a 

serpente (339) 

stendardo 

gilded staff, with a white silk flag seeded with 

dorare asta (72) bandiera spargere di 

(flowers-de-luce.)—If you do not find them in the garden, go 

(57) giglio. (248) 

_ 

into the house and look 

(341) 

for them.—One learns with one's own 

cercare * 

(213) (156) 

experience, never with that of others.— The Seine falls into 

Senna shoccare 

the sea.—The Chinese eat with two little ivory or ebony 

avorio ebano 

sticks, which they handle with great dexterity. 

(51) stecco maneggiare 

Per, for^ through, by, in. 

342. The preposition per expresses motion through a place, 

and conveys an idea oi passage in the moral and physical analogy 

of the term. Ex, 

Ora viaggia per la Francia, dopo 

aver fatto un giro per l'Italia, 

Ilo ricevuto questo danaro per la 

posta. 

Un'idea strana mi pasfb per la 

mente, 

Per più giorni stava malissimo, 

He is now travelling in France, 

after having made a tour through 

Italy. 

I have received this money through 

the post. 

A strange idea came into my head. 

For several davs he waE vcrv ill.


343. Per is also used to express tlie motive or intention of an 

action it may sometimes ; 

be used to translate the English words 

as, about, from, in, out of ; and in some cases, when joined to an 

infinitive, supplies the place of the present participle. Ex. 

Andate per i fatti vostri, 

Per soverchia letìzia, 

Per non poter tener le risa, 

L'ho incontrato per la strada, 

Go about your business. 

From great joy. 

Not being able to keep from laugh 

ing. 

I met bim in the street. 

344. When the preposition to, which precedes an infinitive, 

has in English the meaning of in order to, on account of, it must 

be translated by per. Ex. 

Lo fari) per non dispiacervi, 

Sono in prigione per aver rubato, 

1 will (lo it in order not to displease 

you. 

They are in prison on account of 

having robbed. 

345. The following are a few of the expressions in which per 

is employed : 

— 

Andar per il dottore, 

Andar per terra, per mare, 

Avete per nidla ciò che io vi dico, 

Gli fu offerto ]peT parte del re. 

I pesci guizzano per mezzo delle 

pinne, 

Levarsi per tempo, 

Pagare dieci scellini per uno, 

Per amor suo lo faro. 

Per mezzo i boschi, 

Per modo or via di diporto. 

Risposero per Vappunto gli uni come 

gli altri, 

Si spaccia per dotto. 

Vendere per minuto, 

Viaggiare per tutto il i 

EXERCISE LXXXII. 

To go for the doctor. 

To go by land, by sea. 

You do not heed what I say to you. 

It was offered to him in the king's 

name. 

Fish swim with the aid of their fins. 

To rise early. 

To pay ten shillings a-piece, a-hcad. 

I will do it for his sake. 

In the midst of woods. 

By way of amusement. 

They answered exactly alike. 

He pretends to be learned. 

To retail. 

To travel all over the world. 

When the family of the King of Macedon was led in 

Macedonia menare 

triumph through the streets of Eome, by Paulus Emilius, their 

trionfo (342) Paolo Emilia


misfortunes attracted the attention of the Romans, more tlian the 

sventura attrarre 

glory of tlieir conqueror.—True generosity sacrifices, in some 

measure, one's own interest to advance that of others.—He 

(344) 

was arrested for not having his passport. —Write to tell us 

(262) passaporto. (344) 

when the marriage is to take place.—The shipwrecked of 

(243) (280) (244) naufrago 

old went about the streets begging and singing, with a 

antichità (343) mendicare 

tablet hung round their neck, on which were painted 

tavoletta appendere intorno a (150) collo dipingere 

their misfortunes, in order to move the public to compassion. 

(344) 

pubblico 

He lost his examination for not having answered cor- 

{Non passò a) (150) esame 

rectly in mathematics and logic.—At last, out of pity for their 

Alia foie (34:3) di 

distress, and out of love (for you) who sent them, I gave them 

vostro 

a pound a piece.—The father of Frederick the Great of Prussia 

(345) 

was the avowed enemy of poets ; having read some verses 

dichiarare 

written on the door of his palace, he sent for the poet, and 

ordered him to go about his business, and leave Prussia. 

(345) 

Su or Sopra, on, upon, over. 

346. These prepositions are used indiscriminately to translate 

Oil, upon, over, and imply rest, reliance, both in the moral and 

literal signification. Ex. 

us rest on the grass. 

Riposiamoci svAVerha, I 

Riposate svi[\& mia parola, 

Let 

Eely on my word. 

Col pastrano sopra le spalle, 1 With a cloak over his shoulders. 

—

190 I'REPOSITIONS 

347 Su, super, np, conveys an idea of elevation ; su, in su, 

expresses tendency towards a certain point. Ex. 

Su per la collina, 

State sa, 

In euWalba, 

Sulla sera, 

Up the hill. 

Stand up. 

Towards dawn. 

At the fall of evening. 

348. Sopra is often used in Italian to express beyond, more 

than, against. Ex. 

Ve7iti mit/lia sopra Firenze, 

Ella amava il figlio sopra la vita sua, 

Ordinarono un grandissimo esercito 

per andare sopra i nemici, B. 

Twenty milea beyond Florence. 

She loved her son more than her life. 

They organized a very numerous 

army to go against the enemy. 

Fra or tra, between, amongst, in the midst of. 

349. These two prepositions are alike in meaning, and indicate 

connexion between two or more objects. Ex. 

Cominciarono tra loro ad aver corir 

siglio, 

Fra due amici, 

Vivere fi'a i piaceri, 

They hegan to consult among themselves. 

Between two friends. 

To live amidst pleasures. 

They also mark a space of time between two dates, or space 

between two objects. Ex. 

Vi pagherà) fra due mesi, 

Tra la libreria e la camera da letto, 

vi era uno sjiogliatoio ed il bagno, 

I will pay you in two months. 

Between the library and the bedroom, 

there was a dressing-room and a 

bath room. 

350. Fiâ or tra, used before one object, implies being in the 

midst of, being surrounded by. Ex. 

Poi quasi stanca, tra la più folta erba 

postami a giacere, mi posava, 

Vi vidi per un momento fra la calca, 

Ex. 

e subito vi persi di vista, 

Then almost tired, amidst the thickest 

grass I lay down to rest. 

I saw you for a moment in the midst 

of the crowd, and then lost sight of 

you. 

351. To speak to one^s-self is translated by parlare tra se. 

Egli aveva il costume di piasseggiar 1 

He used to walk alone, speadng 

solo, e parlar tra se ad alta voce, \ aloud to himself.

— 

FKEPOSITIONS. 191 

EXERCISE LXXXIII. 

Amongst the gods, Jupiter was the first.—Jupiter is frequently 

(349 (22) Giove 

represented with an eagle on the top of his sceptre ; and an 

rappresentato aquila cima scettro 

ivory sceptre, also surmounted by an eagle, was carried by 

avorio (3) sormontare (239) 

the Eomans when they returned victorious.—In that palace a 

murder was committed at the break of day.—I have read that 

omicidio (347) 

Henry iv., King of France, used to amuse himself by carrying 

(280) 

his children on his back.—A country house, situated in the 

(150) spalla p. 

midst of groves and flowers.—There is a flower which, at a 

(350) boschetto {da 

distance, resembles a bee resting on the cup of a 

lontano) rassomigliare ape (266) riposare calice 

flower. He often speaks to himself in the street.—Amongst the 

(351) 

Iroquois, the language with which they express their resolution 

Irocchese linguaggio 

of making war against an enemy is, " Let us go and eat that 

muover a 

nation."—Heather grows up the mountains, and at a distance 

crescere (347) 

gives them a purple hue.—At the fall of evening, bats and 

purpureo tinta. pipistrello 

owls begin to appear. 

civetta sortir fuori. 

352. The following is a list of prepositions which require to 

be followed by the segnacasi di, a, or da, or the noun in the objective, 

which, as will be seen, may often be promiscuously em- 

ployed ; di is generally used before a personal pronoun ; 

—


Accanto, allato, accosto, appresso, 

presso, vicino, dol, al, \\ fuoco, 

Addosso ad uno, 

A guisa, a modo, a foggia, di una 

mezza luna, 

Al di là del, dal mare, 

Al di qua dei, dai monti, 

Alla volta di Firenze, 

Appiè della colonna, 

Avanti, davanti, innanzi, dinanzi, 

alla, la regina. 

Circa venti, or a venti miglia. 

Contro di me. 

Contro al, il nemico, 

Dentro, entro al, il baule. 

Dietro alla, \a, porta. 

Dirimpetto, in faccia, di fronte alla 

chiesa. 

Dopo di voi. 

Dopo la colazione. 

Fino, sino, infino, insino, a Pasqua, 

Vi accompagnerò fino a Parigi, 

Fuori di casa, 

Intorno, d'intorno, attorno alla tavola, 

Incontro a me. 

In mezzo alla, della strada, 

Lungi, lontano, discosto dal proprio 

paese. 

Lungo alla, la spiaggia, 

Oltre a, di ciò, 

Prima, avanti di me. 

Secondo, giusta la vostra opinione. 

Senza danaro. 

Senza di me, senza me. 

Sopra del, al, il letto, 

Verso il cominciar di primavera. 

Verso, inverso, di, a me. 

Near, by tlie side of the fii^. 

On one's person or back. 

In the form of, like a half moon. 

Beyond the sea. 

On this side of the mountains. 

Towards Florence. 

At the foot of the column. 

In the presence of the Queen. 

About twenty miles. 

Against me. 

Against the enemy, 

lu the trunk. 

Behind the door. 

Opposite the church. 

After you. 

After breakfast. 

Until Easter. 

I will accompany you as far as Paris, 

Out of the house. 

Round the table. 

Towards me. 

In the middle of the street. 

Far from one's own country. 

Along the shore. 

Besides, moreover. 

Before me. 

According to your opinion. 

Without money. 

Without me. 

On the bed. 

Towards the beginning of spring. 

Towards me. 

EXERCISE LXXXIV. 

Numa Pompilius, the founder of the ancient religion of Rome, 

Pompilio fondatore 

pretended to be advised by the nymph Egeria, whom he met 

consigliare ninfa 

near a mysterious fountain.—The fleet set sail towards the 

(352) flotta (286) (352) 

Black Sea like a flock of splendid birds.—Hospitality was a 

(352) stormo ospitalità

CONJUNCTIONS, 193 

sacred duty whicli the Caledonians not only practised towards 

sacro Caledone (352) 

friends, but also towards their enemies.—The church is opposite 

my house, and not far from the castle.—The bees flew 

(352) 

castello ape svolazzare 

round the roses.—Demosthenes gave the title of Philippics to 

(352) Demostene Filippica 

the orations he wrote against Philip of Macedon ; and Cicero, 

Filippo Macedonia Cicerone 

in imitation of him, gave the same name to those he wrote against 

a 

Mark Anthony.—They have built a country house near the 

Jifarco Antonio fabbricare 

sea, at the foot of a hill, about thirty miles from town.—Accord- 

(352) (352) (59) 

ing to the king's order, they were led to Palermo.—The brewer 

menare birraio 

makes beer and sells it wholesale or retail, according to the 

all'ingrosso 

wants of his customers.—Murat inhabited the palace Elyséeavventore 

abitare 

Bourbon until his departure for Naples.—The lands beyond the 

(352) partenza (352) 

Alps.—The vineyards and olive-groves along the Arno. 

vigneto oliveta (352) 

CHAPTER XII. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

353. The use of the conjunction pure., yet, is varied and 

difficult. 

Pure is often used instead of the adverb only, and ne pure for 

not only, not even. Ex.

194 CONJUNCTIONS. 

^è avvenne pure una volta, ma se 1 It happened not only once, but we 

ne sariano potute annoverar mille, might reckon a thousand times. 

B. I 

In phrases which express opposition, pure is used for how- 

ever. Ex. 

Ma, j)ure arrabbiato, non volea 

sentir ragione. 

Pur troppo signifies only too. Ex. 

But he, however, being enraged, 

would not listen to reason. 

Èpur trojypo vero, | It is only too true. 

Pure often translates the adverbs also, even, likeunse. Ex. 

Eqli pure /if messo a morte, 

Tu pure mi abbandoni ! 

Tu vuoi ch'io rinnovelli Disperato 

dolor che'l cor mi preme, Già pur 

pensando j)ria ch'io ne favelli, D. 

He also was put to death. 

Even thou forsakest me. 

Thou wilt have me renew the desperate 

grief, which oppresses my 

heart already, even thinking of it 

before I speak. 

Pure is often used as an expletive., to give more force to the 

sense of the phrase. Ex. 

Mangiate pure, 

Ed è pur vero, che l'uomo non si 

contenta mai. 

La cosa andò pur cos'i, 

Do pray eat. 

How true it is, that man is never 

content. 

The affair happened just so. 

354. Se, if, whether, which in English governs the indicative, 

requires, in Italian, the verb to be in the subjunctive, when un- 

certainty or condition is expressed, and in the future when the 

action is future. (See §§ 253, 248.) If the action is present, 

or implies certainty, the indicative is to be employed. Ex. 

Se il soccorso fosse giunto in tempo. 

Se ci pagherete alla fine del mese. 

Se i nostri antenati non avevano 

tante ricchezze, essi avevano certamente 

meno vizii della presente 

generazione, 

Se io dico ciò è jêr vostro bene, 

If the aid had arrived in time. 

If you pay us at the end of the 

month. 

If our forefathers had not so much 

wealth, they had certainly fewer 

vices than the present genera- 

tion. 

If I say that it is for your good. 

355. The following conjunctions require almost always the 

verb to be in the subjunctive :—

CONJUNCTIONS. 195 

Accnoche, -Jiè, 

) 

Affinchè. he, Un order that. 

Perchè, e, ) , . 

,. . 

A condizione che, > _^^^_^ npon condition 

A patto che, [- tliat, provided 

Dato che, admitting that. 

Di tema che, l for fear that, lest, 

' 

Fer tema che, ) 

.-,. 

Fino a tanto che, ì till such time 

Finché, > as, until, as 

Purché, 

if. i 

AiHinti che. 

Anzi che, befonJ- 

Prima che, J 

A meno che, except, unless. 

Sinché, J long as. 

Nel caso che, in case that. 

Non che, not that. 

Nonostante che, notwithstanding. 

Posto che, 

supposing, pro- 

Benché, 

Ancorché, ) although. 

Quantunqu ique, ) 

Conciosiaché, achè, \ , 

j^ ^^^^ ^,^^^^ 

Avvegnaché, ) 

"I 

Posto il caso che, >- vided that. 

Supposto che, ) in case. 

g—.}if;incase. 

_ 

Quando che, whenever, if, though. 

EXERCISE LXXXV. 

" May I die if I do not revenge myself on you," said 

(354) 

vendicare 

Euclid's brother to him ; " and T," replied Euclid, " if I do not 

(a Euclide suo fratello) 

force you to love me again."—The Apostles received the gift of 

Apostolo 

tongues in order that they might preach to all the nations of 

(355) 

predicare 

the earth.—They can write pretty well although they are quite 

(102) (355) (190) 

blind.—As long as the Tarquins lived, there was union between 

cieco (355) Tarquinio 

the Eoman people and the nobles, as the latter feared a recon- 

nolile (163) 

ciliation between the people and the banished tyrants.—Yes, he 

scacciare 

replied, I rejoice that my son is great in the face of men, 

(231) * faccia a 

provided he is good in the eyes of God.—Although Phocion 

(355) a (355) Focione 

was elected general by the Athenians fully forty times, he was 

hen 

nevertheless condemned to death by them, and was not even 

nondimeno (218) 2(353)

196 CONJUNCTIONS. 

permitted (to him) tbe right of burial.—Regulus kept only 

âccordare sepoltura Regolo mantenere 

too well the promise that he gave to the Carthaginians, although 

Cartaginese (355) 

he knew (that a) certain death awaited him at his return to 

attendere 

the enemy.— Vespasian was all but condemned to 

Vespasiano [corse pericolo di essere) 

death, because he happened to yawn whilst Nero was 

[gli venne fatto) sbadigliare Nerone [237) 

singing in a theatre at Eome.— If it is not true, it is well 

(354) 

invented, says an Italian proverb.— If we did not succeed, it 

trovare proverbio (354) riuscire 

was not our fault. 

coljm 

356. Ne. ..ne, neither... nor ; se non che., but, only ; ^«cAè, 

fintantoché, fino a che, unti] ; 

to be accompanied by the negation. Ex. 

Fintantocliè non ahhia più certe 

prove della sua capacità, 

Attendetemi finché io non ritorni, 

Non possedeva se non clie un piccolo 

poderetto. 

Non si deve ne con1 pa parole né con 

azioni far danno al prossimo, 

these conjunctions require the verb 

Until you liave surer proofs of bis 

capacity. 

Wait for me till 1 return. 

He only possessed a little fami. 

One slioiild not injure one's neig 

bour either in word or deed. 

357. Anzi,— this conjunction is often used alone to signify 

on the contrary, with pleasure, moreover ; anzi che no signifies 

i'ather. Ex. 

Non ardivano ad aiutarlo, anzi 

cogli altri insieme gridavano dici 

fosse morto, B. 

Volete due sparagi ? Anzi mifarà 

Vlio incontrato, anzi gli ho parlato, 

Egli che è ricco anzi che no, 

They did not venture to aid him ; 

on the contrary, they exclaimed 

with the others that he was dead. 

Will you have a little asparagus? 

With pleasure. 

I met him, and, moreover, I spoke 

to him. 

He who is rather rich. 

358. The following are the most common conjunctive locutions 

;—

Almeno, at least. 

A fine di, in order to. 

Cioè, that is. 

Cioè a dire, that is to say. 

Ciò non di meno, 

Ciò nvn per tanto, 

'J 

neveri 

Ciò non ostante, 

however. 

Contuttociò, 

Di maniera che, 

J 

) 

Talmente che, > so that. 

In modo che, ] 

Infine, ") in short, in conclu- 

In .wmma, ) sion. 

Mentre che, ) , -, , , 

Tanto die, 

whilst, as long as. 

} 

Neppure io, &c., nor I either. 

Nemmeno voi, &c. , nor you either. 

Nondimeno, \ nevertheless, how- 

Nulladimeno, ) ever. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 197 

Olt radiche. 

Oltre che, 

EXERCISE LXXXVI. 

besides that. 

0...0, oppure.. .oppure. 

Ovvero... ovvero, 

Ossia... ossia. 

Perche, why, because. 

Perochè, ) 

Perciocché, > because. 

Imperciocché, ) 

(either 

|...or. 

Poiché, \ since, seeing that. 

Giacche, / after. 

Quaìid' è così, in that case. 

Quand'ecco, when, all at once. 

F.econdo che, according as. 

Suhito che, ì 

Tosto che, > as soon as. 

Appena che, ) 

Tanto jnù, so much the moro. 

Tuttavia, ) nevertheless, yet, at 

Tuttavolta, \ all events, however. 

The inventor of gunpowder was neither a hero nor a 

schioppo (15) polvere (356) eroe 

soldier. — Danger does not dannt the war-horse ; on the 

intimidire destriero 

contrary, it appears only to add new fire to his courage.—An 

(357) (232) aggiungere 

(idle man) counts the minutes, whilst a (busy man) scarcely 

ozioso (358) industrioso 

counts the years. — Metaphors may be used in every style ; 

metafora (214) 

however, we find them oftenest either in familiar language or in 

(358) (358) linguaggio 

poetry.—In short, languages always preserve the impress of the 

(358) ritenere impronta 

times in which they have been formed.—It is a great misfortune 

neither to have talent enough to speak well, nor judgment enough 

(34) senno 

to be silent.—Since you are not able to defend your opinion, you 

(288.) (358)

198 DELLA INTERIEZIONE. 

must not advance it. 

— 

No philosopher ever described a republic 

(202) filosofo dipingere 

either so beautiful or so just as that which was instituted by the 

(358) 

(239) istituire 

Apostles,—In that case yon are free to do as you like best.—As 

(358) 2 3(236) 1 

soon as a new fashion appears, however ridiculous, we are ready 

(358) moda (212) ridicolo 

to adopt it.—The imitation of evil always exceeds the example, 

male superare 

whilst the imitation of good is always rather inferior.—Man has 

(358) (357) 

free-will, so that he can do good and avoid evil. 

volontà (358) 

bene 

CHAPTER XIII. 

DELLA INTERIEZIONE. 

359. Le interiezioni esprimono sorpresa, gioia, dolore, e vari 

affetti dell'animo. Le più usitate sono le seguenti. 

0, Oh, Oi, Oime. 

me beato sojjra gli altri amanti. P. 

Oh liberalità di Natan quanto se'tu maravigliosa. B. 

Oime lassa me, dolente me, in che mal ora ìiacqui f B. 

Talora, singolarmente nelle espressioni di dolore, dopo l'ad- 

diettivo, che accenna la miseria, si pone la persona in dativo, per 

proprietà di linguaggio. Oh poverino a me ch'io non sarò mai 

pili buono a nidla. Firenzuola. 

Fra Ahi e mi si frappone talvolta alcuna voce dinotante mag- 

giore effetto. 

Ahi lassa me ch'assai chiaro conosco, come io ti sia poco cara I 

B. 

Deh, Interiezione deprecativa che corrispondo all'inglese />ra^,

DEL RIPIENO. 199 

suole .iver dopo di se il vocativo : Deh, amico mio, perchè vuo'tii 

entrare in questa fatica ? B. 

Guai, Interiezione di minaccia, o di dolore che ha dopo di se 

il dativo : Guai a me die mi mancò quello che ]nù m'era di biso- 

gno. Passavanti. 

Così, si adopra a modo d'interiezione, e in buona e in cattiva 

parte : Così cresca il bel lauro in fresca riva. P. 

E così vada, s'è pur mio destino. P. 

DEL KIPIENO. 

360. Chiamansi Ripieno alcune particelle completive proprie 

della lingua Toscana, le quali non sono assolutamente necessarie 

alla tela grammaticale, che potrebbe stare senz'esse ; ma che 

però accrescono all'orazione forza, grazia, e ornamento. Noi 

faremo soltanto menzione di alcune delle più comuni. 

Ecco^ Questa particella si suole adoperare in principio di 

clausola, e dà forza al parlare, mostrando tolora prontezza al- 

l'operazione, ed affetto : Ecco, io non so ora dir di tio, per tal 

donna me n'hai pregato. B. 

Bene, Questa particella accresce forza di espressione al dis- 

corso : La donna disse : bene, io il farò. B. 

Talvolta si trova preceduta dalla particella sì ed ora : Disse 

Calandrino : sì bene. B. 

Or bene, come faremo? B. 

Bello, si adopera addietivamente come ripieno di forza : Le 

portò cinquecento he.' fiorini d'oro. B. 

B. 

Pure, aggiunge evidenza. La cosa andò pur così. B. 

Già, aggiunge forza : Orafossero essipur già disposti a venire. 

Mica, Punto, aggiungono eificacia alla negazione : Una ne 

dirò, non mica d'uomo di poco affare. B. 

Madonna, Tetaldo non è punto morto, ma è vivo, e sano. B. 

Egli, Ella, si adoprano per ornamento, e sono sempre invari- 

abili : Egli non sono ancora molti anni passati, che in Firenze fu 

una giovane. B.

200 dell'apostrofo. 

Ella non andrà così. B. 

Esso, si adopra indeclinabile in ambedue i generi e numeri, 

dopo la particella con^ avanti alcuni pronomi, e anche senza. 

Fatti alla finestra e chiamala, e dì che venga a desinare con 

esso noi. B. 

Oka, si adopra per ripigliare, o continuare il discorso : Come 

non sapete voi quello, che questo voglia dire f Ora io ve l'ho udito 

dire mille volte. B. 

Le particelle 3Ii, Ci, Ti, Vi, Si, Ne, si trovano accompagnate 

ai verbi senza necessità, ma per sola proprietà di linguaggio : Io 

mi credo, che le suore sian tutte a dormire. B. 

Che tu con noi ti rimanga per questa sera n'è caro. B. 

Chetamente ne andò per la camera infino alla finestra. B. 

Non, si pone talvolta dove nulla opera per proprietà di lin- 

guaggio : Diragli da mia parte che si guardi di non aver troppa 

creduto, o di non credere alle favole di Giannotto. B. 

Uno, Quell'uno, quest'uno, e simili, dove la voce uno è di più, 

e solamente accenna con maggior evidenza, e precisione : Deh 

desti tu a tutte, o a quest'uno, quella fede che a me donasti ? B. 

E caramente accolse a se quell'ima. P. 

Tutto, aggiunge energia : La donna udendo costui parlare, il 

quale ella teneva mutolo, tutta stordì. B. Tutto a pie fattosi loro 

incontro, ridendo disse. B. 

DELL'APOSTROFO. 

361. Chiamasi Apostrofo quel piccolo segno a guisa di virgola 

che suol porsi al termine, o al principio d'una parola come contrassegno 

di mancamento di lettere. Così: grand' eroe manca 

della vocale e, e l'apostrofo posto al termine della tronca parola 

lo indica. 

Gli Accademici della Crusca nella Prefazione al Vocabolario 

insegnano che non sempre in mancanza di una o più lettere si 

deve far uso dell'apostrofo : e che quelle parole che soglionsi 

troncare anche quando vengon seguite da consonante, non vanno

dell'apostkofo. 201 

segnate dell'apostrofo né pur quando incontransi con vocale : 

perciò cuor^ parlar^ pensier e altre simili voci che si possono 

troncare, seguane o vocale, o consonante, si scrivono senza apos- 

trofo anche innanzi a vocale. Quindi si scrive un uomo senza 

apostrofo, poiché si può anche scrivere un libro, &c. : ma non si 

dovrà scrivere un anima senza il contrassegno della mancanza 

della vocale a, non potendosi scrivere un donna, ma ima donna; 

quindi converrà scrivere un'anima facendo uso dell'apostrofo. 

Le parole della Lingua Toscana finiscono tutte in vocale, da 

pochi monosillahi in fuori : per, in, non, con, &c. Ond'è, che 

sovente, o per togliere alcuna asprezza di suono, o per render più 

concatenata, e robusta l'orazione si troncano le parole in fine, e 

segnansi di apostrofo. 

I nomi Italiani ammettono generalmente l'apostrofo nel sin- 

golare allorché s'incontrano con una vocale. Come : otiest'uomo, 

fedeV amico. 

Non però nel plurale, se non quando le due vocali che s'incon- 

trano, siano le stesse. Quindi bisognerà scrivere onesti uomini 

essendo le due vocali differenti : ma si potrà però scrivere dold in- 

canti, piaggeerbose avendo luogo l'incontro fra due i e due e. 

Le parole sulle quali si trattiene alcun poco la voce non si 

troncano, e ciò avviene delle parole ultime dei periodi, membri, &c. 

Le parole che hanno l'accento in sull'ultima sillaba non si tron- 

cano, né si dice per esempio : pari' onestamente per parlò ones- 

tamente. 

La parola che con tutti i suoi composti, benché, perchè, &c., 

quantunque abbiano l'accento in sull'ultima sillaba, pure vanno 

eccettuate, solendo talvolta ricever l'apostrofo : Bench'effe /osse 

contraffatta della persona. B. 

Le parole che finiscono in a non si troncano innanzi a conso- 

nante, eccettuatone Suora quando sta per aggettivo, usata come 

sostantivo non ammette troncatura ; e l'avverbio ora con tutti i 

suoi componenti : Non intendo, disse la Suora, se più specijìca- 

meìile non parlate. Passavanti. Vide correre suor Maria alla 

sua cella. Firenzuola. Talor sua dolce vista rasserena. B. 

o

202 dell'apostrofo. 

Innanzi a consonante possono troncarsi le parole che finiscono 

in e senz'accento ; purché l'ultima consonante che rimane, tolto 

via Ve sia una di queste, /, ?i, r, e la seguente parola non cominci 

da un s impura : Non si vuol dire, B. Datole mangiar pan 

lavato. B. Essendo una mattina il marito di lei cavalcato in 

alcun luogo per dovere stare alcun giorno. B. 

L'avverbio come, la voce nome, ed i plurali dei nomi che finis- 

cono in e non si troncano. Quindi non si può dire : pen^gravi 

per pene gravi : riè com^state, nom'conosciuto, per come state, nome 

conosciuto. 

Le voci grande. Frate quando stanno per addiettivi, e pre- 

cedono immediatamente il loro sustantivo, perdono l'ultima sillaba 

innanzi a consonante : Gli convenne fare gran mercato di ciò, che 

portato aveva. B. Fu, oltre ad ogni altro, grande, e presto versi- 

ficatore. B. Fra Puccio non andava mai fuor della terra. B. 

Le parole che finiscono in i si possono non di rado troncare 

innanzi a consonante. Si cominciarono ad avere in odio fuor 

di modo. B, 

Molte parole finienti in lo, mo, no, ro, so, si troncano dell'ul- 

tima vocale innanzi a consonante. La sera desiare, odiar l'aurora 

Soglion questi tranquilli, e lieti amanti. P. Andiam, che la vii. 

lunga ne sospinge. D. Questo farò io volentieri, sol che voi pro- 

mettiate. B. 

Le parole che finiscono il Ilo, mio, si trovano spesso troncate 

dell'ultima sillaba. Bel giovane, e grande della persona. B. 

Vagliami il lungo studio e'I grande amore. Che m'hiin fatto cercar 

lo tuo volume. D. Le voci corallo, cristallo, ballo, snello, non si 

trovano mai tronche. 

La voce santo innanzi a vocale perde Vo, e riceve l'apostrofo, 

innanzi a consonante si tronca dell'ultima sillaba purché stia per 

addiettivo, e sia innanzi immediatamente al suo sustantivo, e 

questo sia nome proprio : Venutosene per lo corso degli Adimari 

infino a San Giovanni. B. Uno antichissimo nostro Vescovo, e 

Cittadino, Zanobìo il Santo. Salvini. Andiam noi con esso lui 

a Roma ad impetrare dal Sauto Padre. B. / miracoli di Sant'- 

Antonio.

dell'accrescimento delle parole. 203 

Le voci dell'infinito dei verbi si possono troncare deirultima 

vocale innanzi a consonante, ed innanzi a vocale, sostitxtendovi 

l'apostrofo. Simili troncature però s'incontrano rade volte nei 

buoni Autori, e debbonsi solamente praticare, quando l'orecchio 

lo consiglia : E veggendo se non poter ritornare^ in tanto mutò 

V animo, che mimo più fiero Ghibellino, e a Guelfi avversario, fu 

come lui. B. 

DELL'ACCRESCIMENTO DELLE PAROLE. 

362. Nella Lingua Toscana sovente si accrescono le parole in 

principio, o in fine, o per togliere l'asprezza, che nasce dall'in- 

contro di alcune consonanti, o per empiere l'iato, che risulta dal 

concorso delle vocali. 

Quando la parola finisce in consonante, e quella che viene 

appresso, comminci da s segi;ita da un'altra consonante, si può 

accrescere la seconda parola in principio d'un i, per raddolcir 

la pronunzia : Voi mi avete colto in iscambio. B. Di scoglio in 

iscoglio andando. B. 

Le particelle a, e, o, innanzi a parola che cominci da vocale, 

si soglion talvolta accrescere di un d ; et la particella su in simil 

caso si accresce di un r: Vi cominciarono le genti s.à andare, e 

ad accender lumi, e ad adorarlo. B. Ed ivi presso correva un 

fiumicello. B. Senza far Viotto ad amico, od a parente. B. 

Radunare ogni mese la banda del suo quartiere in sur una piazza. 

Segni. 

I Poeti accrescono talora le voci, che hanno l'accento in sull'ultima 

sillaba, di un'e, o di un o, per far più sonoro il verso : Ed 

ecco più andar mi tolse un rio, Che'n ver sinistra con sue picciole 

onde Piegava, Vei^ba, che'n sua ripa uscio. D. Che quasi un bel 

sereno a mezsdl die Fer le tenebre mie. P. 

Nei Prosatori antichi s'incontrano sovente tali accrescimenti, e 

non sono scarse le occasioni ove garba anche oggi il terminare 

con la la terza voce singolare dei preteriti della seconda, e terza 

coniugazione.

204 UECAriTULATOIlY EXERCIBEb 

IIECAPITULATOKY EXERCISES 

ON ALL THE RULES. 

ON THE CUSTOMS AND HABITS OF THE ANCIENT 

CALEDONIANS. 

The ancient Caledonians esteemed highly the vigour of 

(54) Caledone pregiare alto (310) 

the body ; majesty of person, robustness of the limbs and 

(25) (35) mcmhro (60^) 

swiftness in the race, constituted the principal merit of tlieir 

velocità corso (245^) (140) 

heroes. They considered also as an important quality, the 

(213) anche pregio 

strength of the voice, either because it was a sign of personal 

gagliardia (358) indizio 2 

strength, or because it (was useful) in frightening the 

Sforza valer molto per atterrire (262) 

enemies, and in inspiring (to) the soldiers with courage. This 

* 2*1 

quality was moreovernecessary for (to) them, to make themselves 

inoltre 

* 

(131) (228) 

heard, in spite of winds and torrents, in calling to war a mul- 

inf. a dispetto (25) (17) (35) (263) 

titude of men, who lived dispersed in groves and deserts. 

(58) (177) 

per bosco (51) 

But neither physical qualities nor military exploits entitled 

(356) impresa dar diritto 

llìem to fame, if unaccompanied by justice and humanity. 

quando andar disgiunto (17)

ON Al.I, THE KUl.ES. 205 

The erne], the tyrannical, and the violent, were generally 

pi. sopraffattore pi. pi. 

stigmatized with the ignominious title of " ignoble souls." 

coiidannare oscuro 

The principal and almost perpetual exercise of the Caledonians 

perpetuo 

was war, which they undertook in order to revenge an injury 

intraprendere (186) torto 

done to the nation or to an individual, and sometimes merely 

particolare talora 

from the desire of conquest. They always sent to declare war 

per * (213) (2452) 

by a herald, and a curious ceremony was that of defying to 

per araldo sfidare 

battle : a singer plants a lighted torch on the top of 

cantore accendere {12) fiaccola punta 

a lance, shakes it to the wind, and then sticks it in the 

scuotere [12Q) 

quindi conficcare 

* 

ground, accompanying this act with words of defiance. If the 

terra sfida 

herald intended to offer peace, he threw his lance at the foot of 

(5) 

him to whom he was sent ; and the same act was amongst 

(165) 

{21A.) inviare 

warriors a sign of friendship and reconciliation, or it indicated 

that the warrior acknowledged himself vanquished. The unfordarsi 

per vincere 

tunate or oppressed who came to ask help from the 

pi. pi. (9) soccorso (307) 

generous and powerful, presented themselves in an attitude 

pi. pi. cdteggicnnento 

suited to their situation ; they held in one hand a shield 

convenevole scudo 

covered with blood, and in the other a broken lance ; 

the former 

(306) spezzare (163) 

in sign of the death of their friends, the latter as an emblem of 

per *

206 RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES 

their misery and despair. If the chieftain resolved to help 

capo soccorrere 

them, he presented (to) them with a shell, symbol of hospitality 

(124) * conca 

and friendship. 

In war they did not make use of horses, which were scarce 

(11) (12) 

in a mountainous country. They always mention " the 

^ 

^paese far memion di 

horses of the strangers," which shows that the few they hai 

straniero (171) (286) quello 

were pillaged from the Britons or the Danes. The nobles, 

predare sopra Britanno Danese 

nevertheless, used to go sometimes in a chariot, either on 

contuttocib (245^) talora sopra 

account of the dignity of their rank, or in order to be better disgrado 

(110) 

tinguished from their followers. Their battles were fought with 

seguace (214) 

great ferocity, and without any discipline ; night separated the 

(80) ferocia (25) dividere 

combatants, and to attack the enemy by night was considered a 

(34) (330) riputare 

base and ignoble action. The chase after war was the 

d'animo basso (73) caccia 

common occupation of the Caledonians, especially as with 

speciale (311) 

this exercise alone they provided for their subsistence, and sup- 

* 

^solo a 

plied (to) the deficiency of agriculture. All the warriors, and 

mancanza 

particularly young men, (took pride) in being skilful in the 

giovane pregiarsi di inf. destro 

chase ; but he who was simply a hunter, and only exercised 

(173) [2,%) cacciatore 

the vigour of his arm against (wild beasts), was despised as 

fiera

ox ALL THE RULES. 207 

cowardly and unwarlike, (so that) this distinctive title became a 

codardo iìiibelle cosicché 

term of reproach. 

rimprovero. 

The greatest passion of the Caledonians was singing. The 

(264) 

enthusiasm for poetry and music could not be carried farther 

(25) (214) spingere (322) 

than by those rough but sensitive mountaineers. Their 

(107) [facessero] (160) rozzo sensibile 

wars commenced and ended with song ; songs were the most 

welcome seasoning of their banquets ; by singing they 

aggradevole condimento convito (214) 

rendered funereal honours (to the dead ;) the warriors sank to sleep 

funebre 

^ 

^pl. (231) 

amidst songs to the sound of the harp ; with songs they went 

(213) 

to meet the guests, the most distinguished and honoured ; 

[incontro a) ospite 

music in short had a share in all their affairs, whether serious or 

(358) 

'^ parte serio 

pleasing ; and it may be said, in (a certain) measure, the 

potere (214) qualche modo 

Caledonians led a musical life. 

vivere sub. 2 ^ 

After abolishing the Druids, they maintained the order of 

Vabolimento di Druido 

the bards, or singers, which had been established amongst them 

bardo 

in the most remote times, and whose principal office was to 

da (180) 

celebrate in verse the most brilliant deeds of the nation, and of 

luminoso fatto 

the heroes. Each chief, or distinguished member of the tribe, 

eroe. (192) tribù 

bad (in his service) one or more of these bards ; they followed 

presso di se 

'


everywhere the chieftain on whom they depended, and performed 

(193) da fare 

the functions of ambassadors and heralds. Their character was 

ambasciatore (17) 

respected, and held sacred, even by usurpers and enemies ; 

tenere sacro usurpatore 

and their lays were the most precious reward of the exploits 

canzone guiderdone (60*) 

of heroes, and were considered as the great consolation in death, 

and the necessary requisite for happiness in the other life. 

^ 

'^ 

To preserve the 

(196) 

memory of their most famous deeds, the 

(344) conservare (60*) 

Caledonians used to erect a stone, which was called by them 

rizzare (239) 

" The stone of memory^^ and this event was accompanied by 

(214) (16) 

songs and particular ceremonies. A warrior, followed by 

(16) 

^ 

one or more bards, repaired (to the spot) where the deed had 

portarsi colà fatto 

happened, the fame of which he desired to immortalize ; he 

(244) 

volere (280) immortalare 

then raised a torch over an oak-trunk, and with this he 

alzare fiaccola 

intended to invite the shades of his ancestors to witness this 

(308) (108|) riguardare 

trophy of their descendant's glory. Under the stone was 

trofeo (214) 

placed a sword and some rings of the enemy's shield ; 

collocare cerchio (57) 

and the stone was then surrounded by a heap of earth. All 

(239) (321) attorniare di cumulo 

this proceeding was executed in cadence, the movements of the 

operazione (214) fare 

warrior (being in accordance) with the musical notes of the bards, 

adattarsi a 

" '

ON ALL THE RULKS, 209 

who accompanied bim with songs. It is said that some of 

(123) (214) 

those " stones of memory" are still (to be found) in the north. 

(214) trovare nord. 

Concerning marriages, there are found no particular laws 

Intorno a maritaggio (57) * (214) 3 i 

or ceremonies ; and although the name of wife often occurs, it 

2 

3 4 2 itrovarsi 

(256) 

is not clearly known in what it differed from that of friend 

; 

2 1 

(214) 

(255) 

the simple wish of both parties formed or dissolved a marriage. 

volontà matrimonio. 

In marriages approved of by the parents, it appears that a 

confermare * 

congiunto (232) 

dowry was given. An Irishwoman had the right to ob- 

dote (239) Irlandese (64) 

tain a divorce from her husband without alleging any other 

* (141) allegare 

* 

reason than her will, and covdd, at the same time, claim the 

pretendere 

half of the flocks. Besides, abductions were frequent, and 

(78) greggia. ratto 

often followed by murders amongst the relations and rivals, 

omicidio congiunto 

sometimes by wars between nations. 

talora 

Hospitality was common amongst the Caledonians, and some 

of them practised it even towards their enemies. This duty 

(126) anche 

was sacred, and became hereditary in families. Every guest 

(192) ospite 

had a right to claim help from another in his perils ; they 

* soccorso 

(were accustomed), in separating, to exchange shields, which 

costumare ref. scambiare 

they afterwards preserved in their halls, in order that their 

poi conservare sala (256)

210 RECAPITULATOKY EXERCISES 

descendants might have a testimony of the friendship of their 

posteri 

parents. If, in the heat of battle, two enemies happened to 

padre calor venire (9) 

discover that their ancestors had been mutual guests, they deantenato 

* 

posed their arms immediately, and renewed between them the 

ancient friendship. (On this account) it was considered as a 

Quindi è che (214) 

cowardly act to reveal one's name, or to seek that of the 

^codardo ^ svelare (156) ricercare 

enemy, as it seemed a pretext to escape the conflict ; and the 

sottrarsi a cimento 

* 

man who reveals his name to the enemy was a proverbial term of 

2 

(165) 

contempt. 

ignominia. 

It does not appear that they had any knowledge of arts, 

(232') (251) * conoscenza 

except that of building roughly some houses of stone for the 

fuorché (262) rozzo (310) 

chiefs of the tribes, and of manufacturing iron for the purposes 

tribù lavorare * uso 

of war. It is unknown what liquor they made use of for 

(214) ignorare 

drink, which was served in shells, and from this comes the 

bevanda (239) conca (168) 

phrase in Ossian, " The feast of shells." They liked to invite 

(50) 

amare 

one another reciprocally to banquets, which were spread with 

convito (214) imbandire 

the gifts of the chase. 

dono 

The night, which for the most part was 

* 

devoted to their feasts, was illuminated by torches of burning 

destinare (239) confiaccola acceso 

oak, as candles were unknown. For the most particular solem- 

(72) ignoto. In

ON ALL THE KULES. 211 

nities, the entire trunk of an oak was burned, which 

abbruciare 

(they apparently) reserved for this use, and called " The trunk 

sembrava a tronco 

of the feast." It is (to be observed,) that in the feasts and 

cosa osservabile 

rejoicings of the Caledonians, in which, as we have already said, 

allegrezza 

(1'''9) 

music had always the pri)icipal share, there is never any men- 

(25) parte * (214) (313) * 

tion made of (dancing,) although this has naturally a strict 

danze (256) naturale (311) 

connexion with music, and the universal custom of all nations 

"" 

'uso (187) 

has rendered dancing inseparable from poetry and music. 

(264) 

It seems that the Caledonians had no distinct notions of reli- 

(232) (251) 

gion ; nevertheless some ideas are found amongst them, which 

lêrò (214) 

(were meant) to supply (to) that defect. We find frequently invalere 

dicated a class of spirits, which seem of a superior order to the 

^ ^ 

(19) 

spirits of the dead ; they bear no particular name, but are 

pi. avere (214) 

only denominated after that part of nature in which it is 

soltanto da (214) 

supposed they particularly delighted ; such as the spirits of the 

(251) 

dilettarsi 

tempests, of the mountains, of the night, of the heavens, &c. 

They considered that the air was swarming with these spirits, 

{251) popolare di 

and they attributed to them all the phenomena of nature.—The 

(131) 

immortality of the soul was one of the principal points of the

212 RECAPITULATORY EXERClSKa 

doctrine of tlie Druids, universally and faithfully preserved by 

conservare 

the Caledonians ; and they considered, that after death their 

amusements 

trattenimento 

would be the same as those which had occupied 

them in this life. They thought they could hunt amidst 

(123) 

andare a caccia 

the clouds, with darts of mist, aerial stags, or continue 

nuvola di aereo cervo 

former wars against the shades of their enemies. (As they were 

antico con Siccome 

to preserve) their passion for song, they were to hasten wherever 

conservavano accorrere ovunque 

the voice of their praises summoned them. 

lode chiamare 

The Caledonians, like the Greeks and the Eomans, consi- 

Greco[bi) 

dered it as the greatest misfortune not to be buried ; but 

* 

(121) 

seppellire 

sepulture was not sufficient for their happiness ; the shades of 

(25) a ombra 

the departed could not enjoy that species of beatitude which the 

trapassare godere di 

uncultivated mind of the Caledonians had imagined, until a 

rozzo mente L (355) 

funereal song was chanted in their honour ; this was considered 

* Canzone cantare 

as the most sacred duty towards the dead. Until this honour 

estinto pi. 

was paid to the spirits, they wandered through the clouds agitated 

rendere errare 

and tossed by the winds like a ship in a tempest. The funereal 

travagliare (352) 

* ^ 

elegy (being sung), the freed spirit ascended to the highest 

êlegia i(274) spiv'gionare 

and purest region of the air, and there received a kind of 

(319)

ON ALL THE RULES. 213 

reward or chastisement, according to his past conduct. Valorguiderdone 

gastigo (352) 

^ 

ous men, who had distinguished themselves by generous and mag- 

' 

(228) 

con 

nanimous actions, were met by their fathers with a serene and 

smiling aspect ; (whilst, on the contrary,) the proud and cruel 

(268) per lo contrario superbo 

were terrified by the frowning aspect of their indignant fathers, 

spaventare oscuro 

who chased them far from the habitations of heroes, to wander 

scacciare 

through wands and tempests. Finally, cowards, and all those 

^poi ^(25) 

who lived ivithout infamy or without praise, to (make use of) a 

e per usare 

phrase from Dante, were (driven back) into the mist, a fit 

espressione di ricacciare dentro * degno 

dwelling for the slothful and ignoble. 

soggiorno di neghittoso 

The Caledonians placed a superstitious trust in omens, and 

prestare 

^ 

^fede a presagio 

any sudden sound whatever was believed by them to be the 

* improvviso 

' \2n) (239) 

warning voices of spirits. If the chords of their harps, 

ammoiiitore {Qo) arpa 

agitated a little by the wind, (sighed forth) a faint sound, this 

scuotere mandare Heggiero ^ 

was the sign of a shade, who, in passing, touched the harp, and 

(263) 

informed (those assembled) of the death of an absent friend. 

avvisare gli astanti lontano 

The howling of dogs, the wagging of their ears, and the sudden 

urlare crollare 

* 

bounding of stags and goats, were also fatal omens, as it was 

s/anc2bpl. (57) cervo cavriolo funesto (214) 

believed that those animals could see from afar the shades of the 

(251) (276)


dead. Sometimes they imagined (they saw) a rain of blood 

pi. di vedere 

which announced approaching war, and they even thought they 

prossimo di 

perceived in their houses the arms of the distant warriors tinted 

inf. Hontano 

^ 

with blood, which was considered as an infallible sign of their 

di (171) 

death.—The Caledonians had for the shades of their ancestors a 

religious respect, which did not, however, reach to adoration or 

^ ' 

però giungere 

worship ; 

they were never wearied praising them and celebrating 

culto (214) (313) sto«care (265) inf. 

their exploits, and at every moment they thought they saw and 

impresa (192) inf. 

heard them. They retired to their mountains with the inteninf. 

(128) ref. sopra 

tion of conversing with them ; they also invoked them before 

(262) 

war, and in the most important solemnities, not, however, as 

beings that could give them aid, but only as witnesses and 

ente (276) (131) 

friends. 

From these pretended signs, it appears they had formed a kind 

Su (232) (251) 

of divination, of which they made use in some cases. When they 

were in doubt as to whom should be confided the command of 

* (172) dovere {2U) 

the battle, they used to invoke the shades of their ancestors, 

solere (280) 

striking three times on their shields, and then retired to sleep, 

volta quindi ref. 

supposing that the shades would appear to them and design the 

(251) 

destinare

ON ALL THE RULES. 215 

most worthy for the battle. Re-awakened, they related faithdegno 

a Risvegliare (245^) 

fully their dream, and described the form, attitude, and 

(35) atteggiamento 

voice of the spirits they had seen ; and whoever could relate the 

(211) 

riferire 

most distinct and least equivocal indications of the will of 

equivoco (53) contrassegno 

the shades, was chosen from amongst the others. It is pro- 

{2^9) prescegliere * 

bablo that they had another kind of divination, founded on the 

(251) genere 

sound of the wind ; and in this they were not more absurd than 

(168) (106) 

the Romans, who augured from the entrails of victims, 

(traevano gli auguri) viscera 

from the pecking of hens, or from the flight of crows. Finally, 

beccare pollo volo corvo. 

they had recourse to another expedient in choosing their com- 

(263) 

capi- 

manders : the rival champions, followed by several singers, 

tano 2 1 vario (56) 

retired to a hill which was enveloped in mist, and each war- 

ref. sopra ingombro di 

rior then struck on his shield ; the command of the armies was 

(321) (214) 

given to him whoso shield resounded the loudest, as they ima- 

(165) (180) (118) (213) supgined 

that the shades of the dead had co-operated in rendering 

porre ph (261) a inf. 

the sound powerful and clear. 

gagliardo 

The veneration that the Caledonians had for the shades of the 

2yer 

dead, made them even respect their bodies. After the battle, 

pi. 

the conqueror gave sepulture not only to his own warriors v/ho 

vincitore


had fallen, but also to those of the enemy ; and to sacrifice this 

(225) 

pious observance to resentment would have been deemed an expio 

uffizio riputare 

cess of inhumanity. There was no duty performed by the Caleadempire 

donians with greater care and willingness than that of attend 

(108*) compiacenza 

iug to the sepulture and funereal honours of the dead. The 

mode of interment was this : they dug a grave from six to 

seppellire scavare fossa 

eight feet deep ; the bottom was then covered with fine earth, 

profondo (306) '^fino ^creta 

on which they lowered gently the body of the defunct. If he 

adagiare 

had been a warrior, they placed beside him his sword, and the 

(352) 

points of twelve arrows. Over the corpse they spread another 

punta strale m. cadavero stendere 

layer of earth, in which they placed a horn, the symbol of chase, 

strata collocare corno * 

and a hunter's bow ; they then covered the whole with fine 

cacciatore arco poscia (306) (1^9) 

earth and with four grey stones, which were placed at the extre- 

pi. 

bigioestre- mities to mark the size of the tomb. Those stones 

mità (48) (344) segnare am/nezza 

are frequently mentioned in the poetry of Ossian, and are 

sometimes called " The stones of fame." In their centuries of 

talora secolo 

heroism, the Caledonians, like many other nations, used to bury 

with the master his favourite dog, but this is not mentioned in 

2 1 

Ossian. During the ceremony of interment, the singers called 

sepoltura 

pi. 

-

ox ALL THE RULES. 217 

on tLe shade of the warrior three times, inviting him to visit 

"A/5 narrow house," as the sepulchre was called (by them.) 

angusto (239) ' i 

It appears that the mourning and funereal songs were regularly 

lutto funebre (214) 

renewed each year, and autumn was the season devoted to this 

(251) (192) destinare 

annual commemoration. 

ânniversario 

^ 

Immediately after death, the shades of the departed revealed 

ombra trapassatofar vedere 

themselves to their relations ; they were generally preceded by 

(141) congiunto comparire per lo più, 

a meteor, which, according to the Caledonians, served (to escort 

1 Mi scorta 

and light) them through the darkness, and their departure was 

e di lume 2(131) in oscurità partenza 

always accompanied by a strong gust of wind. They sometimes 

(16) soffio Halora 

came to demand funereal honours, or to witness the exploits 

^ 

'^funebre 

^ assistere a impresa 

of their sons or descendants, in order to animate them and 

share in their glory ; but for the most part their 

prender parte a * 

appearance indicated some approaching misfortune, and in this 

comparsa vicino 

case they sometimes abandoned their natural form, and assumed 

lasciare 2 i 

various shapes, (such as that) of an afflicted (old man.) 

come vecchio. 

As to the appearance of the Caledonians, it seems they 

III quanto fattezza 

were generally of high stature and fair complexion ; they had 

(251) 

bianco carnagione 

very long hair, and thought it a particular ornament to 

(1 15) (1 IG) capigliatura vezzo 

v

218 RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES ON ALL THE RULES. 

let it fall down their face (in sncb a way as) frequently 

lasciare giù per (150) viso in modo che 

to cover their cheeks and eyes. The women esteemed most 

{copriva) (152) guancia[ò5) 

beautiful are always praised for blue eyes and black hair. The 

(72) 

capelli. 

Caledonians attained to a great age, but were usually 

giungere lungo vecchiezza 

afflicted with blindness,—In the beautiful and almost unopprimere 

da cecità in- 

rivalled poetry of Ossian, a detailed and minute description 

comparabile 

may be found of the manners, customs, opinions, and obserpotere 

(214) 

vances of the people who have been slightly sketched in the 

leggermente tracciare 

preceding exercises ; and to the poems of Ossian we therefore 

(268) 

refer the student who may desire to acquire a further knowrimandare 

* 

ulteriore 

ledere of " The Customs and Habits of the Ancient Cale-

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES. 219 

PHEASES AND DIALOGUES. 

Arti e Mestieri. 

11 MERCANTE Vende all'ingrosso 

a minuto ; l'avventore 

compra, 

L'agoraio fa gli spilli e gli 

aghi, 

L'argentiere lavora l'argento, 

cesella e getta ogni specie 

d'argenteria, 

L'ariiauiolo fabbrica, raccomoda, 

e forbisce ogni sorta 

di armi, come spade, pugnali, 

scimitarre, fioretti, fucili, pis- 

tole, &c., monta le lame e 

adatta loro il fodero o guaina 

ed il manico, impugnatura o 

elsa, 

L'arruotino arruota e affila le 

forbici, i coltelli, temperini, 

&c.. 

Il barriere rade, fa la barba ; 

i suoi arnesi sono, il rasoio, 

la coreggina, il bacino, il 

sapone, e lo sciugatoio. 

Il calderaio fa e racconcia le 

caldaie e le casserole, 

Il calzolaio prende la misura 

all'avventore, e gli fa stivali, 

scarpe, stivaletti o pianelle ; 

il ciabbatino racconcia le 

vecchie scarpe, 

Arts and Trades. 

The tradesman sells wholesale 

or retail; the customer buys. 

The needle-maker makes pins 

and needles. 

The silver-smith works in silver, 

and chisels and moulds 

all kinds of plate. 

The armourer makes, repairs, 

and polishes all kinds of arms, 

as swords, daggers, sabres, 

foils, guns, pistols, &c., sets 

blades and fits them in scabbards 

and handles. 

The knife-grinder sharpens 

scissors, 

&c. 

knives, penknives, 

The barber shaves ; his implements 

are a razor, a strop, a 

basin, soap, and a towel. 

The brazier makes and repairs 

boilers and pots. 

The shoemaker takes the measure 

of a customer, and makes 

him boots, shoes, half-boots, 

or slippers; the cobbler mends 

old shoes.

220 PHRASES AND DIALOGUES. 

II cANDELOTTAio vencle le can- 

dele di sevo di cera, 

Il CANESTRAIO fa e vende Cane- 

strini, zane o culle, panieri, 

gabbie, ed altri lavori di 

vimini, 

Il CAPPELLAIO fa e tinge i cap- 

pelli e le berrette, 

Il CARROZZIERE fabbrica cocchi, 

e carrozze, calessi barocci, 

carri e ogni specie di legni. 

Il CARTARO fabbrica nella car- 

tiera più sorte di carta, fina, 

mezzana, ordinaria, sugante 

cartastraccia, bianca, bigia, 

turchina, e rigata da mu- 

sica, 

11 CHiAVARO fa le chiavi, le 

serrature o toppe. 

Il COLTELLINAIO fa coltelli, for- 

bici, temperini, lancette, 

rasoi, &c., 

Il CONCIATORE concia le pelli 

per farne cuoio. 

Il CURANDAIO cura i panni lini, 

purgandoli dalla bozzima, e 

imbiancando i rozzi, 

Il DORATORE indora i metalli, 

le cornici di legno, &c.. 

Il FALEGNAME fa tavole, sedie, 

stipi, scrivanie, telai, armadi, 

ed ogni mobiliare, 

Il FILATORE lavora al filatoio, 

e fila seta o filo, 

La MODISTA vende cuffie, cap- 

pellini, fiori artefatti, nastri, 

ghirlande, ed altre acconcia- 

ture alla moda per l'uso delle 

donne, 

The chandler sells tallow or 

wax candles. 

Tlie basket-maker makes and 

sells baskets, cradles, ham- 

pers, cages, and other osier 

works. 

The hatter makes and dyes hats 

and caps. 

The coachmaker builds car- 

riages, chaises, carts, and all 

kinds of conveyances. 

The papermaker makes in the 

paper-mill many kinds of 

paper, fine, middling, common, 

and blotting-paper ; 

white, grey, blue, and music- 

paper. 

The locksmith makes keys, 

locks, and key-holes. 

The cutler makes knives, 

scissors, penknives, lancets, 

razors, &c. 

The tanner dresses skins for 

leather. 

The bleacher bleaches linens, 

freeing them from roughness, 

and whitening the unbleach- 

ed. 

Tlie gilder gilds metals, woodframes, 

&c. 

The carpenter makes tables, 

chairs, cabinets, desks, looms, 

presses, and all furniture. 

The spinner works with the 

spinning-wheel, and spins 

silk or thread. 

The milliner sells caps, bon- 

nets, artificial flowers, rib- 

bons, wreaths, and other 

fashionable habiliments for 

ladies.

II VETRAIO fornaciaio di vetri 

fa il vetro, e ne soffia bottiglie, 

fiaschi, bicchieri, cam- 

pane, lastre, &c., 

Il FUNAIO fa le funi, la corda, i 

canapi, &c., con fila di canapa 

di lino. 

Il GIOIELLIERE incassa incastra 

le pietre preziose per farne 

ornamenti, e vende vezzi, 

braccialetti, orecchini, ed 

aiineli di diamanti, smeraldi, 

rubini, turchine, perle &c., 

L'iiiBiAN'CATORE imbianca le 

facciate delle case e le pareti 

col suo pennello. 

L'intagliatore intaglia il legno 

e le cornici in figure, 

fogliami, &c., 

La lavandaia lava i pannilini, 

che insapona, lava, sciacqua, 

torce, e stende per farli as- 

ciugare, inamida i più fini, e 

poi col ferro da spianare li 

stira. 

Il MONETiERE batte e impronta 

le monete col conio alla 

zecca. 

Il MURATORE costruisce fabbrica 

le case ed i muri con 

mattoni o sassi, e con calcina. 

L'ombrellaio fa gli ombrelli 

per parar la pioggia, ed i 

paraseli per preservare dal 

sole. 

Il pellicciaio fa le pellicce o 

vesti di pelle di volpe, di mar- 

tora, di lupo, di orso, di ar- 

mellino, di coniglio, &c. ; 

vende manicotti, berrette di 

pelle, &c., 


The glass-blower makes glass, 

and blows it into the form of 

bottles, flasks, glasses, bells, 

window panes, &c. 

The ropemaker makes ropes, 

cord, cables, &c., with hemp 

or flax thread. 

The jeweller sets precious 

stones for ornaments, and 

sells necklaces, bracelets, 

ear-rings, and rings of diamonds, 

emeralds, rubies, 

turquoise, pearls, &c. 

The white-washer whitens the 

front and walls of houses 

with his brush. 

The wood-carver carves wood 

and frames into figures, 

leaves, &c. 

The laundress washes the linen, 

which she soaps, washes, 

rinses, wrings, and spreads 

out to dry. The fine things 

are starched, and then ironed 

with the smoothing iron. 

The coiner strikes off coins, 

and stamps them in the 

mint. 

The mason builds houses and 

walls with bricks or stone, 

and mortar. 

The umbrella- maker makes 

umbrellas to save from the 

rain, and parasols to preserve 

from the sun. 

The furrier makes articles of 

dress from the fur of the fox, 

the marten, wolf, bear, ermine, 

rabbit, and other skins ; 

he sells muffs, caps, &c.

222 PURASES AND DIALOGUES. 

II SARTO fa gli abiti, taglia 

colle forbici il panno, lo con- 

nette a punto di baste, lo 

cuce, dà a cucire ai lavo- 

ranti, 

Lo SPAZZATURAIO netta e spazza 

le strade, 

Lo SPAZZACAMMINO puliscC 6 

spazza i cammini. 

Lo STAMPATORE Stampa i manoscritti 

con tipi di varie gran- 

dezze, con lettere capitali, 

piccole e italiche, ed altri 

Quadrupedi. 

L'asino è un animale da 

da basto ; mangia i cardi, 

ha le orecchie lunghe e ra- 

glia, 

Il cinghiale o cignale è una 

specie di porco salvatico, che 

si difende colle zanne, 

Il TORO o BUE ed il giovenco 

mugghiano ; la vacca e la 

giovenca muggiscono ; la 

carne del bue si chiama 

manzo, 

Il BUFALO bue salvatico è 

generalmente nero, e alcuni 

hanno corna grandi ecurvate. 

L'orso, animale forte e peloso, 

si trova spesso nelle regioni 

fredde ; esso bufonchia e 

rugghia, 

n castoro o bevaro è stato 

chiamato l'architetto degli 

animali, pell'artifizio col 

quale costruisce la sua casa. 

The tailor makes dresses ; he 

cuts with his shears the cloth, 

bastes it together, sews it, 

or gives it to his workmen to 

sew. 

The scavenger cleans and 

sweeps the streets and street 

crossings. 

The chimney-sweeper cleans 

and sweeps the chimney. 

The printer prints manuscripts 

with type of various sizes, 

with capital letters, small 

and italic letters, and other 

signs. 

Quadrupeds. 

The ass is a beast of burden ; 

it eats thistles, has long ears, 

and brays. 

The wild boar is a kind of wild 

pig, which defends itself with 

its tusks. 

The bull and bullock bellow ; 

the cow and heifer low ; the 

flesh of the ox is called beef. 

The buffalo or wild bull is 

generally black, and some 

have large twisted horns. 

The bear is a strong hairy 

animal, generally found in 

cold regions ; it grumbles 

and roars. 

The beaver has been c.illed 

" the architect of animals," 

on account of the art with 

which it constructs its

I GATTI ed i gattini miagolano, 

e sgraffiano, 

II GHIRO dorme sotterra tutto 

l'inverno, 

11 DROMEDAKio è Una specie di 

cammello a doppio scrigno. 

Il CANE è il più intelligente 

degli animali domestici, vi 

sono cani da guardia, da 

pecorai, mastini, levrieri o 

veltri, alani, barboni, cani da 

fermo, &c. I cani ringhiano, 

mordono, abbaiano o latra- 

no, gagnolano, mugolano, e 

squittiscono, 

11 naso la tromba dell'ELE- 

FANTE si chiama proboscide, 

i suoi denti son detti avorio, 

e sporgono in fuori dalla 

mascella, 

L'arjiellino animaletto di pelle 

bianca e coda nera. 

La VOLPE acchiappa destramente 

polli, conigli, &c. In 

Inghilterra le si dà la caccia, 

e la sua lunga coda è il 

trofeo della caccia ; essa 

gagnola. 

La GIRAFFA si addomestica 

facilmente ; la pelle sua è 

macchiata come quella del 

leopardo, ed ha un collo 

lunghissimo, e una testa 

piccolissima. 

Il giovane capro o capretto 

gambetta per i prati, 

Quando la lepre è giovane si 

chiama leprotto, 

La iena è crudele e feroce, e 

somiglia il lupo, 

PllRASES AND DIALOGUES. 223 

Cats and kittens mew and 

scratch. 

The dormouse sleeps under 

ground all the winter. 

The dromedary is a kind of 

camel with a double hump. 

The dog is the most intelligent 

of domestic animals ; there 

are watch dogs, shepherds' 

dogs, mastiffs, greyhounds, 

bull dogs, spaniels, pointers, 

&c. Dogs snarl, bite, bark, 

yelp, howl, and squeal. 

The elephant's nose or trunk is 

called a proboscis, its teeth 

are ivory, and project from 

the jaws. 

The ermine is a little animal, 

with a white skin and black 

tail. 

The fox catches cleverly fowls, 

rabbits, &c. ; it is hunted in 

England, and its long tail or 

brush is the trophy of the 

chase ; it yelps or cries. 

The giraffe is easily tamed ; 

its skin is spotted like the 

leopard's, and it has a very 

long neck, and a very small 

head. 

The young goat or kid frisks in 

the meadows. 

"When the hare is young, it is 

called a leveret. 

The hyena is cruel and fero- 

cious, and resembles the wolf.

221 PITRASI-S ANT) DTAI.OfiUF.S. 

11 RICCIO lo SPINOSO è coperto 

di spine o pungiglioni, e si 

rannicchia come in un gomitolo, 

quando da alcuno vien 

toccato, 

Il CAVALLO è domato o scozzonato 

dallo scozzone o 

bardato e sellato 

domatore ; 

dal palafreniere o mozzo, e 

cavalcato e spronato dal 

cavalcatore, 

Il eavallo va al passo, ambia, 

trotta, e galoppa, ma spesso 

ombreggia, tira calci, è restio, 

e leva la mano ; il cavallo 

nitrisce. Il cavalcatore 

monta a cavallo, e smonta 

da cavallo, e lo regola per 

mezzo delle redini, della 

briglia, dello sprone, e della 

frusta. 

L'agnello chiama la pecora 

col belare, 

Alla LiONESSA manca la giubba, 

il che la distingue dal leone; 

questi animali ruggiscono, 

La SCIMMIA a molti riguardi 

somiglia all'uomo, ch'essa 

cerca d'imitare, 

La pelle della martora, specialmente 

della zibellina, è 

di gran prezzo, 

Il sorcio o topo stride, e 

rosicchia mobili e vivande, 

fino a che non sia acchiappato 

in una trappola, 

Il rinoceronte ha un corno 

sul naso, e la sua grossa 

pelle è quasi impenetrabile. 

Il ratto è più grande del 

The hedgehog is covered with 

quills, and rolls itself up like 

a ball when any one touches 

it. 

The horse is trained by the 

horse-breaker, bridled and 

saddled by the groom, and 

ridden and spurred by the 

rider. 

The horse walks, ambles, trots, 

and gallops, and often shies, 

kicks, is restive, and runs 

away ; horses neigh. The 

rider mounts and dismounts 

his horse, and controls him 

with reins, bridle, spurs, and 

whip. 

The lamb calls 

bleating. 

the sheep by 

The lioness has no mane, 

which distinguishes her 

from the lion ; these animals 

roar. 

The monkey, in many respects, 

is like man, whom it tries to 

imitate. 

The skin of the marten, especially 

the sable, is very 

costly. 

The mouse squeaks, and nibbles 

furniture and eatables, till it 

is caught in a trap. 

The rhinoceros has a horn on 

its nose, and its thick skin 

is almost impenetrable. 

The rat is larger than the

sorcio, e per la sua grandezza 

è molto feroce, 

Il TARANDO è il cervo del Nord, 

dove gli abitanti se ne servono 

come bestia da tiro e 

da soma. In un giorno può 

fare ottanta miglia. 

Il CONIGLIO si rintana in buche 

che scava sotterra, 

Il CERVO è un animale bos- 

chereccio velocissimo al corso, 

la sua testa è adorna di corna 

maestose. Cerviatto si chiama 

il giovane cervo, 

Lo SCOIATTOLO, animaletto 

salvatico, dotato di una 

lunga coda vellutata, s'arrampica 

su per gli alberi, 

e da uno ad un altro salta 

coll'agilità quasi di un uc- 

cello, 

La pelle della tigre è pic- 

chiettata e macchiata ; 

quando è irata ruggisce, e 

digrigna i denti. 

Il LUPO urla, e la lupa difende 

con gran ferocia i suoi lupi- 

cini, 

La ZEBRA cavallo d'Africa, 

è listata giallo e nero nel 

maschio, e nero e giallo nella 

femmina, 

Volatili, 

Uccelli di Rapina^ e Notturni, 

L'aquila, per la sua forza, e 

pel suo ardire, vien detta il 

re degli uccelli ; ha la vista 

acutissima, e si dice che 

possa fissare il sole ; vive di 

PIIKASES AND PIALOGUF.S. 225 

mouse, and, for its size, very 

ferocious. 

The reindeer is the stag of the 

North, where the inhabitants 

use it as a beast of carriage 

and of burden. It can travel 

eighty miles in a day. 

The rabbit burrows in little 

holes it digs in the ground. 

The stag is a forest animal, 

very swift on foot ; its head 

is adorned with majestic 

branches or horns. The 

young stag is called a fawn. 

The squirrel, a little wild 

animal, with a long velvety 

tail, climbs trees, and jumps 

from one tree to another, 

almost with the nimbleness 

of a bird. 

The tiger's skin is spotted and 

speckled ; it gnashes its 

teeth, and roars when in a 

passion. 

The wolf roars, and the female 

defends her whelps with great 

ferocity. 

The zebra, or the horse of 

Africa, is striped yellow and 

black if male, and black and 

white if female. 

Birds. 

Nocturnal Birds^ Birds ofPrey. 

The eagle, owing to its strength 

and daring, is called the 

king of birds ; it has very 

sharp sight, and can even, it 

is said, gaze on the sun. It

226 PHRASES AND ftlALOGUES. 

rapina, e nidifica fra le rupi 

inaccessibili d'altissime mon- 

tagne, 

L'astore si teneva per uc- 

cellare ; di forma e colore 

è simile allo sparviere, 

L'avvoltoio si distingue dall'aquila 

per avere il capo 

coperto di lanugine, o calvo, 

quandoché questa l'ha coperto 

di penne ; l'avvoltoio 

si ciba di carogna, e l'aquila 

co'snoi artigli ghermisce viva 

la sua preda, 

La CIVETTA è un uccello 

notturno, molto simile al 

gufo, e com'esso, odiato dagli 

uccelletti, e perciò serve per 

l'uccellagione ; essa stride 

squittisce. I poeti la 

chiamano augello di Pallade, 

La CORNACCHIA, MULACCHIA, 

devastatrice de'seminati, è più 

piccola del corvo ; 

chia, 

essa grac- 

Il nero corvo, o coreo, si pasce 

di carname, e crocita, 

Il cuculo è si pigro che eziandio 

le sue uova non vuol covare. 

Il suo verso è cuculiare, 

Il FALCO, o falcone, è armato 

di becco, e d'unghie ricurve 

e acute ; serve all'uccellagi- 

one. Havvene di piìi specie 

e varietà, 

Il girifalco è il supremo dei 

falconi ; ha il becco e le 

gambe azzurrine ; è forte, in- 

gegnoso, ben avventurato 

in predare, 

lives on prey, and builds its 

eyrie amidst high and inaccessible 

mountains. 

The goshawk resembles in 

colour and size the falcon, 

and was used in hawking. 

The vulture differs from the 

eagle in having its head 

either covered with down or 

bald, whilst the eagle's head 

is covered with feathers ; the 

vulture feeds on carrion, and 

the eagle seizes with its 

claws live prey. 

The screech-owl is a nocturnal 

bird, very like the owl, and 

both are hated by smaller 

birds ; the screech-owl is 

used as a decoy-bird, and 

screeches. Poets have called 

it Minerva's bird. 

The rook is the devastator of 

crops, and is smaller than the 

crow ; it caws. 

The raven will feed on carrion, 

and croaks. 

The cuckoo's indolence is proverbial 

; it is said that it 

does not even hatch its eggs. 

Its note is the sound cuckoo. 

The falcon is armed with a 

beak, and with bent and 

sharp claws ; it was used for 

hawking. There are several 

species of it. 

The gerfalcon is the chief species 

of falcon ; its beak and 

legs are bluish ; it is strong, 

dexterous, and very daring in 

capturing prey.

II solingo GUFO, dagli occbi di 

fuoco, va tubando dolente 

sopra gli antichi tetti e su 

mura diroccate. Il volgo l'o- 

dia, stimando di cattivo au- 

gurio il suo canto, 

Il NIBBIO, che volentieri insidia 

alle galline, fa ruote in aria 

volando, come quasi ogni altro 

uccello di rapina. 

Il PIPISTRELLO è un animale notturno, 

mezzo topo e mezzo 

uccello ; 

esso stride, 

Uccelli Cantatoli, 

Il CANARINO è un uccelletto gentile 

di color giallo, che canta 

dicesi pure 

dolcissimamente ; 

passera di Canarie dalle isole 

di questo nome, donde ei 

viene, 

La scherzosa CAPINERA dal becco 

gentile, va sui verdi prati 

soavemente cantando. 

Il CARDELLINO, col capiciuo ncro 

pezzato dì rosso, e le ale di 

giallo, gareggia col canarino 

nel canto, 

L'Americano colibrì è nn uc- 

celletto piccolissimo, da noi 

Italiani detto mellivoro, per- 

chè, librandosi in su'fiori, vi 

va succhiando il mele dal loro 

calice. Vaghissimi sono i 

colori delle sue lucide piume. 

Il FANELLO si addimcstica facilmente, 

e ghiotto di canapuc- 

cia va svolazzando por le 

niRASES AND DIALOGUES. 22? 

The lonely owl, witli fiery eyes, 

flies disconsolately about old 

roofs and ruined walls. It is 

disliked by the ignorant, who 

consider its whoop an evil 

omen. 

The kite, which entraps cleverly 

chickens, wheels about in the 

air, like almost all birds of 

prey. 

The bat is a nocturnal animal, 

half mouse, half bird. It 

screams. 

Singing Birds. 

The canari/ is a pretty little 

yellow bird, that sings very 

sweetly ; it is called the 

Canary sparrow from the 

Canary Isles, from which it 

comes. 

The playful tomtit, with its 

pretty little head, is seen ic 

the fields while it sings sweet- 

ly. 

The goldfinch, with its little 

black head speckled with red, 

and its yellow wings, rivals 

the canary in song. 

The American humming-bird is 

a very small bird, called in 

Italian the honey-bird, be- 

cause, poising itself on floAVers, 

it extracts the honey from 

their cups. The colours of 

its glossy feathers are beau- 

tiful. 

The linnet is very easily tamed, 

and very fond of hemp-seed ; 

it aroes fluttering about the


stanze, beccandone gli acini 

che trova, 

La GAZZA, o PICA, è garrula e 

loquace, imita maravigliosamente 

la favella umana, 

La LODOLA, O ALLODOLA, da' 

Latini detta Alauda (quasi 

da a laude Dei), pei'chè sollevandosi 

a volo verso il cielo, 

si perde di vista, e solo se ne 

ode la sua armoniosa cantilena, 

colla quale pare che 

lodi il Signore, 

La nera merla (o il merlo) ha 

il becco giallo, e chioccola, 

L'ortolano col suo piacevol 

canto diletta in vita, e morto 

è buon boccone. 

Il PAPPAGALLO ; ve n'ha di più 

specie ; tutte però convengono 

nell'avere il rostro grosso 

e torto, con la mandibula di 

sopra più lunga dell'inferiore, 

la lingua carnosa, non appuntata 

; i piedi con quattro 

diti, mediante i quali, e con 

l'aiuto del rostro, salgono e 

scendono come per una scala. 

I pappagalli imparano a par- 

lare ; sono garruli, piuttosto 

docili, ed hanno vita assai 

lunga, 

Il PASSERO si diletta di stare so- 

litario e solo, e in ispecie la 

mattina va pispilando. 

Il PICCHIO, che volando a scosse, 

va a posarsi sugli alberi, e 

quivi, col suo fermo becco 

picchia (donde il suo nome) 

e ripicchia sul tronco di essi, 

rooms, picking up any grains 

it finds. 

The magpie is a great chatterer, 

and imitates wonderfully the 

human voice. 

The lark, called by the Latins 

Alauda (probably from a 

laude Dei, praises to God), 

because, soaring towards heaven, 

it is lost from sight, and 

its sweet lay, which appears 

sung in praise of the Creator, 

is ahme heard. 

Tlie blackbird has a yellow 

beak, and sings. 

The ortolan, alive, delights 

with its sweet song, and dead, 

is a great delicacy. 

The parrot. There are many 

species of this bird ; all are 

alike in havingathick curved 

beak, with the upper mandi- 

ble longer than the lower ; 

fleshy tongue, not pointed ; 

feet with four claws, by means 

of which, aided by their beak, 

they climb and descend as if 

by a ladder. Parrots learn 

they are very talk- 

to speak ; 

ative, rather docile, and live 

pretty long. 

The sparrow likes to be soli- 

tary, and particularly in the 

morning its chattering is 

heard. 

The woodpecker, which flies by 

starts, perches on trees, and 

with its strong beak taps 

them (the origin of its name), 

in order to shake out of the 

a

per farne uscir faora i vermi- 

celli di cui si pasce, 

Il PIVIERE ha per il solito, bian- 

ca la testa, nero il petto, e 

gialli i piedi, se la fa per le 

sabbionose rive dei fiumi, 

La QUAGLIA ha le penne pic- 

chiettate, e talora ha il ciuf- 

fetto ; il suo volare è dritto, 

e vive per seminati e per le 

stoppie ; 


la sua carne è squi- 

sita, 

La RONDINE, RONDINELLA, è 

un uccello di passo, e traversa 

tutta la larghezza del Me- 

diterraneo in men di 24 ore. 

Essa prende la sua pastura 

volando, e costruisce il suo 

nido di creta con mirabile 

maestria, 

Il ROsiGNUOLO è un uccelletto 

stimatissimo per la soave dolcezza 

del suo canto. Posato 

sulle cime dei pioppi, egli 

manda i suoi più melodiosi 

gorgheggi nella notte al lume 

di luna. I poeti fingono ch'e- 

gli sia l'innamorato della rosa. 

Il TORDO è di varie specie. Il 

tordo d'America, detto Canoro, 

vince qualunque altro uc- 

cello per la soavità e facilità 

di cantare, contrafiacendoli e 

superandoli tutti. Il suo ver- 

so si è trutilare o zirlare, 

Uccellame Salvatico e Domes- 

tico, 

L'anitra, o anatra, è un uc- 

cello acquatico a tutti noto ; 

trunks the worms on which 

it feeds. 

The plover has generally a 

white head, black breast, and 

yellow feet, and frequents the 

sandy shores of rivers. 

The quail has speckled feathers, 

and sometimes a crest ; it 

flies straight forward, and 

lives in corn and stubble 

fields ; its flesh is excellent. 

The sicalloiv is a bird of passage, 

and crosses the Mediterranean 

in less than twenty- 

four hours. It catches its 

food while on the wing, and 

builds its nest of mud with 

admirable skill. 

The nightingale is a small bird 

much prized for the melodious 

sweetness of its song. 

Perched on the top of the 

poplar, it warbles its most 

melodious notes at night by 

moonlight. Poets imagine it 

to be enamoured of the rose. 

There are various kinds of the 

thrush. The American thrush, 

called the Singer, excels every 

other bird in the sweetness 

and ease of its song, imitating 

and surpassing them all. It 

whistles. 

Wild and Tame Birds. 

The duck is an aquatic bird 

known to all of us ; it quacks,


essa schiamazza, s'attuffa, e 

nuota. Le salvatiche hanno 

vari nomi ; come quello di 

Mestolone, dalla forma del 

suo becco ; 

Tuffetto, dal con- 

tinuo tuffarsi, &c., 

La CHIOCCIA cova le uova, e 

guida i pigolanti pulcini ; il 

suo verso è di chiocciare, 

Il candido cigno, dal lungo collo 

e dal ricolmo petto; esso, 

come ogni uccello acquatico, 

adopra le palme dei piedi a 

guisa di remi ; si tiene per 

ornamento nelle vasche e nei 

laghi dei parchi. I poeti fingono 

che canti dolcemente 

quando è vicino a morire, 

11 COLOMBO e la colomba si sogliono 

allevare nelle colom- 

baie ; essi tubano, grugano e 

gemiscono, i poeti hanno immaginato 

che tirino il carro 

di Venere, e sono uccelli de- 

dicati a questa Dea. I pic- 

cioni sono della stessa fami- 

glia. Il loro verso è tubare. 

Il colombaccio è il colombo 

selvatico, 

Il fagiano, si custodisce ed al- 

leva nelle fagianaie ; i piccoli 

fagianotti, s'ingrassano dando 

loro a mangiare delle formiche, 

Il FRANCOLINO ha Ic penne va- 

riegate, e la cresta gialla, 

Il GALLO ha la testa adorna di 

un ampia cresta, e porta gli 

sproni ai piedi. Tronfio e 

pettoruto, con la cresta alta. 

dives, and swims. The wild 

ducks have various names ; 

the spoonbill^ from the shape 

of its beak ; the diver^ from 

constantly diving, (fee. 

The hen hatches and leads about 

her brood of chirping little 

chickens ; she clucks and 

cackles. 

The fair swan, with the long 

neck and swelling breast, 

like all aquatic birds, uses its 

feet for oars ; it is kept as an 

ornament of ponds and lakes 

in parks. Poets fancied that 

it sang sweetly when near 

death. 

Doves are generally bred in 

dovecots ; they coo, and are 

dedicated by the poets to 

Venus, whose car they draw. 

Pigeons are of the same 

family, and the wood-pigeon 

is a kind of wild dove. 

The pheasant is confined and 

bred in preserves ; young 

pheasants are fattened on 

ants. 

The heath-cocJc has variegated 

feathers and a yellow crest. 

The cock's head is adorned with 

a fine crest; its feet bear 

spurs. Haughty and presumptuous, 

with itscrest aloft,

va Intorno, e signoreggia nel 

pollaio ; di tempo in tempo 

dà una chicchiriata, o, come 

si suol dire, canta, 

Il GALLO d'India, vien pur detto 

Gallinaccio, e Tacchino, ha 

rossi e larghi bargigli, striscia 

l'ale e fa la ruota a guisa di 

pavone, e grida giù giù allungando 

il collo. 

Il GRIFONE animale biforme e 

favoloso, la cui parte ante- 

riore è d'aquila con le ale, e 

la posteriore di leone con 

quattro piedi, 

Le GRU, o GRUE, volano a stormi 

una dietro l'altra, descrivendo 

nell'aria varie lettere 

e figure, 

L'ibi, o ibidi, è una spezie di 

cigogna d'Egitto, che va facendo 

strage di serpenti, di 

cui si ciba. Veniva venerato 

dagli antichi Egiziani, 

T/ocA, a chi non è nota ? Colla 

sua lanugine si riempiono e 

formano i soffici piumini ; le 

penne delle sue ale si adoprano 

per iscrivere, 

Il PAVONE ha collo di serpente, 

ale di angelo, voce di diavolo, 

e piedi d'andar cheto di ladro, 

cosi lo descrisse il Sacchetti. 

Esso vagheggia la sua occhiuta 

coda che spiega facendo 

ruota, e si va pavoneggiando, 

Il PELLICANO è il più grosso uccello 

acquatico ; campa nell'Asia 

Minore. Esso ha nell'inferiore 

parte del collo un 


it walks about, lord of the 

poultry-yard, crowing from 

time to tune. 

The turkey has large red gills, 

trails its wings, and fans 

them like a peacock ; it 

clucks, stretching out its neck. 

The griffon is a fabulous biformed 

animal ; its foreparts 

resemble an eagle with wings, 

its hind-part a lion with four 

feet. 

Cranes fly in flocks, one after 

the other, describing various 

forms and letters in the air. 

The ibis is a kind of Egyptian 

stork, that destroys serpents, 

on which it feeds. It was 

held sacred by the Egyp- 

tians. 

Who does not know the goose ? 

With its down soft cushions 

are made the feathers of its 

; 

wings are used for writing. 

The peacock has the neck of a 

serpent, angels' wings, the 

voice of a demon, and the 

stealthy feet of a thief. Sac- 

chetti describes it thus. It 

admires its own starry tail, 

which it displays in a fan, 

and struts proudly about. 

The pelican is the largest aqua- 

tic bird ; it is a native of 

Asia Minor. It has in the 

lower part of the neck a


falso esofago, in cui conserva 

una parte dei cibi trangugiati, 

e ne nutrisce i suoi figliuoli. 

Ciò ha dato luogo alla favola 

ch'egli si ferisca il petto col 

becco, onde nutrirli del suo 

sangue. Quindi venne preso 

per simbolo dell'amor ma- 

terno, 

La PERNICE ha gli occhi rossi, 

è molto scaltra nello sviare 

il cacciatore dal luogo dove 

sono i suoi pcrniciotti. 

Lo STRUZZO, quantunque vestito 

di penne ed abbia ale, ha 

gambe e piedi come quelli 

del cammello, ed è perciò che 

da alcuni vien detto struzzo 

cammello. E il più grande 

di tutti gli uccelli. Si serve 

delle ale, che in proporzione 

sono corte, a guisa di remi 

agitandole mentre corre. 

La TORTORA è molto simile alla 

colomba, ma è più piccola ; 

ha penne bigie ; essa pure 

tuba, geme, 

Dei Pesci. 

I pesci vivono nell'acqua ; 

pesci di mare e d'acqua dolce, 

I TESTACEI, e crostacei hanno 

il guscio nicchio. 

Le acciughe, alici, o sardelle 

sono pesciolini che si pescano 

pouch, in which it stores some 

of its food already swallowed, 

to feed its young with. This 

gave rise to the fable, that it 

tore its own breast with its 

beak, and fed its young with 

its blood. It was chosen, on 

this account, as a symbol of 

maternal love. 

Hha partridge has red eyes, and 

is very cunning in misleading 

the sportsmen from its young. 

The ostrich^ although covered 

with feathers and having 

wings, has legs and feet like 

a camel, and has been sometimes 

called the camel ostrich. 

It is the largest of all birds. 

It uses its short wings like 

oars, flapping them while it 

runs. 

The turtle-dove is very like the 

dove, but smaller, and its 

feathers are greyish ; it coos. 

FiSH. 

nuo- Fish live in water; swim, move, 

tano, si muovono, e sguiz- and dart about in the water, 

zano nell'acqua per mezzo by means of their tins ; they 

delle loro pinne per le bran- 

; 

breathe through their gills, 

chie respirano ; le loro ossa and their bones, in Italian, 

si chiamano lische. Ci sono are called lische. There are 

sea-fish and fresh-water fish. 

The shell-fish are covered with 

a shell. 

Anchovies and sardines are little 

fish caught in the Meditar-

colle reti nel Mediterraneo, 

e si sogliono conciare in salamoia, 

L'anguilla è un pesce d'acqua 

dolce, a foggia d'angue, con 

pelle scivolosa. Le anguille 

di mare son più grosse, e si 

chiamano Gronghi, 

Le ARINGHE che si pescano in 

certe stagioni nell'Oceano, 

(ove sogliono passare in in- 

finite frotte ;) per il solito si 

salano, o si seccano, e si affumicano. 

Il BAccALà MERLUZZO, è sorta 

di pesce che viene spaccato, 

salato, e disseccato. Prima 

di cuocerlo si mette in acqua 

ad ammollare, 

La BALENA è un pesce di 

smisurata grandezza ; il 

primo della specie de'cetacei. 

Si pesca nei mari settentrionali 

ove abbonda, onde 

estrarne l'olio. I bastimenti 

che vanno a questa pesca si 

dicono balenieri. 

Il CARPIONE pesce delicatissimo 

d'acqua dolce, coperto di 

belle scaglie argentine pic- 

chiettate di rosso. 

Il CEFALO, dai Toscani detto 

muggine, è pesce che nasce 

nei fiumi, e quindi entra in 

mare, ove si pesca in alcuni 

luoghi colle reti, in altri 

colla fiocina, come nella baia 

di Napoli, ove di notte si 

vede una quantità di barchette 

muovere lentamente, 

con una gran fiaccola a prua, 


ranean, and are pickled in 

brine. 

The eel is a fresh- water fish, resembling 

a serpent, with a 

slippery skin. The sea eels 

are larger, and arc called 

conger eels. 

Herrings, which are caught at 

certain seasons in the ocean, 

(where they float in immense 

shoals,) are generally salted, 

dried, and smoked. 

Ling or stockfish is a kind of 

fish which is split, dried, and 

salted. Before being dressed, 

it is steeped in water to soften 

it. 

The whale is a fish of gigantic 

size, the chief of the cetace- 

ous species. It is caught in 

the Northern Ocean, where 

it abounds, in order to ex- 

tract the oil. The vessels 

which are engaged in this 

fishery are called whalers. 

The carp is a very delicato 

fresh-water fish, covered 

with fine silvery scales 

speckled with red. 

The mullet, called by the Tuscans 

muggine, is a fish that 

is spawned in rivers, and 

thence enters the sea ; where 

it is sometimes caught in nets, 

and sometimes with a spear, 

as in the bay of Naples, when 

a quantity of boats are seen 

slowly moving about, with a 

great torch fastened at the


col lume della quale abbagliano 

i pesci, che infilzano 

colla fiocina, 

Il DELFINO va in schiera, e salta 

fuori dell'acqua. 

Il GAMBERO, ed il GRANCHIO, 

sono del genere dei testacei, 

La LAMPREDA è UH delicatissimo, 

benché indigesto pesce 

di mare e di fiume della 

specie delle anguille. 

Il LUCCIO è un pesce d'acqua 

dolce, noto per esser molto 

vorace; spesso divora i lucci 

più piccoli. Deve avere circa 

sette cento dentini, 

La MORENA è un pesce del 

Mediterraneo, va nei fiumi, 

e vive più giorni fuori d'acqua. 

Ha somiglianza con 

l'anguilla, non ha squame, 

ma la pelle ha macchie bianche 

e nericce. 

Il NAUTiLO ha tante cartillagini, 

che comparendo a fior d'acqua, 

pomposamente tutte si 

spiegano, rassomigliando ad 

una navicella, 

L'orata pesce di mare, le cui 

scaglie son del color d'oro, 

L'ostrica è un mollusco bivalve 

notissimo, 

Il ROMBO pesce piatto, è una 

specie di sogliola. L'aletta 

dorsale s'estende dagli occhi 

in fino alla coda. 

Il SALAMONE SERMONE è UH 

pesce di mare e di fiume, la 

cui carne è saporitissima. 

La SEPPIA CALAMAIO Contiene 

in se un certo liquido nero 

prow, with which the fish are 

dazzled, and are then spear- 

ed. 

The dolphin swims in slioals, 

and jumps out of the water. 

The lobster and the crab are 

shell fish. 

The lamprey is a very delicate 

but indigestible sea and river 

fish of the eel species. 

The pike is a fresh-water fish, 

well known for its voracity ; 

it often devours smaller pikes. 

It must have about 700 

teeth. 

The lamprey i?, a Mediterranean 

fish, is found in rivers, and 

lives several days out of 

water. It resembles the eel, 

has no scales ; its skin is 

spotted white and black. 

The nautilus has so many cartilages, 

that on appearing on 

the surface of the water, and 

spreading them all, it resembles 

a little vessel. 

The goldfish is a sea fish, and 

has gold-coloured scales. 

The oyster is a well-known 

two-shelled mollusc. 

The turbot is a flat fish, of the 

its dorsal fin ex- 

sole species ; 

tends from the eyes to the 

tail. 

The salmon is a sea and river 

fish ; the flesh is exquisite. 

The c!

simile all'incliiostro, che 

getta fuori quando vien cacciato 

dagli altri pesci, onde 

rendersi invisibile ai suoi 

nemici, 

La SOGLIOLA si distingue per 

l'irregolarità del suo piatto 

corpo ; gli occhi ha da un 

lato; di rado le pinne eguali, 

e mai le due parti della boc- 

ca suol farsela al fondo, 

; 

Lo STORIONE, gran pesce di 

mare, rimontai fiumi, amando 

l'acqua dolce ; la sua carne 

è ottima. Con le sue uova 

salate in botti, se ne fa il 

caviale. 

Il TONNO è il più grosso pesce 

mangiabile. Pesa 400 e fino 

a 1000, e talora fino a 2000 

libbre, ed è voracissimo, 

La TROTA se la fa per lo più 

ne'laghi d'acqua chiara ; 

guizza due o tre piedi fuori 

dell'acqua per acchiappare 

insetti, 

Insetti, 

L'ape, ola pecchia, è nota per 

la sua industria nel fare il 

mele e la cera. Neil' arnia 

alveario regna suprema la 

regina sopra circa quìndici o 

trenta mila api operaie. Le 

api pungono con un pungiglione 

vanno a sciami, ron- 

; 

zando per l'aria, e dai fiori 

traggono il più squisito alimento. 


a kind of black liquid like 

ink, which it discharges when 

pursued by other fish, and 

becomes invisible to its enemies. 

The sole is known for the irregularity 

of its flat body ; 

its eyes are to one side, its 

fins are seldom even, and 

never the two parts of its 

mouth. It generally lives 

at the bottom of the sea. 

The sturgeon, a large sea fish 

which enters rivers, liking 

fresh water. Its flesh is excellent. 

Caviar is made with 

its eggs salted in casks. 

The tunny is the largest eatable 

fish ; it weighs sometimes 

400 to 1000, and even 2000 

pounds, and is very voraci- 

ous. 

The tiôut generally lives in 

fresh- water lakes. It leaps 

two or three feet out of the 

water to catch insects. 

Insects. 

The bee is remarked for its industry 

in making was and 

honey. In the bee-hive the 

queen reigns supreme over 

about 15,000 or 30,000 

working bees. Bees sting 

with a sting ; they fly buzzing 

about in swarms, and 

extract from flowers the most 

exquisite food.


II BACO DA SETA, O FILUGELLO, 

quando s'incrisalida, s'inviluppa 

in un involucro tessuto 

da se. Si nutrisce di foglie 

di gelso, abbonda in Lom- 

bardia, 

Il ERUCO s'incrisalida, sfarfalla, 

e diventa farfalla. Eode la 

verdura, e suol far gran 

guasti agli orti, 

Il CALABRONE è Una Specie di 

grossa vespa, armato di gagliardo 

pungiglione, e ronza 

fortemente. 

La CAVALLETTA, O LOCUSTA, è 

di varii colori e grandezze ; 

ha le gambe e le ale più 

lunghe di quelle del grillo. 

E molto vorace, e volando a 

schiere fa guasti infiniti, 

La CICALA, nel bollor dell'es- 

tate, col suo roco stridere, è 

molto infesta all'udito. 

La FARFALLA nascc dal vorace 

bruco, il quale si trasforma in 

crisalide, e poi sviluppandosi, 

si spoglia del suo involucro, 

e fuori se n' esce con ale va- 

riopinte, la leggiadra farfalla, 

la quale va scherzando fra i 

fiori, suggendone il mellifluo 

umore. Secondo i poeti, è 

l'emblema dell'anima, 

La FORMICA, a torto o a ragione, 

vien reputata l'insetto il piìi 

industrioso, infaticabile, ed 

accorto. Le differenti Fj)ecie si 

The silk-worm, in becoming a 

chrysalis, rolls itself up in a 

little covering of silk which 

it spins. They are fed on 

mulberry leaves, and are 

kept in great quantities in 

Lombardy. 

The caterpillar becomes a 

chrysalis, and bursts out a 

butterfly. It eats leaves, 

and commits great ravages 

in the kitchen garden. 

The hornet is a large kind of 

wasp, with a sting, and 

buzzes loudly. 

The locust is of various sizes 

and colours ; its legs and 

wings are longer than those 

of the cricket. It is very 

voracious, and a swarm commits 

the greatest ravages. 

The grasshopper, in the heat 

of summer, with its sharp 

note irritates the ear. 

The butterfly springs from the 

greedy caterpillar, which, 

after being transformed into 

a chrysalis, becomes deve- 

loped, and, bursting from its 

covering, flies forth a beautiful 

butterfly, with manycoloured 

wings, which sports 

amidst flowers, extracting 

their honeyed juice. According 

to the poets, the butter- 

fly is the emblem of the soul. 

The ant is considered, falsely 

or with reason, the most industrious, 

indefatigable, and 

prudent of insects. The dif-

muovono la guerra reciprocamente, 

e si battono accanitamente, 

Il GRILLO stride e salterella, e 

si diletta nel calore del foco- 

lare, 

La LUCCIOLA è un vermicello, 

che al buio sfolgora più o 

meno, secondo che apre o 

chiude le sue alette. Ce ne 

sono pure senza ale, 

La MOSCA, il MOSCHERixo, e simili 

vanno ronzando per l'a- 

ria, dandoci tutti molta noia 

col cacciarsi negli occhi, in 

bocca, in gola, 

Il RAGNO, ARAGXO, con mirabile 

industria, tesse il suo 

ragnatelo, per prendere altri 

animaletti, e cibarsene, 

La SANGUISUGA, MIGNATTA, 

s'applica al corpo per succhiarne 

cattivo sangue, 

Fiori, 

L'amaranto è un fioretto autunnale 

di un color porporino, 

L'anemone è un bellissimo fiore 

che nasce da bulbo ; è di 

color porporino o piuttosto 

variato di più colori. I poeti 

fingono che l'anemone nascesse 

dal sangue di Adone, 

ucciso dal cinghiale, 

La balsamina è un vago fiore 

estivo, benché inodorifero, è 

di vivacissimi colori. E ori- 

gJTiaria delle Indie, 

THRASES AND DIALOGUES. 237 

ferent families go to war with 

one another, and fight with 

great desperation. 

The cricket chirps and hops, 

and likes the heat of the 

hearth. 

The glow-worm is a little worm, 

which shines more or less in 

the dark, in proportion as it 

opens its wings. Some have 

no wings. 

The fly buzzes about in the air, 

annoying us all, by flying 

into our eyes, mouth, and 

throat. 

Ttie spider, with wonderful in- 

dustry, spins its web to catch 

little insects, on which it 

feeds. 

The leech is put on the body to 

extract unhealthy blood. 

Flowers. 

The amaranth is an autumnal 

little flower of a purple hue. 

The anemone is a beautiful 

bulbous flower ; it is purple, 

or rather variegated with several 

colours. Poets have 

fancied that the anemone 

sprang from the blood of 

Adonis, who was killed by a 

wild boar. 

The balsam is a pretty summer 

flower, but scentless ; its colours 

are very brilliant, and 

it comes from India.

238 PHRASES ANO DIALOGUKS. 

LacAMPANELLATURCHiNA cresce 

spontanea nei campi e si; per 

le colline, 

Il CONVOLVOLVO VILUCCHIO SI 

avvolge intorno alle altre 

piante ; il suo lungo fusto è 

coperto di fiori di varii co- 

lori, 

L'eliotropio ha gentilissimi 

fiorellini bianchi, che danno 

in turchino ; sa di vainiglia, 

Il fioraliso è un fior campestre 

che cresce fra i grani ; e 

bianco e azzurro, 

Il GAROFOLO può chiamarsi il re 

dei fiori pel suo odore, come 

la rosa vien detta la regina 

per la sua bellezza. Gli uni 

sanno di chiodi di garofano, 

gli altri di viole ; la forma 

ed i colori di questo fiore sono 

vaghissimi, 

Il GERANIO è una pianta con la 

quale si adornano i giardini e 

le sale, il rosato mette fiori 

tinti del più vivo scarlatto ; 

si stima il muschiato vulner- 

II GIACINTO nasce dal bulbo ; i 

fiori sono bellissimi scempi o 

doppi, turchini, bianchi, e 

gialli. 

Il GIGLIO d'odore acuto ma 

soave, maestoso fiorisce sul 

suo lungo fusto, ed è l'orgo- 

glio del giardino. 

Il GIRASOLE vien così appellato 

volgendosi ognora verso il 

sole. 

Il LEUCOio è scempio o doppio, 

The blue-bell grows wild in 

fields and on hills. 

The convolvulus twines round 

the other plants near it ; its 

long stem is covered with 

flowers of various colours. 

The heliotrope has pretty bluishwhite 

blossoms and smells 

like vanilla. 

The corn-flower is a wild flower 

that grows in corn fields ; it 

is white and blue. 

The carnation may be called the 

king of flowers for its scent, 

as the rose is called the queen 

some smell of 

for its beauty ; 

cloves, some of violets ; the 

shape and colours of this 

flower are beautiful. 

The geranium adorns gardens 

and rooms ; the scarlet geranium 

has bright scarlet flow- 

ers, the musk geranium is 

medicinal. 

The hyacinth is a bulbous plant, 

with beautiful flowers, either 

single or double, blue, white, 

and yellow. 

The lily has a pleasing but 

strong scent ; it flowers ma- 

jestically at the summit of its 

long stem, and is the pride of 

the garden. 

The sun-flower is so called from 

always turning towards the 

sun. 

The stock gillyflower is simple

i fiorì vengono a ciocche, ed 

hanno un soave odore, 

La MARGHERITINA PRATELLINA 

ha i fiori bianchi tinti di 

rosa, nasce spontanea nei 

campi; 

Il MIRTO la MORTELLA è Un 

arboscello sempre verde, che 

ha fiori bianchi ed odore grato. 

Gli antichi lo dedicarono 

a Venere, quindi vien riguardato 

qual simbolo dell'amore, 

Il MUGHETTO ha gentilissimi 

fioretti bianchi e campani- 

formi. 

L'orecchio d'orso, pianta Alpina 

che comparisce in Ita- 

lia nel mese di Febbraio ; 

le 

fronde della doppia pianta 

sono vellutate, ve ne sono di 

più specie, 

Il papavero BIANCO contiene 

un latte il quale è l'oppio di 

prima qualità. 

La ROSA, benché bella, ha il 

gambo coperto di spine ; i 

bottoni chiusi da prima, sbocciano 

in bellissime rose spiranti 

un soavissimo profumo. 

Vi sono le rose damaschine, 

d'ogni mese, le cinnamomo, 

le muscose, le canine, &c. 

Il TULIPANO, benchò inodori- 

fero, è un vago fiore di colori 

vivacissimi. I tulipani co- 

perti di fiori vaghi, sono belli 

a vedere. 

La modesta viola spira intorno 

a se un profumo squisito, e 

riceve il suo nome dal bel 


or double ; the flowers are 

clustered, and have a sweet 

smell. 

The daisy, with its white and 

pink-tipped blossoms, grows 

wild in fields. 

The myrtle is an evergreen, 

with white blossoms and a 

sweet smell. The ancients 

dedicated this plant to Venus, 

and it was considered the 

symbol of love. 

The lily of the valley has pretty 

white bell-shaped flowers. 

The auricula is an Alpine plant 

which, in Italy, buds in February 

; the leaves of the 

double auricula are velvety, 

and there are several kinds 

of it. 

The white poppy contains a 

milky juice, which is the 

strongest kind of opium. 

The rose, though beautiful, has 

the stem covered with thorns; 

the rosebuds, at first closed, 

open into full blossomed flow- 

ers, breathing a sweet scent. 

There are damask, monthly, 

cinnamon, and dog roses. 

The tulip, although scentless, 

is a pretty brilliant-coloured 

flower. Tulip-beds, covered 

with these flowers, look very 

pretty. 

The modest little violet difi"uses 

around itself an exquisite perfume, 

and takes its name from


colore violetto dei suoi vaghi 

fioretti, 

DrALOGIII, 

Oh ! buon giorno ; ella giunge 

proprio in punto per far cola- 

zione con noi, 

La ringrazioinfiiiitamente; sono 

già due ore che ho fatto colazione, 

ma se me lo permette, 

beverò una tazza di caffè. 

Come stanno i suoi ? 

Non benissimo, chi è infred- 

dato, chi ha mal di testa, chi 

mal di gola, ed io ho sofferto 

di mal di denti per alcuni 

giorni, 

Non di meno ella ha buona 

cera, ed ho caro di vedere 

che può uscire. 

Oggi fa così bel tempo, che 

tutti quelli che lo possono, 

dovrebbero fare una passeg- 

giata, 

Mi credeva stamattina di 

buon'ora che sarebbe piovuto, 

ma poi s'è rischiarato, ed ora 

fa un tempo magnifico. 

che cosa 

Mangi un bocconcino ; 

posso offrirle ? ecco delle 

uova fresche, della carne 

fredda, delle conserve, del tè, 

e del caffè. 

Per farle compagnia, prenderò 

un poco di pollo freddo, una 

fettina di presciutto, ed un 

bicchier d'acqua, 

Vuole averla bontà di passarmi 

i crostini ed il butirro. TI 

servo ha dimenticato i cuc- 

chiai ed il sale. 

the violet colour of its sweet 

flowers. 

Dialogues. 

Ah, good morning ; you are 

just in time to breakfast with 

us. 

Many thanks, I have breakfasted 

two hours ago ; but if 

you will allow me, I will take 

a cup of coffee. 

How are you all at home ? 

Not very well some have colds, 

; 

some headaches, some sore 

throats, and I have had for 

some days severe toothache. 

You look very well notwithstanding, 

and I am glad to 

see you can go out. 

To-day is so fine, every one 

should take a walk who can. 

I thought it was going to rain 

this morning early, but it 

cleared, and now the weather 

is glorious. 

Eat something ; what will you 

take? here are fresh eggs, 

cold meat, preserves, tea and 

coffee. 

To keep you company, I will 

take a little cold fowl, a slice 

of ham, and a glass of cold 

water. 

I will trouble you for the toast 

and butter. The servant has 

forgotten spoons and salt.

Abbia la compiacenza eli suo- 

nare, 

Mariuccia cosa vuoi per colazione 

? 

Del latte caldo ed un panino, 

Come sta volentieri nella nuova 

casa ? 

Spero che sia comoda ; e convenga 

alla sua famiglia ? 

Non molto, non vi sono abbastanza 

camere, e il pian terreno 

è malamente disposto. 

Le sale di ricevimento mi son 

sembrate assai belle, specialmente 

il salone, 

Ha ragione, ma disgraziatamente 

tutti i cammini fanno 

fumo, e la cucina è estremamente 

umida. 

Vi è il gaz in tutte le stanze ? 

Non vi è in nessuna, 

Come si chiama il suo padrone 

di casa? 

Mi ha detto il suo nome, ma 

ora non me lo ricordo, 

A proposito, son venuto oggi ad 

augurare a tutti loro un felice 

Capo d'anno, ed un allegro 

Natale, 

Ho portato questi giocattoli per 

i fanciulli ; non sono ancora 

alzati ? 

Ci leviamo tutti alle sette e 

mezzo nell'inverno, e alle sei 

nell'estate, 

I ragazzi saranno ben contenti 

de' suoi regali. 

Mi permetta di presentarle un 

mio intimo amico, il Signor 

C-, 

niRASKS AND DIALOGUES. 211 

Be so kind as to ring. 

Little Mary, what will you take 

for breakfast ? 

Some warm milk and a roll. 

How do you like your new 

house ? 

I hope it is comfortable, and 

suits your family ? 

Not very well there are too 

; 

few bed-rooms, and the 

ground-floor is badly laid out. 

The public rooms seemed to me 

very handsome, particularly 

the drawing-room. 

Yes, you are right ; but unfortunately 

all the chimneys 

smoke, and the kitchen is extremely 

damp. 

Are all the rooms lighted with 

gas? 

None of them. 

What is your landlord's name ? 

He has told me his name, but 

now I have forgotten it. 

By the bye, I came to-day to 

wish you all a happy New 

Year and a merry Christmas. 

I have brought these toys for 

the little ones ; are they up 

yet? 

We all rise at half- past seven 

in winter, and at six in summer. 

The children will be delighted 

with your gifts. 

Allow me to introduce to you 

an intimate friend of mine, 

Mr. C.

212 PIIUASES AND DIALOGUES. 

Ho niolto caro di far la sua conoscenza, 

e spero che ci vedremo 

spesso, 

Ella è molto cortese, 

E questa la prima volta cb'ella 

viene in Londra ? 

No, vi ho dimorato per molto 

tempo prima di andare nelle 

Indie, 

Come le piaceva il modo di vivere 

in India ? 

Passabilmente ; però il clima 

non mi si confaceva. 

Ha l'intenzione di ritornarvi? 

Sì, fra poco, ma fra cinque o 

sei anni spero di potermi stabilire 

in Europa, 

Il mio amico va a passare un 

poco di tempo in Dublino, e 

le sarei molto tenuto, se ella 

potesse favorirgli alcune let- 

tere d'introduzione. 

Con tutto il piacere ; mi dispiace 

però che molti dei miei 

migliori amici si trovino ora 

fuori d'Irlanda, 

Ciò non fa niente, una o due 

conoscenze bastano perchè ne 

faccia molte altre. 

Ella può star certo che io farò 

di tutto per servirla, 

E tempo di uscire, 

Dove vanno ? 

Andiamo a fare una passeggiata 

a cavallo prima di pranzo. 

A rivederci. Faccia i miei 

complimenti alla sua signora 

madre. 

Ho appunto preso in affitto una 

casa smobigliata, ed ora bisogna 

che l'ammobigli, 

I am very happy to make your 

acquaintance, and I hope we 

shall see one another often. 

You are very kind. 

Is this the first time you have 

been in London ? 

No, I lived here a long time 

before going to India. 

How did you like Indian life ? 

Pretty well ; but the climate 

did not agree with me. 

Do you intend to return thither? 

Yes, shortly ; but in five or six 

years I shall be able to settle 

in Europe. 

My friend is going to spend a 

short time in Dublin, and I 

would feel much obliged by 

your giving him a few letters 

of introduction. 

Most willingly ; but I regret 

that many of my best friends 

are just now out of Ireland. 

That does not signify, one or 

two acquaintances will introduce 

him to many more. 

You may rely on me, that I will 

do all I can to obl'ge you. 

It is time we were going. 

Where are you going ? 

We are going to take a ride 

before dinner. Good-bye ; 

remember me to your mother. 

I have just taken an unfurnished 

house, and now I must fur- 

nish it.

La pigione è molto cara, ma il 

proprietario non vuole affittarla 

per meno, 

Bisogna che trovi un bell'appartamento 

ammobigiiato, 

per un amico che deve ar- 

rivare in città questa settimana, 

Mi sa male di non potere assis- 

tervi nelle vostre ricerche, 

Ecco là una casa che ha un 

cartello d'appigionasi, 

Le stanze non mi fanno, e la 

padrona di casa non mi va a 

genio. 

Dove dimorate adesso ? 

Sto a casa di mio fratello, ma 

siccome ho intenzione di fermarmi 

qui per qualche tempo, 

bisogna che prenda casa. 

Facciamo una partita agli scacchi 

o a dama. 

Non giuoco né all'uno né al- 

l'altro, 

Giuocate mai alle carte ? 

Molto di rado, 

Suonate il pianoforte ? 

Quando io era in Italia mi divertiva 

a suonarlo, ma ora 

son fuori d'esercizio, 

I ragazzi sono stati tutta la 

mattina in giardino a ruzzare, 

ora chiamateli a merenda, 

Siete disposto a venire a ftir 

delle visite meco oggi? 

Molto volentieri, purché siamo 

di ritorno prima delle cinque. 

Andremo in città in legno, e se 

non saremo stanchi, possiamo 

ritornare a piedi, 


The rent is very high, but the 

landlord will not let it for 

less. 

I want to find a nice furnished 

lodging for a friend, who is 

coming to town this week. 

I am sorry I cannot assist you 

in your search. 

There is a house with a lodging 

bill. 

I do not like the rooms, or the 

landlady. 

Where are you living now ? 

I am staying at my brother's, 

but as I think of settling 

here for some time, I must 

take a house. 

Let us have a game of chess or 

draughts. 

I do not play either. 

Do you ever play cards ? 

Very seldom. 

Do you play the piano ? 

When I was in Italy I used to 

play, but now I am out of 

practice. 

The children have been playing 

all the morning in the garden 

; call them in now to 

lunch. 

Are you inclined to pay some 

visits with me to-day ? 

Certainly, provided we are 

home by five. 

We shall drive to town, and 

then, if we are not tired, wo 

may walk back.

244 niRASES AND DIALOGUES. 

Facciamo un giro sui prati, 

Fate attenzione ai vostri affari, 

Non badate a ciò che dicono, 

essi sclierzano, 

Ci fecero ogni attenzione immaginabile, 

e non vollero 

permettere che restassimo 

alla locanda. 

Siate pivi rispettoso verso le 

persone attempate, 

Questo cammeo mi costa cinque 

lire ; quanto avete pagato il 

vostro ? 

Nulla, poiché mi è stato re- 

galato, 

A proposito d'Italia, ella sa 

che ho cominciato a prender 

lezione d'Italiano, ella che 

lo conosce a fondo potrebbe 

assistermi in questo studio. 

Ben volentieri, se lo vuole d'ora 

innanzi parleremo sempre in 

questa dolce lingua, e possiamo 

pure leggere insieme 

un qualche poeta Italiano, 

Mi si dice che la poesia sia 

molto difficile, ed io che non 

sono che un principiante 

bisogna che resti alla prosa. 

Vorrebbe dirmi i differenti 

modi di rendere in Italiano 

la parola /a?V.^ 

E perchè no. Faccia attenzione 

alle seguenti frasi, ed ella 

imparerà a tradurla in tutti, 

quasi tutti i suoi varii 

significati : 

— 

Una heìla signora. 

Una carnagione bianca^ 

I capelli biondi. 

Let US take a turn in the 

meadow. 

Pay attention to your business. 

Pay no attention to what they 

say, they are jesting. 

They paid us every possible 

attention, and would not allow 

us to remain at the hotel. 

Pay more respect to aged 

people. 

— 

I have paid five pounds for this 

cameo brooch ; how much 

did you pay for yours? 

Nothing, because it was made 

a present to me. 

Apropos, you know I have 

begun to take Italian lessons, 

you who know Italian perfectly 

might help me in my 

studies. 

With all my heart. If you like 

we shall henceforth always 

speak that sweet language, 

and we can read together 

some of the Italian poets. 

I believe Italian poetry is very 

difficult, and as I am only 

a beginner, I must content 

myself with prose. Could 

you tell me the different 

ways of expressing in Italian 

the word /afr.^ 

With pleasure. Pay attention 

to the following phrases, and 

you will learn how to trans- 

late the word in all its 

various significations : 

A fair lady. 

A fair complexion. 

Fair hair.

Un prezzo giusto, 

Questa parola, quando è un 

sostantivo, ha la significa- 

zione di mercato, e corrisponde 

alla parola Italiana 

fiera, 

La ringrazio infinitamente, e 

cercherò di trar profitto dai 

di lei cortesi schiarimenti. 

Bisogna che la lasci per 

adesso, a rivederci a questa 

sera, 

E ella Inglese ? 

Son nato in Germania, e allevato 

in Francia, 

Sta ella più volentieri in città, 

in campagna ? 

Se potessi seguire il mio gusto, 

starei l'inverno in città, e 

l'estate in campagna. 

Ho da chiederle un favore, 

vuol'ella accordarmelo ? 

Che me lo dica prima, e se sarà 

in mio potere, non glielo 

ricuserò certo, 

Desidererei che ella mi conducesse 

seco a Parigi la 

prima volta che vi andrà, 

L'è saltato il grillo di vestire 

sempre a bruno, 

Perchè porta degli stivali cosi 


A fair price. 

When it is a substantive, this 

word means a market, and 

in Italian is fiera. 

Many thanks; I will try and 

profit by your kind explanation. 

I must leave you now, 

so good-bye till this evening. 

Is England your native country? 

I was born in Germany, and 

brought up in France. 

Which do you like best, town 

or country ? 

If I could follow my taste, I 

would live in town in winter, 

and in the country in summer. 

I have a favour to ask you, will 

you grant it ? 

Let me hear it first ; I will not 

refuse it if I can help doing 

so. 

I want you to take me to 

Paris when you next go 

there. 

She has taken a fancy to dress 

always in mourning. 

Why do you wear such light 

boots ? you will get cold. 

sottili? ella prenderà un'infreddatura, 

Mi son cavato in questo mo- I have just taken off my strong 

mento gli stivali grossi onde boots before dressing for 

vestirmi per il pranzo. 

dinner. 

Che vestito si metterà oggi ? What dress 

day ? 

will you wear to- 

Quello che ha riportato ieri la The one the milliner lias 

modista, 

brought back yesterday.


Portami i guanti ed il ven- 

taglio, 

Non posso portar meco tutti 

questi involti, bisogna che 

me li mandiate, 

Vuol bere un poco di vino 

prima di uscire ? 

Ho bevuto una tazza di caffè, 

Non siete stanco, e non avete 

sonno dopoaver tanto ballato? 

Un poco, pure devo scrivere 

una lettera prima di 

a letto, 

andare 

Ho corso un gran pericolo 

oggi ; il cavallo mi ha levato 

la mano, e son caduto. 

Spero che non vi siate fatto 

alcun male ? 

]\Ii son fatto molto male ad un 

braccio, e un poco ad un 

piede. 

Ho gran fame, 

Tanto meglio; resti a pranzo 

con noi. 

Si accomodi sulla poltrona, 

Si adagi sul canapè, 

Non faccia ceremonie. 

Ho gran piacere di vederla in 

buona salute. 

Quando è ella ritornata di 

Francia ? 

Io tornai sabato passato, 

Che le sembra di quel paese ? 

Bisogna essere senza parzialità, 

la Francia è un bellissimo 

paese, 

E che dice dei Francesi ? 

Sono molto civili e cortesi 

verso i forestieri, 

Bring me my gloves and fan. 

I cannot carry all these parcels, 

you must send them. 

Will you take some wine before 

going out ? 

I have taken a cup of coffee. 

Are you not tired and sleepy, 

after having danced so much? 

Rather, but I must write a 

letter before I go to bed. 

I have had a narrow escape today 

; my horse ran away, 

and I fell. 

I hope you are not hurt ? 

I hurt my arm severely, and 

my foot a little. 

I am very hungry. 

So much the better ; stay and 

dine with us. 

Sit down in the arm-chair. 

Lie down on the sofa. 

Do not stand on ceremony. 

I am overjoyed to see you again 

in good health. 

When did you return from 

France ? 

I returned last Saturday. 

What do you think of that 

country ? 

To be impartial, France is a 

very fine country. 

And what do you say of the 

French ? 

They are extremely civil and 

polite to foreigners.

In qua! parte della Francia è 

ella stata ? 

Sono stato tutto il tempo in 

Parigi : nell'andarvi sono 

passato per la Normandia, 

e al mio ritorno, per la 

Piccardia, 

Si vede che i giorni cominciano 

a scorciare, 

E segno che saremo ben presto 

alla fine delle belle giornate, 

Kon sempre ; noi abbiamo 

qualche volta l'estate in 

autunno, e l'inverno nella 

primavera, 


In what part of France have 

you been ? 

I was all the time in Paris : 

in going thither I passed 

through Normandy, and on 

my return, through Picardy. 

The days begin to shorten per- 

ceptibly. 

It is a sign that we shall soon 

be at the end of the fine days. 

Not always; we sometimes have 

summer in autumn, and 

winter in spring. 

pai^TED II y OMVEl! AND BOYD, EDINBURGH.

EDUCATIONAL WORKS 

PUBLISHED BY 

Oliver and Boyd, Edinburgh; 

BOLD ALSO BY 

SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, AND CO.. LONDON.

White's History of France 12 

Great Britaiu and Ireland.l2 

Sacred History 13 

History of Scotland 12 

History of Kome 13 

Writing, Arithmetic, eto. 

Gray's Arithmetic 15 

Hutton's Book-keeping 15 

Ingram's Principles of Arithmetic..l5 

Maclaren's Arithmetic 16 

Book-keeping 16 

Melrose's Arithmetic 15 

Scott's Arithmetical Works 16 

Copy Lines 16 

Smith's Arithmetical Works 14 

Stewart's Arithmetical Works 15 

Trotter's Arithmetical Work8...14, 16 

New Code Arithmetic 14 

Hutton's Book-keeping... 15 

Philosophy, Mathematics, eto. 

Barclay's Geometry for Schools 16 

Ingram's System of Mathematics... 16 

Trotter's Key to do 16 

Schwegler's Philosophy 16 

Stirling's Text-Book to Kant 16 

French. 

Beljame's French Grammar, etc... 20 

Caron's First French Class-Book...20 

First French Reading-Book.20 

French Grammar 20 

Chamhaud's Fahles Choisies 20 

Christison's French Grammar 20 

Fables et Contes Choisis 20 

Fleuiy's History of Frauce..20 

French New Testament 20 

Hallard's French Grammar 20 

Schneider's First French Course. ... 

Conversation-Grammar 

French Reader 

French Manual 

Écrin Littéraire 

French Composition 

Surenne'B Dictiouanes..» , 

Surenne's New French Dialogues... 19 

French Classics 19 

Liatin and Greek. 

Ainsworth's Latin Dictionary 22 

Cicero's Orationes Select» 24 

Clyde's Greek Syntax 21 

Rudiments of the Latin 

Language 22 

Dymock's Caesar and Sallust 22 

Edin. Academy Class-Books: 

— 

Rudiments of Latin Language.. ..21 

Latin Delectus 21, 24 

Rudiments of Greek Language... 21 

Greek Extracts 21 

Ferguson's (Prof.) Gram. Exercises.24 

Latin Delectus 24 

Ovid's Metamorphoses .24 

Fergusson's (Dr) Xenophon's Anabasis 

23 

Homer's Iliad, with Vocab...23 

Geddes' (Prof.) Greek Grammar 21 

Greek Testament, by Duncan 23 

Hunter's Ruddiman's Rudiments... 22 

Sallust, Virgil, and Horace. .22 

Livy, Books 21 to 25 22 

M'Dowall's Csesar and Virgil 22 

Melville's Lectiones Selectas 22 

Ogilvie's First Latin Course 22 

Stewart's Cornelius Nepos 23 

First Greek Course 23 

Advanced Greek Course.23 

ItaUan. 

Lemmi's Italian Grammar 24 

German. 

Fischart's First Class-Book 24 

Reader in Prose and Verse. .24 

School Registers. 

Pupil's Daily Register of Marks 17 

school Register of Attendance, 

Absence, and Fees 17 

Geometrical Drawing. 

Kennedy's Grade Geometry 16

EDUCATIONAL WORKS. 

ENGLISH BEADING, GRAMMAR, Eto. 

In the initiatory department of instruction a valuable series of works was 

prepared by Dr M'Cuiloch, formerly Head Master of the Circus Place School, 

Edinburgh, afterwards Minister of the West Church, Greenock. 

DB M'CULLOCH'S SERIES OF CLASS-BOOKS. 

These Books are intended for the use of Schools where the general mental 

culture of the pupil, as well as his proficiency in the art of reading, is studiously 

and systematically aimed at. 

They form, collectively, a progressional Series, so constructed and graduated 

as to conduct the pupil, by regular stages, from the elementary sounds of the 

language to its highest and most complex forms of speech ; and each separate 

Book is also progressively arranged,—the lessons which are more easily read 

and understood always taking the lead, and preparing the way for those of 

greater difficulty. 

The subject-matter of the Books is purposely miscellaneous. Yet it is 

always of a character to excite the interest and enlarge the knowledge of the 

reader. And with the design of more effectually promoting his mental growth 

and nurture, the various topics are introduced in an order conformaiile to that 

in which the chief faculties of the juvenile mind are usually developed. 

That the moral feelings of the pupil may not be without their proper 

stimulus and nutriment, the lessons are pervaded throughout by the religious 

and Christian element. 

DR M'CULLOCH'S READING-BOOKS FOR SCHOOLS. 

First Reading-Book. l^d. 

Do. Large Type, Edition, in tvfo Parta, price 2d. each. 

Second Reading-Book. 3d. 

Third Reading-Book, containing simple Pieces in Prose 

and Verse, with Exercises. Now Printed in Larger Type. lOd. 

Fourth Reading-Book, containing only Lessons likely to 

interest. With Synopsis of Spelling. Is. 6d. 

Series of Lessons in Prose and Verse. 2s. 

Course of Elementary Reading in Science and Liter 

ATDBE, compiled from popular Writers. 39 Woodcuts. 3s. 

Manual of English Grammar, Philosophical and Practical, 

with Exerciaes; adapted to the Analytical mode of Tnition. 

With a Chapter on Analysis of Sentences, la. 6d.

I 

4 English Reading^ Grammar, etc. 

Lennie's Principles of English Grammar. Comprising 

the Substance of all the most approved English Grammars, briefly 

defined, and neatly arranged; with Copious Exercises in Parsing 

and Syntax. Gopynght Edition ; with the Author's latest improvements, 

and a Chapter on Analysis of Sentences. Is. 6d. 

The Author's Key ; containing, besides the corrected Exercises 

in Parsing and Syntax, many useful Critical Remarks, Hints, 

and Observations, and explicit and detailed instructions as to the 

best method of teaching Grammar. New Edition. 3s. 6d. 

Analysis of Sentences: Being the Appendix to Lennie's 

Grammar adapted for General Use. Price 3d. Ket, 6d. 

The Principles of English Grammar ; with a Series of 

Progressive Exercises, and a Supplementary Treatise on Analysis 

of Sentences. By Dr James Douglas, lately Teacher of English, 

Great King Street, Edinburgh. Is. Cd. 

Simplicity of expression and methodical arrangement have been nnlfoimly 

aimed at; and copious exercises for the practice of pupils have been 

introduced throughout. 

Douglas's Initiatory Grammar, for Junior Classes, 

Printed in larger type, and containing a Supplementary Treatise on 

Analysis of Sentences. 6d. 

The Bead Master, Belie Vue House, Bristol.—" It contains the best and tersest 

explanations for learners that have appeared." 

The Head Master, Milton House Academy, Lewes.—"The Initiatory Grammar 

is an especial favourite with my junior boys." 

Douglas's Progressive English Reader. A Series of 

English Reading-Books. The Earlier Books are illustrated with 

numerous Engravings. 

First Book. 2d. I Thibd Book. Is. I Fifth Book. 2s. 

Second Book. 4d. Fourth Book. Is. 6d. Sixth Book. 2s. 6d. 

| ] 

Douglas's Selections for Recitation, with Introductory 

and Explanatory Notes; for Schools. Is. 6d. 

Douglas's Spelling and Dictation Exercises. Price Is. 

Athenceum.—" A good practical book, from which correct spelling and pronunciation 

may be acquired." 

Douglas's English Etymology: A Text-Book of Deriva- 

tives, with numerous Exercises. Price 2s. 

Scotsman.—" An especially excellent book of derivatives."

English Reading, Grammar, etc. 5 

Outlines of English Grammar and Analysis, for 

Elementary Schools, with Exercises. By Walter Scott 

Dalgleish, M.A. Edin., lately one of the Masters in the London 

International College. 6d., or 8d. cloth. Key, Is. 

Dalgleish's Progressive English Grammar, with Exer- 

cises. 2s. Key, 2s. 6d. 

From Dr Joseph Boswobth, Professor of Anglo-Saxon in the University of 

Oxford; Author of the Anglo-Saxon Dictionary, etc., etc. 

" Quite a practical work, and contains a vast quantity of important information, 

well arranged, and brought up to the present improved state of philology. 

I have never seen so much matter brought together In so short a space." 

Dalgleish's Grammatical Analysis, with Progressive 

Exercises. 9d. Key, 2s. 

Dalgleish's Outlines of English Composition, for 

Elementary Schools, with Exercises. 6d. Key, 4d. 

Dalgleish's Introductory Text-Book of English 

COMPOSITION, based on Grammatical Synthesis; containing 

Sentences, Paragraphs, and Short Essays. Is. 

Dalgleish's Advanced Text-Book of English Com- 

POSITION, treating of Style, Prose Themes, and Versification. 

2s. Both Books bound together, 2s. 6d. Key, 2s. 6d. 

Lamb's Tales from Shakespeare. Beautifully Illustrated. 

Oliver and Boyd's School Edition. Adapted for the New Code. 

Is. 

Robinson Crusoe (Oliver and Boyd's School Edition). Beau- 

tifully Illustrated. Adapted for the New Code. Is. 

The Child's Story Book, for Junior Cl.\sses. Illustrated. 

A series of favourite Tales, including, besides other stories, Cinderella, 

Jack and the Bean Stalk, The Babes in the Wood, Tom 

Thumb, Sinbad the Sailor, Ali Babà and the Forty Thieves, 

Jack the Giant-Killer, Aladdin, etc., etc. Adapted for the 

New Code. Is. 

A Dictionary of the English Language, containing 

the Pronunciation, Etymology, and Explanation of all Words 

authorized by Eminent Writers. To which are added, .a Vocabulary 

of the lioots of English Words, and an accented list of Greek, Latin, 

and Scripture Proper Names. By Alexander Reid, LL.D., late 

Head Master of the Edinburgh Institution. Reduced to 2s 6d. 

Dr Reid's Rudiments of English Grammar. Greatly 

Improved. This book is concise, simple, and of easy application. 

Copious Exercises have been introduced throughout; together with 

a new Chapter on the Analysis of Sentences. 6d.

6 English Reading, Grammar, etc. 

Dr Eeid's Rudiments of English Composition. With 

Copious Exercises. Remodelled. 2s. Key, 2s. (>d. 

The work now includes Systematic Exercises in Sentence-making. A 

distinct division has been devoted to the Structure of Paragraphs. The 

sections on Descriptive and Narrative Essays have been entirely rewritten. 

History of English Literature ; with an Outline of the 

Origin and Growth of the English Language. Illu.strated by 

Extracts. For Schools and Private Students. By Professor 

Spalding. Revised and continued. 3s. 6d. 

Tlie wliole work has undergone thorough and careful revision. The chapters 

on the Language, and those on our Early Literature, have been brought into 

harmony with the results of recent philological and historical investigations; 

while the record of events has been brought down to the present time. A few 

explanatory notes have been added in an Appendix, with the view of removing 

the difficulties which recondite allusions and illustrations are apt to cast in 

the path of the young student. 

Studies in Composition: a Text-book for Arlvanced 

Classes. By David Pryde, M.A., LL.D., Head Master of the 

Edinburgh Merchant Company's Educational Institution for Young 

Ladies. 2s. 

English Composition for the Use of Schools. By 

PiOBERT Armstrong, LL.D., Madras College, St Andrews; and 

Thomas Armstrong, Heriot Foundation School, Edinburgh. Part 

I., Is. 6d. Part II., 2s. Both Parts bound together, 3s. Key, 2s. 

Armstrong's English Etymology. 2s. 

Armstrong's Etymology for Junior Classes, 4d. 

Etymological Guide to the English Language. Is. 6d. 

This is a collection, alphabetically arranged, of the principal roots, affixes, 

and prefixes, with their derivatives and compounds. 

Old Testament Biography, containing notices of the 

chief persons in Holy Scripture, in the form of Questions, with 

references to Scripture for the Answers. 6d. 

New Testament Biography, in the form of Questions, 

with references to Scripture for the Answers, on the same plan as 

the preceding. 6d.

English Beading, Grammar, etc. 

STANDARD EEADING-BOOKS. 

By James Colvillb, M.A., D.Sc, Principal of Newton Place Establishment, 

Glasgow, formerly English Master, George Watson's College School, 

Edinburgh, one of the Educational Institutions of the Merchant Company. 

Primer: being Spelling and Reading Lessons Introductory 

to Standard I, (Illustrated.) 36 pages. IJd. 

First Standard Eeading-Book ; with Easy Lessons in 

Script. (Illustrated.) 95 pages. 4d. in stiff wrapper, or 6d. cloth. 

Second Standard Eeading-Book ; with Dictation Exercises, 

partly in Script. (Illustrated.) 108 pages. 4d., or 6d. cloth. 

Third Standard Eeading-Book ; 

partly in Script. 144 pages, strongly bound. 8d. 

with Dictation Exercises, 

Fourth Standard Eeading-Book; with Dictation Exercises. 

216 pages, strongly bound. Is. 3d. 

Fifth Standard Eeading-Book ; with Dictation Exercises. 

300 pages, strongly bound. Is. 6d. 

with Biographical Notes, 

and Outlines for Exercises in Composition. 394 pages, strongly 

bound. 2s. 6d. 

Sixth Standard Eeading-Book ; 

Glasgow Infant School Magazine. Compiled by 

D. Caughie, Master of the Initiatory Department in the Glasgow 

Normal Seminary. With numerous Woodcuts. 1st Series, 43rd 

Thousand, price 3s. 2nd Series, 13th Thousand, price Ss. 

These volumes furnish a great variety of valuable material for intellectual 

and moral teaching, comprising Anecdotes and Stories, Hymns and Simple 

Verses set to Music; Lessons on Natural History, Botany, and on Familiar 

Objects; Sacred Geography, Bible Lessons, and Scripture References. 

Household Economy: a Manual intended for Female 

Training Colleges and the Senior Class of Girls' Schools. By 

Margaret Maria Gordon (Miss Brewster), Author of ""Work, 

or Plenty to do and how to do it," etc 23. 

System of English Grammar, and the Principles of Cora- 

position. With Exercises, and a Treatise on Analysis of Sentences. 

By John White, F.E.I.S. Is. 6d.

8 Ohject-Lesson Cards. 

OBJECT-LESSON CARDS. 

On the Vegetable Kingdom. Set of 20 in a Box. £1, Is. 

On the Animal Kingdom. Set of 14 in a Box. £1, Is. 

On the Mineral Kingdom. Set of 14 in a Box. £1, Is. 

Each subject is illustrated with specimens, attached to the Cards, of the 

various objects described, the whole forming an interesting Industrial Museum. 

How to Train Young Eyes and Ears : being a Manual 

of Object-Lessons for Parents and Teachers. By Mary Anne 

Ross, Mistress of the Church of Scotland Normal Infant School, 

EdinburgL Is. 6d. 

GEOGRAPHY AND ASTEONOMY. 

Oliver and Boyd's Pronouncing Gazetteer of the World, 

Descriptive and Statistical. With Numerous Etymological 

Notices: a Geographical Dictionary fob Popular Use. 

Crown 8vo, 5s. ; or with Atlas of 32 Coloured Maps, 6s. 6d. 

An entirely neto Edition, vnth the latest Population Returns of our own and other 

Countries, and the information otherwise brought down. 

Daily Telegraph.—" GTea.t pains have evidently been taken to set down 

facts briefly but accurately, and its compiler has given a very fair amount of 

space to the results of the most recent explorations and discoveries. It will 

prove a most useful book of reference." 

School Geography. By James Clyde, M.A., LL.D., one 

of the Classical Masters of the Edinburgh Academy. With Special 

Chapters on Mathematical and Physical Geography, and Technological 

Appendix. Eevised throughout. With 9 Coloured Maps. 4s. 

Educational News.— " The grand characteristic of the ' School Geography ' 

is its singular readableness—its clear, fluent, lively narrative ; the sunny ray 

of realistic art that everywhere brightens the subject with the charm aLmost 

of romance, dispelling the heavy cloud of superfluous facts and figures." 

Dr Clyde's Elementary Geography With an Appendix on 

Sacred Geography. Eevised throughout. With 5 Coloured Maps. 

Is. 6d. 

Educational Times.—" A thoroughly trustworthy manual."

Geography and Astronomy. 

Stewart's Compendium of Modern Geography, Political, 

Phtsigal, and Mathematical. With Descriptive and 

Pronouncing Tables, Questions for Examination, etc. Enlarged and 

entirely New Edition. 525 pages. With 11 Coloured Maps. 3s. 6d. 

This edition has been most carefully prepared, and gives a life-like 

picture of each country, with the results of recent census-taking in various 

parta of the world. The work is unusually complete in every respect. 

An Abstract of General Geography, comprehending a 

more minute Description of the British Empire, and of Palestine or 

the Holy Land, etc. With Numerous Exercises. For Junior 

Classes. By John Whitk, F.E.I.S., late Teacher, Edinburgh. 

Carefully Bevised and Enlarged. With 5 Coloured Maps, Is. 

White's System of Modern Geography : with Outlines of 

AsTEOKOMT and Physical Geography ; comprehending an Account 

of the Principal Towns, Climate, Soil, Productions, Religion, Education, 

Government, and Population of the various Countries. With 

Sacred Geography, Problems on the Globe, Exercises, etc. Carefully 

Bevised. 2s. 6d. ; or with 6 Coloured Maps, 2s. 9d. 

Rudiments of Modern Geography. By Alex. Reid, 

LL.D., late Head Master of the Edinburgh Institution. Improved. 

With 5 Coloured Maps, Is. 

The names of places are accented, and accompanied with short descriptions, 

and occasionally with the mention of some remarkable event. To the several 

countries are appended notices of their physical geography, productions, 

government, and religion; concluding with an outline of sacred geography, 

problems on the use of the globes, and directions for the construction of maps. 

First Book of Geography; being an Abridgment of 

Dr Reid's Rudiments of Modem Geography, with an Outline of the 

Geography of Palestine. With Map of the World. Improved. 6d. 

Dr Reid's Outline of Sacred Geography. 6d. 

An Introductory Geography, for Junior Pupils, By Dr 

James Douglas, lately Head Master, Great King Street School, 

Edinburgh. With Map of the World. Carefully Bevised. 6d. 

Dr Douglas's Progressive Geography. On a new plan, 

showing recent changes on the Continent and elsewhere, and embracing 

much Historical and other Information. 160 pages, Is. 

Carefully Bevised. 

AtliencEum.—" The information is coplons, correct, well put, and adapted to 

the present state of knowledge." 

Dr Douglas's Text-Book of Geography, containing the 

Physical and Political Geography of all the Coimtries of the 

Globe. Systematically arranged. 2s. 6d. ; or with 10 Coloured 

Maps, 38. Carefully Remscd

Class-Book of Geography. By William Lawson, 

F.R.G.S.. St Mark's College, Chelsea. With 7 Coloured Maps. A 

complete Text-Book. Is. 6d. 

%* Also sold in stparatf. Farli, each to»()l a Coloured Map.viz.— 

British Colonies. 2d. 

Geooraphical Primer. 2d. I The 

England and Wales. 2d. Europe, "d. 

Scotland and Ireland. 2d. Asia, Aprica, and America. | 4d. 

The following four books have heen prepared hy Mr Lawson to meet the additional 

requirements of the New Code :— 

Geographical First Book; embracing Lessons on the 

Meaning and Use of a Map ; Size and Shape of the World ; Geographical 

Terms ; Hills and Mountains ; and Rivers. Designed to 

meet the requirements of Standards I. and II. With Diagrams and 

Coloured Map. 2d. 

England and Wales' a Reading-Book in Geography 

for Standard III. With Maps and Illustrations. Is. 

Ifalinnal f^chnolmaster.—" Mr LawBOn gives a great deal of Infonnation 

fthoiit England and Wales in this pleasant volume, not in the dry detailed 

manner of the geography, but rather in the descriptive style, which is the 

chief excellence of the Geographical Reader. The subject, however, is not 

over-described. Mr Lawson evidently describes the subject from a full mind, 

and scarcely a page turns over but what we find a little sketch map, or pleasing 

illustration. We do not remember seeing a Geographical Reading Book 

on England and Wales that, on the whole, we like so well as this." 

Schoolmaster.—" This new Geographical Reader presents a compact outline 

of the physical features and industrial character of England and Wales, 

arranged in fifty chapters. It is written in a plain, straightforward style, 

seeking ra*her to convey information than to strike the reader by any 

rhetorical flourishes." 

Edvcat'onnl Times.— "Lawson's 'England and Wales' consists of carefully 

writtpn lessons, with cuts prepared to illustrate the text. In this case the 

pictures are generally a real help, and rarely distract attention." 

Primary Physical Geography; embracing Lessons on 

Latitude and Longitude; the Seasons; Day and Night; Climate; 

Vegetable and Animal Productions. Designed to meet the additional 

requirements of Standards V. and VI. With Diagrams and Coloured 

Maps. 2d. 

Lawson's Elements of Physical Geography. With 

Examination Papers. Adapted to meet the requirements of Standard 

V U. of the New Code, and for Pupil Teachers. With Coloured 

Map. 96 pages. 6d. in stiff wrapper, or 8d. cloth. 

Lawson's Text-Book of Physical Geography, with 

Examination Papers. A complete view of the whole subject, 

combining simplicity of style with scientific accuracy. New Edition, 

3s. 6d.

Geography and Astronomy. 11 

Lawson's Outlines of Physiography. With Illustrations. 

In Two Parts. Price 23. 6d. New Edition. 

This manual is intended as a Text-Rook of Physiography as prescribed by 

the syllabus of the Science Department, South Kensington. In Part I., 

which corresponds with the Elementary Stage of the subject, the Earth is 

considered apart from other portions of the universe, and chiefly in relation 

to the materials of which it is composed, the forces which act upon those 

materials, and the distribution of vegetable and animal life. In Part II. 

the Earth is considered as a planet, and its position in the solar system, as 

well as its relation to the distant stars, are pointed out. 

The Parts may le had separately , price Is. 6d. each. 

Educational News.— "So far as the Science and Art examinations are concerned, 

no better book could be used." 

Geography of the British Empire. Carefully Revised. 

With Maps and Diagrams. For Pupil Teachers and Advanced 

Classes. 3s. 

Paet I. Outlines of Mathematical and Physical Geography. 

II. Physical, Political, and Commercial Geography of the British 

Islands. 

III. Phyrical, Political, and Commercial Geography of the British 

Colonies. 

Educational News.—" For advanced pupils we know nothing better." 

Scotsman.—" Deservedly one of the most popular text-books of its kind." 

Tlie Board Teacher.—" About perfect as a text-book for pupil teachers and 

students in general." 

Oliver and Boyd's Handy Atlas of the World, showing 

Eecent Discoveries. 32 full-coloured Maps. 8vo, very neatly 

bouud, and suited for the book-shelf, 2s. Gd. 

Oliver and Boyd's School Atlas, sliowlng Recent Discoveries. 

32 large full-coloured Maps, including Palestine and the 

Roman Empire ; with Diagram of Geographical Terms. Price Is. 

Reid's Elements of Astronomy ; for Schools and Private 

Study. Beviseli and brought domi to the present state of Astronomical 

Science, by Rev. Alex. Mackav, LL.D., Author of " iManual of 

Modern Geography," etc. With 66 Wood Engravings. 3s. 

Reid's Elements of Physical Geography; with Outlines 

of Geology, JIathematical Geography, and Astronomy, and 

Questions for Examination. With numerous Illustrations, and a 

large coloured Physical Chart of the Globe. Is. 

Murphy's Bihle Atlas of 24 Maps, with Historical 

Descriptions. Reduced to Is. coloured.

HISTORY. 

The works In this department have been prepared with the 

greatest care. They will he found to include Class-books for Junior 

and Senior Classes in all the branches of History generally taught 

in the best schools. While the utmost attention has been paid to 

accuracy, the narratives have in every case been rendered as 

instructive and pleasing as possible, so as to relieve the study from 

the tediousness of a mere dry detail of facts. 

History of England for Junior Classes; with Questions 

for Examination. Edited by Henry White, B. A. Trinity College, 

Cambridge, M.A. and Pli.D. Heidelberg. Is. 6d. 

AtJienceum.— " A cheap and excellent history of England, admirably adapted 

for the use of junior classes. Tlie various changes that have taken place in 

our constitution are briefly but clearly described. It is surprising how successfully 

the editor has not merely avoided the obscurity which generally accompanies 

brevity, but invested his narrative with an interest too often wanting in 

larger historical works. Tlie information conveyed is thoroughly sound ; and 

the utility of the book is much increased by the addition of examination 

questions at the end of each chapter. Whether regarded as an interesting 

reading-book or as an instructive class-book, this history deserves to rank 

high. 

History of Great Britain and Ireland ; 

with an Account 

of the present State and Resources of the United Kingdom and its 

Colonies. With Questions and a Map. By Dr White. 3s. 

Aihenceum.—" A carefully compiled history for the use of Schools. The 

writer has consulted the more recent authorities: his opinions are liberal, 

and on the whole just and impartial: the succession of events is developed 

with clearness, and with more of that pictaresque effect which so deliglits the 

young than is common in historical abstracts." 

Observer.—" It is decidedly one of the best 'works yet furnished for the 

information of those who seek to acquire a good general knowledge of the 

political and social history of the British Empire." 

History of Scotland; with Questions for Examination. 

Edited by Dr White. Is. 

History of France ; 

Map. Edited by Dr White. 3s. 6d. 

with Questions for Examination, and a 

Athenaeum.—" The concluding chapter on the Intellectual Progress of France 

will be found to be a practical guide to the young student through the extensive 

but perilous fields of French literature. Dr White is remarkably happy 

in combining convenient brevity with sufficiency of information, clearness of 

exposition, and interest of detail. He shows great judgment in apportioning 

to each subject its due amount of consideration."

Outlines of Universal History. Edited by Dr White. 

Spectator.—"TUstinct in its arrangement, skilful in its selection of leading 

features, close and clear in its narrative." 

Dr White's Elements of Universal History. On a New 

and Systematic Plan. In Three Parts. Part I. Ancient History ; 

Part II. History of the Middle Ages ; Part III. Modern History. 

With a Map of the World. 7s. ; or in Parts, 2s. 6d. each. 

The author has divided the history into periods of centuries, preserving at 

the same time such distinctness and continuity in the narrative tliat the annals 

of each country may he separately studied. The work contains numerous 

synoptical and other tables, to guide the researches of the student, with 

sketches of literature, antiquities, and manners during each of the great 

chronological epochs. 

Outlines of the History of Rome; with Questions for 

Examination. Edited by Dr White. Is. 6d. 

London Review.— "This abridgment is admirably adapted for the use of 

scliools,—the best book that a teacher could place in the hand of a youthful 

student." 

Sacred History, from the Creation of the World to the 

Destruction of Jerusalem. With Questions for Examination. 

Edited by Dr White. Is. 6d. 

Baptist Magazine.—"An interesting epitome of sacred history, calculated to 

inspire the young with a love of the divine records, as well as to store the 

mind with knowledge." 

Elements of General History, Ancient and Modem. To 

which are added, a Comparative View of Ancient and Modem 

Geography and a Table of Chronology. By Alexander Fraseb 

Tytler, Lord Woodhouselee, formerly Professor of History in the 

University of Edinburgh. New Edition, with the History continued. 

With two large Maps, etc. 3s. 6d. 

Watts' Catechism of Scripture History, and of the 

Condition of the Jews from the Close of the Old Testament to 

the Time of Christ. With Intboduction by W. K. Tweedie 

D.D. 2s. 

With the 

Narrative brought down to the Middle of the Nineteenth Century, 

To which is added an Outline of the British Constitution. With 

Questions for Examination at the end of each Section. 3s. 6d. 

Simpson's Goldsmith's History of England ; 

Simpson's Goldsmith's History of Rome. With Questions 

for Examination at the end of each Section. 3s. 6d.

14 Writing, Arithmetic, and Book-keeping. 

WRITING, ARITHMETIC, AND BOOK-KEEPING. 

Arithmetic adapted to the New Code, in Three Parts. 

By Alex. Tiìotter, Teacher of Mathematics, Edinburgh. 

Pabt I. The Simple Rules, ... 36 pages. 2d. Answers, 3d. 

„ II. The Compound Rules, . . 36 pages. 2d. Answers, 3d. 

„ III. Practice to Decimals, . . 52 pages. 3d. Answers, 3d. 

•.* Or strongly bound in one Volume, price 8d. 

Practical Arithmetic for Junior Classes. By Henry 

G. C. Smith, Teacher of Arithmetic and Mathematics in George 

Heriot's Hospital. 66 pages, 6d. stifif wrapper. Answers, 6d. 

From tht Rev. Philip Kelland, A.M., F.R.SS. L. & E., late Fellow of Queen's 

College, Cambridge, Professor of Mathematics in lite University of Edinburgh. 

"I am glad to learn that Mr Smith's Manual for Junior Classes, the MS. 

of which I have examined, is nearly ready for publication. Trusting that 

the Illustrative Processes which he has exhibited may prove as eflBcient in 

other hands as tliey have proved in his own, I have great pleasure in 

recommending the work, being satisfled that a better Arithmetician and a 

more judicious Teacher than Mr Smith is not to be found." 

Practical Arithmetic for Senior Classes ; being a Continuation 

of the above; with Tables and Exercises on the Metric 

System. By Henry G. C. Smith. 2s. Answers, 6d. Key, 2s. 6d. 

't* ^àe. Exercises in both works, which are copious and original, have been 

constructed so as to combine interest with utility. They are accompanied by 

illustrative processes. 

Lessons in Arithmetic for Junior Classes. By James 

Trotter. 71 pages, 6d. stiff wrapper ; or 8d. cloth. Answers, 6d. 

This book was carefully revised, and enlarged by the introduction of Simple 

Examples of the various rules, worked out at length and fully explained, and 

of Practical Exercises, by the Author's son, Mr Alexander Trotter, Teacher of 

Mathematics, etc., Edinburgh ; and to the present edition Exercises on the 

proposed Decimal Coinage have been added. 

Lessons in Arithmetic for Advanced Classes; Being 

a Continuation of the Lessons in Arithmetic for Junior Classes. 

Containing Vulgar and Decimal Fractions ; Simple and Compound 

Proportion, with their Applications ; Simple and Compound Interest ; 

Involution and Evolution, etc. By Alexander Trotter. New 

Edition, with Tables and Exercises on the Metric System. 80 pages, 

6d. in stiflF wrapper ; or 8d. cloth. Answers, 6d. 

Each subject is also accompanied by an example fully worked out and 

minutely explained. The Exercises are numerous and practical.

Writing, Arithmetic, and Book-keeping . 

A Complete System of Arithmetic. Theoretical and 

containing the Fundamental Rules, and their Application 

Practical ; 

to Mercantile Computations ; Vulgar and Decimal Fractions ; Involution 

and Evolution; Series; Annuities, Certain and Contingent. 

By Mr Trotter. Ss. Key, 43. 6d. 

' * All the 3400 Exercises in this work are neio. They are applicable to the 

business of real life, and are framed in such a way as to lead the pupil to reason 

on the matter. There are upwards of 200 Examples wrought out at length and 

minutely explained. 

Ingram's Principles of Arithmetic, and their Application 

to Business explained in a Popular Manner, and clearly Illustrated 

by Simple Rules and Numerous Examples. Eemodelled and greatly 

Enlarged, with Tables and Exercises on the Metric System. By 

Alexander Trotter, Teacher of Jilathematics, etc., Edinburgh. Is. 

Key, 2s. 

The Elementary Rules are explained in concise and intelligible language 

adapted to the capacity of youth. Each rule is followed by an example 

wrought out at length, and is illustrated by a great variety of practical 

questions applicable to business. 

Melrose's Concise System of Practical Arithmetic; 

containing the Fundamental Rules and their Application to Mercantile 

Calculations; Vulgar and Decimal Fractions; Exchanges; 

Involution and Evolution; Progressions; Annuities, Certain and 

Contingent, etc. Re-arranged, Improved, and Enlarged, with Tables 

and Exercises on the Metric System. By Alexander Trotter, 

Teacher of Mathematics, etc., in Edinburgh. Is. 6d. Key, 2s. 6d. 

Each rule is followed by an example worked out at length and minutely 

explained, and by numerous practical Exercises. The Rules will be found 

so arranged as to lead the pupil by an easy gradation from the simplest to 

the most difficult operations in arithmetic. 

Hutton's Book-Keeping, by Trotter, 2s. 

Sets of Ruled Writing Booiti.—Single Entry, per set, Is. 6d. ; 

per set, Is. 6d. 

15 

Double Entry, 

Stewart's First Lessons in Arithmetic, for Junior Classes; 

containing Exercises in Simple and Compound Quantities arranged 

so as to enable the Pupil to perform the Operations with the greatest 

facility and correctness. With Exercises on the Proposed Decimal 

Coinage. 6d. stiff wrapper. Answers, 6d. 

Stewart's Practical Treatise on Arithmetic, Arranged 

for Pupils in Classes. With Tables and Exercises on the Metric 

System. Is. 6d. This work includes the Answers; with Questions 

for Examination. Key, 23. 

Gray's Introduction to Arithmetic; with Tables and 

Esereisea on the Metric System. lOd. bound in leather. Key, 23.

16 Copy-Books^ Mathematics^ etc. 

Lessons in Arithmetic for Junior Classes. By James 

Maclaeen, Edinburgh. With Answers annexed. 6d. 

Maclaren's Practical Book-Keeping. Is. 6d. 

A Set of Ruled Wnting Books, expressly adapltdfor this work, Is. 6d. 

Scott's First Lessons in Arithmetic. 6d. Answers, 6d. 

Scott's Mental Calculation. 6d. Teacher's Copy, 6d. 

Scott's Copy Lines, in a Progressive Series, 4d. each. 

PHILOSOPHY, MATHEMATICS, ETC. 

Text-Book to Kant. The Critique of Pure Reason : 

esthetic, Categories, Schematism. Translation, Reproduction, 

Commentary. With Index and Biographical Sketch. By J. 

HcTCHisoN Stirling, LL.D., Author of " The Secret of Hegel." 

8vo, Us. 

A Handbook of the History of Philosophy. By Dr 

Albert Sciiwegler. Eighth Edition. Translated and Annotated 

by James Hutchi.son Stikunq, LL.D. Crown 8vo, 6s. 

Geometry for Schools. Comprising Books I. and II. of 

Euclid, with Adcìitùms and Numerous Exercises. By A. J. G. 

Barclat, M.A., Mathematical Master in George Watson's College, 

Edinburgh. Is. bound. Second Edition now ready. 

Schoolmaster.—"ThorongMy practical." 

Sdwobnistress.—"We can safely recommend it. 

Glasgow Herald.— "A text-book of exceptionally bigb merit." 

Ingram's Concise System of Mathematics, Theoretical 

and Practical, for Schools and Private Students. Improved by 

James Trotter. With 340 Woodcuts. 4s. 6d. Key, 3s. 6d. 

GEOMETRICAL DRAWING. 

The First Grade Practical Geometry. Intended chiefly 

for the use of Drawing Classes in Elementary Schools taught in 

connexion with the Department of Science and Art. By John 

Kennedy, Head Master of Dundee School of Art. 6d.

— 

Music, School Registers, etc. 17 

SCHOOL SONGS WITH MUSIC. 

Elements of Vocal Music: An Introduction to the Art 

of Reading Music at Sight. B7 T. M. Hdnter, Director to the 

Association for the Revival of Sacred Music in Scotland. Price 6d. 

•«• This Work has hem prepared with great care, and is the result of long 

practical experience in teaching. It is adapted to all ages and classes, and toill 

be found considerably to lighten the labour of both teacher and pupil. The 

exercises are printed in the standard notation, and the notes art named as in the 

original Sol-fa System. 

Contents.— Music Scales.—Exercises in Time.—Syncopation.—The Chromatic 

Scale.—Transposition of Scale.—The Minor Scale.—Part Singing. 

Explanation of Musical Terms. 

Hunter's School Songs. With Preface by Rev. James 

Cdreie, Training College, Edinburgh. 

FOR JUNIOR CLASSES: 60 Songs, principally set for two 

voices. First Series. 4d.— Second Series : 63 Songs. 4d. 

FOR ADVANCED CLASSES: 44 Songs, principally set for three 

voices. First Series. 6d. 

Second Series : ^6 Hongs. 6d. 

*;st* TONIC SOL-FA Edition of Hunter's Songs, both Series, Reduced 

in Price. Jdnior Classes, 2d.—Advanced Classes, 2d. 

Hunter's National School Song Book, composed of Songs, 

Duets, Trios, Choruses, and Rounds. Tonic Sol Fa. 89 Songs. 4d. 

Songs for Schools. Written and Composed by Clift 

Wade. With Simple Accompaniment for Harmonium or Pianoforte. 

Price 6d. 

The Tunes will be found easy, melodious, and of moderate compass, and 

the Words simple and interesting; both being easy to teach and remember. 

*:j^* A Second Series of Wade's Songs is now ready, price 6d. 

School Psalmody : 58 Pieces for Three Voices. 4d, 

School Register. Pupil's Daily Register of Marks. 

Improved Editimi. Containing Spaces for 48 Weeks ; to whicli are 

added, Spaces for a Summary and Order of Merit for each Month, 

for each Quarter, and for the Year. For Schools in general, and 

constructed to furnish information required by Government. 2d. 

School Register of Attendance, Absence, and Fees : 

adapted to the Provisions of the New Codes for England and Scotland. 

By Morris F. Mykon, F.E.LS. Each folio will serve 54 pupils for 

a Quarter. Is. 

—

Class-Books by CMS. HENRI SCHNEIDER, F.E.I.S., M.C.P., 

Lato senior French Master in tlie Edinburgh High School, the School of Arts 

and Watt Institution, etc. ; French Examiner to the Educational Institute 

of Scotland, etc, 

Schneider's First Year's Frencli Course. Is. Sd. 

%* TbiB work forms a Complete Course of French for Beginners, and 

comprebenda Grammatical Exercises, with Rules; Reading Lessons, with 

Notes; Dictation; Exercises in Conversation; and a Vocabulary of all the 

Words in the Book. Easy Lessons are given in translating French into 

English and English into French, with Exercises for translation and retraoslation 

and repetition. 

The Edinburgh High School French Conversation- 

GliAMMAK, arranged on an entirely New Plan, with Questions 

and Answers. Dedicated, by permission, to Fro/essor Max MiMer, 

3s. 6d. Key, 2s. 6d. 

Letter from Pbofebbob Max MBllkb, University of Oxford. 

" My Deae Sib,—I am very happy to find that my anticipations as to the 

success of your Grammar have been fully realized. Your book does not 

require any longer a godfather; but if you wish me to act as such, I shall be 

most happy to have my name connected with your prosperous child.—Yours 

very truly, 

Max Mì3li

French. 19 

Standard Pronotmcmg Dictionary of the French and 

ENGLISH LANGUAGES. In Two Parts. Part L French and 

English.— Vast II. English and French. By Gabeiel Sdbenne, 

late Professor in the Scottish Naval and Military Acadenay, etc. 

The First Part comprehends Words in Common Use, Terms connected 

with Science and the Fine Arts, Historical, Geographical, 

and Biographical Names, with the Pronunciation according to the 

French Academy and the most eminent Lexicographers and Grammarians. 

The Second Part is an ample Dictionary of English words, 

with the Pronunciation according to the hest Authorities. The 

whole is preceded hy a Practical and Comprehensive System of 

French Pronunciation. 7s. 6d., strongly bound. 

The Pronuncio Iwn is shown hy a different spelling of the Words. 

Surenne's French - English and English - French 

DICTIONARY, without the Pronunciation. 3s. 6d., strongly bound. 

Surenne's Fenelon's Telemaque. 2 vols., Is, each, stiff 

wrapper ; or bound together, 2s. 6d. 

Surenne's Voltaire's Histoire de Charles XII, Is. 

stiflf wrapper ; or Is. 6d. bound. 

Surenne's Voltaire's Histoire de Russie sous Pierre 

LE GRAND. 2 vols., Is. each; or bound together, 2s. 6d, 

Surenne's Voltaire's La Henriade. Is. stiff" wrapper; 

or Is. 6d. bound. 

Surenne's New French Dialogues. With an Introduction 

to French Pronunciation, a Copious Vocabulary, and Models of 

Epistolary Correspondence. Pronunciation marked thrmi.ghmit- 2s. 

Surenne's New French Manual and Traveller's 

COMPANION. Containing an Introduction to French Pronunciation 

; a Copious Vocabulary; a very complete Series of Dialogues 

on Topics of Every-day Life ; Dialogues on the Principal Continental 

Tours, and on the Objects of Interest in Paris ; with Models 

of Epistolary Correspondence. Map. Pronunciation marked throughout. 

3s. 6d. 

Surenne's Pronouncing French Primer. Containing 

the Principles of French Pronunciation, a Vocabulary of easy and 

familiar Words, and a Selection of Phrases. Is. 6d. stiflf wrapper. 

Surenne's Moliere's L'Avare : Comédie. 6d., or Is. bound. 

Surenne's Moliere's Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme : 

Comédie. 6d. stiff wrapper; or Is. bound. 

Surenne's Moliere's Le Misanthrope : Comédie. Le 

K AaiAOE FORCE : Comédis. 6d. stiff wrapper ; or Is. bound.

First French Class-Book, or a Practical and Easy Method 

of learning the French Lanquage, consisting of a series of French 

and Enqlish Exercises, progressively and grammaticallj arranged. 

By Jdles Caron, F.E.I.S., French Teacher, Edin. Is. Key, Is. 

This work follows the natural mode in which a child learns to speak its own 

language, by repeating the same words and phrases in a great variety of forms 

until the pupil becomes familiar with their use. 

Caron's First French Reading-Book : Being Easy and 

Interesting Lessons, proêssively arranged. With a copious Vocabulary 

of the Words and Idioms in the Text. Is. 

The object of this work is to make the pupil familiar with both forms of 

French, tlie language of books and the language of conversation, by giving 

him correct models of French as it is written and French as it is spoken. 

Caron's Principles of French Grammar. With numeroixs 

Exercises. 2s. Key, 2s. 

Spectator.— " May be recommended for clearness of exposition, gradual progression, 

and a distinct exhibition to the mind through the eye by means of typographical 

display : the last an important point where the subject admits of it." 

An Easy Grammar of the French language. With 

ExERCisEa and Dialogues. By John Christison, Teacher of 

Modern Languages. Is. 4d. Key, 8d. 

Christison's Recneil de Fables et Contes Choisis, 

à r Usage de la Jeunesse. Is. 4d. 

Christison's Fleury's Histoire de France, Racontée 

à la Jeunesse. With Translations of the difficult Passages. 2s. 6d. 

The French New Testament. The most approved Protestant 

VER.SION, and the one in general use in the French Reformed 

Churches. Pocket Edition, roan, gilt edges. Is. 6d. 

Chambaud's Fables Choisies. With a Vocabulary containing 

the meaning of all the Words. By Scot and Wells. 2s. 

Hallard's French Grammar. 3s. 6d. Key, 3s. 6d. 

Grammar of the French Language. By A. Beljame, 

B.A., LL.B., Vice-Principal of the Paris International College. 28. 

Beljame's Four Hundred Practical Exercises. 28. 

•,* Both Books hound together, 3s. M. 

The whole work has been composed with a view to conversation, a great 

number of the Exercises being in the form of questions andaiuirers.

Latin and Greek. 21 

EDINBURGH ACADEMY CLASS-BOOKS. 

1. Rudiments of The latin Language, for the Use of 

the Edinburgh Academy. In Two Parts. By James Clyde, M. A., 

LL.D., author of "Greek Syntax," etc. 12mo, price 23.; or in 

Two Parts, sold separately, price Is. 3d. each. 

It is divided into two parts, each containing the same number of sections 

nnder the same headings, in which the same subjects are treated of—in Part 

1. with a view to beginners, in Part II. with a view to advanced students. 

Athenieum.— "This volume is a very full, correct, and well-arranged grammar 

of the Latin language, and is wonderfully cheap. It compares favourably 

with the Clarendon Press Elementary Grammar. Distinguishing features 

are the simple but effective device of making two parts of accidence, instead 

of relegating important matter to the comparative obscurity of an appendix, 

and the rejection of the objectionable method of combining a reader and exercises 

with the grammar." 

Educational News.— " A fresh, thorough, and methodical treatise, bearing on 

every page evidences of the author's ripe scholarship and rare power of lucid 

expo.sition." 

\* The old edition of the EDixBtmoH Academj Latin Eodiments moy still 

be had if desired. 

2. Latin Delectus; with a Vocabulary containing an 

Explanation of every Word and Difficult Expression which occurs 

in the Text. 3s. 

3. Rudiments of The Greek Language, with the Syntax 

entirely re-written, and with Accent and Quantity treated of according 

to their mutual relations. 3s. 6d. 

4. Greek Extracts; with a Vocabulary containing an 

Explanation of every Word and of the more Difficult Passages in 

the Text. 3s. 6d. 

Compendious Greek Grammar for the use of Colleges and 

Schools. By \V. D. Geddes, M. A., LL.D., Principal, late Professor 

of Greek, in the University of Aberdeen. New Edition, Revised 

and largely Keconstructed. 4s. 

Scotsman.— "One of the best working Greek Grammars for school or 

college use that are before the public." 

Greek Syntax ; with a Rationale of the Constructions. 

By Jas. Clyde, LL.D., lately a Classical Master of the Edin. 

Academy. With Prefatory Notice by John S. Blackie, lately 

Professor of Greek in the University of Edinburgh. 5th Edition. 

Revised throwjliovt and largeli/ re-irritten, containing an English 

Summary for the use of Learners, and a chapter on Accents. 4s. 6d.

Latin and Greek. 

DR HUNTER'S CLASSICS. 

1. Hunter's Euddiman's Rudiments. Is. 6cL 

2. Hunter's Sallust; with Footnotes and Translations. 

Reduced to Is. 

3. Hunter's Virgil ; with Notes and other Illustrations. 

Reduced to 2s. 

4. Hunter's Horace. Beduced to Is. M. 

5. Hunter's Livy. Books XXI. to XXV. With Critical 

and Explanatory Notes. Reduced to 23. 

Dymock's Caesar ; 

with Illustrative Notes, a Historical and 

Geographical Index, and a Map of Ancient Gaul. 43. 

Dymock's Sallust; with Explanatory Footnotes and a 

Historical and Geographical Index. Reduced f j Is. 

Caesar with Vocabulary explaining every ; 

Word in the Text ; 

Notes, Map, and Historical Memoir. By William M'Dowall, 

late Inspector of the Heriot Foundation Schools, Edinburgh. 3s. 

M'Dowall's Csesar. Book I. With Vocabulary explaining 

every Word in the Text. Is. 

M'Dowall's Virgil ; with Memoir, Notes, and Vocabulary 

explaining every Word in the Text. 3s. 

Lectiones Selectse ; or, Select Latin Lessons in Morality, 

History, and Biography : for the use of Beginners. With a Vocabulary 

explaining every Word in the Text. By 0. Melville, late 

of the Grammar School, Kirkcaldy. Is. 6d. 

Ainsworth's Latin Dictionary, by Duncan. 1070 pp. 9s. 

A New First Latin Course; comprising Grammar and 

Exercises, with Vocabularies. By Geo. Ogilvie, M.A., LL.D., Head 

Master of George Watson's College for Beys, Edinburgh. Is. 6d. 

*,* In the Neto Edition, the number of the Simpler Exercises has been 

increased and the book rendered more generally useful by an Appendix on 

Irregular Declensions, Prosody, the Soman Calendar, and the Subjunctive Mood. 

Educational News.—" Exceedingly well adapted for the purpose for which it 

is intended." Banffihire Journal.— " An admirable book." 

Educational Times.— " Well and carefully done." *,* This Claia-booJc supplies 

sufficient work /or a f/ear, without the necessity of using any other book.

Latin and Greek. 23 

A New First Greek Course ; comprising Grammar, 

Syntax, and Exercises; with Vocabularies containing all the 

V/ords in the Text. By Tiios. A. Stewart, oneof H.M. Inspectors 

of Schools in Scotland, lately Senior Classical Master in George 

Watson's College Schools, Edinburgh, and formerly Assistant-Professor 

of Greek in the University of Aberdeen. 2s. 6d. 

AthencEum.— "Superior to most works of the kind." 

Record.—" The easiest, and most practical, and most useful introduction to 

Greek yet published in this country." 

Educational Neiiis.— "This little book deserves the highest commendation 

. . . Great skill is shown in selecting those facts of Accidence and Syntax 

which ought to be given in such a book. 

*,* This Class-book supplies sufficient work/or a year, without the necessity of 

using any other book. 

Stewart's Advanced Greek Course. Comprising a 

Synopsis of Greek Syntax, Hints towards Composition, Exercises in 

Continuous English Narrative, and a full Vocabulary containing all 

the Words in the Text. 2s. 6d. 

Educational News.— " This is an admirable little manual, and will form an 

excellent sequel to the author's deservedly popular ' First Greek " 

Course.' 

Glasgow Herald.— " The synopsis of synta.^ is masterly, and the more useful 

and important idioms are clearly put before the student." 

Key to Ditto, price 2s. 6s. 

Stewart's Cornelius Nepos; with Notes, Chronological 

Tables, and a Vocabulary explaining every Word in the Text. 

Reduced to 2s. 

Duncan's Greek Testament. 3s. 6d. 

Xenophon's Anabasis, Books I. and II. ; with Vocabulary 

giving an explanation of every Word in the Text, and a Translation 

of the more Difficult Phrases. By James Fergusson, M.D., 

late Rector of the West End Academy, Aberdeen. 2s. 6d. 

Athenoeum.— "This admirable little work. . . . The copious, correct, and 

well-arranged Vocabulary at the end contains good translations of difRcult 

passages, with exact information upon points of antiquities, derived from the 

best and most modern authorities." 

Homer's Iliad, Books I., VI., XX., and XXIV. ; from 

Bekker's Text, as revised by Dr Veitch ; with Vocabulary explaining 

every Word in the Text, and a Translation of the more 

Difficult Passages. By Dr FEEacssON. Reduced to 2s. 6d. 

Alhenceum.—" The portions selected are suitable. . . . The derivation 

and meaning of each word are well explained, and all difficult phrases are 

appropriately translated." 

24 Latin, Greek, etc. 

LATIN ELEMENTARY WORKS AND CLASSICS. 

Edited by Geobqb FEBonsON, LL.D., lately Professor of Hnmanity in King's 

College and University of Aberdeen, and formerly one of the 

Masters of the Edinburgh Academy. 

1. Ferguson's Grammatical Exercises. With Notes 

and a Vocabulary explaining every Word. 2s.— Key, 2s. 

2. Ferguson's Introductory Latin Delectus: Intended 

to follow the Latin Eudiments ; with a Vocabulary containing an 

Explanation of every Word and of every DifBcult Expression. 

Reduced to Is. 6d. 

3. Ferguson's Ovid's Metamorphoses. With Notes and 

Index, Mythological, Geographical, and Historical. 2s. 6d. 

4. Ferguson's Ciceronis Orationes Selectae. Containing 

pro Lege Manilla, IV. in Catilinam, pro A. L. Archia, pro T. A. 

Milone. Ex Orellii recensione. Reduced to Is. 

ITALIAN. 

Theoretical and Practical Italian Grammar; with 

numerous Exercises and Examples, illustrative of every Eule, and 

a Selection of Phrases and iJialogues. By E. Lemmi, LL.D., 

Italian Tutor to H.K.H. the Prince of Wales. 5s.— Key, 6s. 

From Count Saffi, Professor of the Italian Language at Oxford.— " I have 

adopted your Grammar for the elementary instruction of students of Italian 

in the Taylor Institution, and find it admirably adapted to the purpose, as 

well for the order and clearness of the rules, as for the practical excellence 

and ability of the exercises with which you have enriched it." 

GERMAN. 

A New German Reader, in Prose and Verse ; with a 

Grammatical and Etymological Vocabulary, containing the Meaning 

of all the Words in the Text ; Forms of Commercial ami other 

Correspondence, and Specimens of German National Hanawriting. 

For the Use of Schools. By Charles Fischer-Fischaet, of the 

Edinburgh Merchant Company's Educational Institutions, etc. 

Reduced to 2s. 6d. 

Fischart's German Class-Book for Beginners: Being 

a series of German Stories, with Vocabulary, Grammar, Exeroisea, 

etc. On an Original Plan. Enlarged Editwn. Is. 6d. 

PUBLISHED BY OLIVER AND BOYD, EDINBURGH : 

60LD ALSO BY SIUPEIS, MABSBALL, AND CO., LONDON, AND ALL BOOKSELLERg.

Oliver and Boyd's Educational Works. 

LATIN AND GREEK. ^ ^ 

Clyde's (Dr) Greek Syntax, witli Notice by Professor Blackie..., 4 6 

Kdikburgh Acadkmy Latm Kudimeiits 2 

Do. New Kdition by Jas. Clyde, LL.D. 2 

Latin Delectus, with Vocabulary 3 

Greek Kudiments 3 6 

Greek Extracts, with V ocabuUry and Index 3 6 

Fbbguson's (Professor) Grammatical Exercises [Tlie Key, 2s.]... 2 

Introductory Latin Delectus, with Vocabulary 1 6 

Ovid's Metamorphoses, with Notes and Index 2 

Ferousson's Xenophon's Anabasis, Books I. and II., with Vocab. 2 6 

Homer'slliad,BooksI.,VI.,XX.,XXIV.,with Vocab. 2 6 

Geddes's (Principal) Greek Grammar, for Colleges and Schools.. 4 

Huntek's Ruddiman's Latin Rudiments 1 6 

M'Dowall'b Gasar, with Vocabulary, Notes, Map, and Memoir.. 3 

Virgil, with Vocabulary, Notes, and Memoir 3 

Melville's Lectiones Selecta;, for Beginners, with Vocabulary.. 1 6 

Ooilvie's (Dr) New First Latin Course \ 6 

Stewabt's Cornelius Nepos, with Notes, Index, and Vocabulary 2 6 

(Thomas A.J New First Greek Course 2 6 

Advanced Greek Course fA'f^, 2s. 6d.]... 2 6 

FRENCH. 

BELJAME'sFrencli Grammar,2s.—I''renchExercises,28. Complete 3 6 

Gabon's First French Glass-Book (The Kty, Is.J 

1 

First French Reading-Book, with Vocabulary 1 

French Grammar, with Exercises [The Key, 2s.] 2 

CHASiBAnD'sFablesGhoisies, by Scot and Wells, with Vocabulary 2 

Chbistison's Easy Grammar of the French Language [A'ey, 8d.]. 1 4 

Recueil de Fables et Contes Choisis, with Vocab... 1 4 

Fleury's Histoire de France 2 

French New Testament, Protestant Version 1 

Hallard's French Grammar [The Key, 3s. 6d.] 3 

Schneider's French Conversation Grammar [The Key, 2s. 6d.]... 3 

Edinburgh High School New Practical French Reader 3 

„ French Manual of Conversation, etc 2 

6 

6 

6 

6 

6 

6 

EcrinLittéraire; forReading,Dictation,&Kecitation 3 6 

First Year's French Course 

Surbnne's French Manual and Traveller's Companion 

New French Dialogues 

1 

3 

2 

6 

6 

French and English Dictionary,without Pronunciation 3 6 

Pronouncing French and English Dictionary 7 6 

Fénélon'sTélémaque, 2vols.,eachls.; bound together 2 

Voltaire's Histoire deCharlesXII.,stiffwrapper(bd. 1/6) 1 

6 

Histoire de Russie, 2 vols each 1 

La Henriade (bound, Is. 6d.) 1 

Molière's L'Avare—Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme..each 6 

ITALIAN AND GERMAN. 

Lemmi's Theoretical and Practical Italian Grammar[Thefl'e!/, 5s.] 5 

Fischabt's German Glass-Book for Beginners (a Course) 1 6 

New German Reader, with Vocabulary 2 6

Oliver and Boyd's Educational Works. 

PHILOSOPHY AND MATHEMATICS. 

.«. d. 

STlBLlJfo's (Dr Iliitchisnn) Text-Book to Kant 14 

Handbookof the History of Philosophy. By Dr Schwegler 6 

Baeclay'3 Geometry. Euclid, Books I. & II., with Additions and 

Exercises 1 

IsGEAJi's System of ilatliematics, by Trotter [Key, 3s. 6d.] 4 6 

WRITING, ARITHMETIC, AND BOOK-KEEPING. 

Gbat's Introduction to Arithmetic [The Key, 2s.'] 10 

Hcttok's Book-keeping, by S. & D. Entry, by Trotter 2 

Two Ruled Writing-Books for Ditto : Single Entry I 6 

Double Entry 1 6 

Ijjgbam's Principles of Arithmetic, Improved Edition [Key, 2s.] 1 

MACLAREN'sArithmeticfor Junior Classes, -with Answers annexed 6 

System of Practical Book-keeping 1 6 

A set of Ruled Writin,c-Books adapted for the Work 1 6 

Melrose's Arithmetic, by Ingram and Trotter \^Key, 2s. 6d.] 1 6 

Scott's First Lessons in Arithmetic [^«swers, 6d.1 6 

Mental Calculation, Pupil's Copy, 6d.; Teacher's Copy.... 6 

Copy Lines, ."0 Sorts .....each 4 

Smith's Practical Arithmetic for Junior Classes \Ansv)ers, 6d.].... 6 

Arithmetic for Senior Classes [^nsi/jers, 6d.; Key, 2s. 6d.] 2 

Stewart's First Lessons in Arithmetic [Annwers, 6d.] 

Practical Arithmetic, Improved Edition [The Key, 2s. J 1 

Trotter's Arithmetic adapted to the New Code. Parts I. and 11^ 

6 

each 2d.; Part III., 3d. In 1 vol., Sd. ^nsifers, 3d. each Part 

.arithmetic for Junior Classes [^(iswers, 6d.] 

: Arithmetic for Advanced Classes \Answers, &A'\ 

Complete System of Arithmetic [The Key, 4s. 6d.] 3 

6 

6 

Keitsedt's First Grade Practical Geometry 6 

Object-Lesson Cards on the Vegetable Kingdom ; 

20 in a Box_.21 

on the Animal Kingdom; 14 in a Box 21 

on the Mineral Kingdom; 14 in a Box 21 

Ross's How to Train Young Eyes and Ears 1 

Glasgow Infant School Magazine, compiled by Caughie, 1st and 

6 

2nd Series, each, bound 3 

SCHOOL REGISTERS. 

Myron-'s School Register of Attendance, Absence, and Fees, 

adapted to the Provisions of the New Codes for England and 

Scotland. Each folio serves 54 pupils for a quarter 1 

Pdpil's Daily Register of Marks. Spaces for 48 Weeks ; with 

Spaces for a Summary and Order of Merit for each month, for 

each quarter, and for the year 

*.' A Specimen Copy of most of these WorTiS sent to Bead Teachers 

POST FREE, on reuiptofhalf price in stamps, by Oliver and Boyd, Edinburgh.

A theoretical and practical Italian grammar - National Library of ...

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?